- Manuals
- Brands
- Mitsubishi Electric
- Robot
- Melfa
- Specifications Manual
Mitsubishi Electric Melfa RH6FHD,12FHD Series Manual PDF
Summary of Content for Mitsubishi Electric Melfa RH6FHD,12FHD Series Manual PDF
Mitsubishi Industrial Robot CR750-D/CR751-D Controller
RH-6FH-D/12FH-D/20FH-D Series RH-3FHR-D Series
Standard Specifications Manual
BFP-A8863-AT
All teaching work must be carried out by an operator who has received special training. (This also applies to maintenance work with the power source turned ON.) Enforcement of safety training
For teaching work, prepare a work plan related to the methods and procedures of operating the robot, and to the measures to be taken when an error occurs or when restarting. Carry out work following this plan. (This also applies to maintenance work with the power source turned ON.) Preparation of work plan
Prepare a device that allows operation to be stopped immediately during teaching work. (This also applies to maintenance work with the power source turned ON.) Setting of emergency stop switch
During teaching work, place a sign indicating that teaching work is in progress on the start switch, etc. (This also applies to maintenance work with the power source turned ON.) Indication of teaching work in progress
Provide a fence or enclosure during operation to prevent contact of the operator and robot. Installation of safety fence
Establish a set signaling method to the related operators for starting work, and follow this method. Signaling of operation start
As a principle turn the power OFF during maintenance work. Place a sign indicating that maintenance work is in progress on the start switch, etc. Indication of maintenance work in progress
Before starting work, inspect the robot, emergency stop switch and other related devices, etc., and confirm that there are no errors. Inspection before starting work
Always read the following precautions and the separate "Safety Manual" before starting use of the robot to learn the required measures to be taken.
Safety Precautions
CAUTION
CAUTION
WARNING
CAUTION
DANGER
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
The points of the precautions given in the separate "Safety Manual" are given below. Refer to the actual "Safety Manual" for details.
When automatic operation of the robot is performed using multiple control devices (GOT, programmable controller, push-button switch), the interlocking of operation rights of the devices, etc. must be designed by the customer.
Use the robot within the environment given in the specifications. Failure to do so could lead to a drop or reliability or faults. (Temperature, humidity, atmosphere, noise environment, etc.)
Transport the robot with the designated transportation posture. Transporting the robot in a non-designated posture could lead to personal injuries or faults from dropping.
Always use the robot installed on a secure table. Use in an instable posture could lead to positional deviation and vibration.
Wire the cable as far away from noise sources as possible. If placed near a noise source, positional deviation or malfunction could occur.
Do not apply excessive force on the connector or excessively bend the cable. Failure to observe this could lead to contact defects or wire breakage.
Make sure that the workpiece weight, including the hand, does not exceed the rated load or tolerable torque. Exceeding these values could lead to alarms or faults.
Securely install the hand and tool, and securely grasp the workpiece. Failure to observe this could lead to personal injuries or damage if the object comes off or flies off during operation.
Securely ground the robot and controller. Failure to observe this could lead to malfunctioning by noise or to electric shock accidents.
Indicate the operation state during robot operation. Failure to indicate the state could lead to operators approaching the robot or to incorrect operation.
When carrying out teaching work in the robot's movement range, always secure the priority right for the robot control. Failure to observe this could lead to personal injuries or damage if the robot is started with external commands.
Keep the jog speed as low as possible, and always watch the robot. Failure to do so could lead to interference with the workpiece or peripheral devices.
After editing the program, always confirm the operation with step operation before starting automatic operation. Failure to do so could lead to interference with peripheral devices because of programming mistakes, etc.
Make sure that if the safety fence entrance door is opened during automatic operation, the door is locked or that the robot will automatically stop. Failure to do so could lead to personal injuries.
Never carry out modifications based on personal judgments, or use non- designated maintenance parts. Failure to observe this could lead to faults or failures.
DANGER
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
When the robot arm has to be moved by hand from an external area, do not place hands or fingers in the openings. Failure to observe this could lead to hands or fingers catching depending on the posture.
Do not stop the robot or apply emergency stop by turning the robot controller's main power OFF. If the robot controller main power is turned OFF during automatic operation, the robot accuracy could be adversely affected. Moreover, it may interfere with the peripheral device by drop or move by inertia of the arm.
Do not turn off the main power to the robot controller while rewriting the internal information of the robot controller such as the program or parameters.
If the main power to the robot controller is turned off while in automatic operation or rewriting the program or parameters, the internal information of the robot controller may be damaged.
Do not connect the Handy GOT when using the GOT direct connection function of this product. Failure to observe this may result in property damage or bodily injury because the Handy GOT can automatically operate the robot regardless of whether the operation rights are enabled or not.
Do not remove the SSCNET III cable while power is supplied to the controller. Do not look directly at light emitted from the tip of SSCNET III connectors or SSCNET III cables. Eye discomfort may be felt if exposed to the light. (Reference: SSCNET III employs a Class 1 or equivalent light source as specified in JIS C 6802 and IEC60825-1 (domestic standards in Japan).)
Attach the cap to the SSCNET III connector after disconnecting the SSCNET III cable. If the cap is not attached, dirt or dust may adhere to the connector pins, resulting in deterioration connector properties, and leading to malfunction.
Make sure there are no mistakes in the wiring. Connecting differently to the way
specified in the manual can result in errors, such as the emergency stop not being released. In order to prevent errors occurring, please be sure to check that all functions (such as the teaching box emergency stop, customer emer- gency stop, and door switch) are working properly after the wiring setup is com- pleted.
Use the network equipments (personal computer, USB hub, LAN hub, etc) confirmed by manufacturer. The thing unsuitable for the FA environment (related with conformity, temperature or noise) exists in the equipments connected to USB. When using network equipment, measures against the noise, such as measures against EMI and the addition of the ferrite core, may be necessary. Please fully confirm the operation by customer. Guarantee and maintenance of the equipment on the market (usual office automation equipment) cannot be performed.
To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the robot
and the system against unauthorized access, DoS*1 attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from unreliable networks and devices via network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls, virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions.
Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving robot trouble and system trouble by unauthorized access, DoS attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks.
*1 DoS: A denial-of-service (DoS) attack disrupts services by overloading sys- tems or exploiting vulnerabilities, resulting in a denial-of-service (DoS) state.
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
*CR751-D or CR751-Q controller
Notes of the basic component are shown.
Please install the earth leakage breaker in the primary side supply power supply of the controller of CR751-D or CR751-Q because of leakage protection.
1) Please prepare the following: Leakage current breaker (with the terminal cover), cable for connecting the primary power supply (AWG #14 (2mm2 or above), cables to ground the primary power supply (AWG #12 (3.5mm2 or above). The secondary power cable (with the ACIN connector) for single phase or three phase power is supplied with the product to match the specifications. When you build a cable suitable for your environment using the ACIN connector and the ACIN terminal supplied, prepare a secondary power cable (AWG #14 (2mm2) or above).
2) Confirm that the primary power matches the specifications. 3) Confirm that the primary power is OFF and that the earth leakage breaker power switch is OFF. 4) Connect the secondary power cable.
a) When using the supplied power cable with the ACIN connector Refer to the figure above and connect the cable from the secondary side of the earth leakage breaker.
b) When building a power cable using the ACIN connector and the ACIN terminals supplied Connect the ACIN terminals with the secondary power cable (prepared by customers), and insert the ACIN terminals to the ACIN connector pins with the following numbers. Crimping caulking is recommended to connect the ACIN terminals. For single phase: 1 and 3 For three phase: 1, 2, and 3
Refer to the figure above and connect the cable from the secondary side of the earth leakage breaker. 5) Connect this ACIN connector to the ACIN connector on the front of the controller. 6) Connect the grounding cable to the PE terminal. (M4 screw) 7) Connect the primary power cable to the primary side terminal of the earth leakage breaker.
CAUTION
PE terminal
Grounding screw
Controller
ACIN connector
AC200V AC200V
Primary
Secondary
PE terminal
Grounding screw
1 2 3 1 2 3
ACIN connector
ACIN connector
Note 2)
Note 1) Crimping swage is recommended for connecting the attachment ACIN connector (soldering is also possible) Recommendation compression tools: 234171-1(Tyco Electronics)
Note 2) The earth leakage breaker is the customer preparation. Always use the cover below. Recommendation: For single primary power supply ......... NV30FAU-2P-10A-AC100-240V-30mA, (Cover: TCS-05FA2)
For three primary power supply .......... NV30FAU-3P-10A-AC100-240V-30mA, (Cover: TCS-05FA3) Note 3) If necessary, as shown in the figure, connects the noise filter between ACIN terminal blocks and primary power supply.
(Recommended noise filter: SUP-EL20-ER6 *OKAYA ELECTRIC INDUSTRIES)
Controller
<4> LINE/LOAD
<3> LINE/LOAD <1> LINE/LOAD
<2> LINE/LOAD
Noise filter
Label
ACIN connector or power cable (Attachment)
Note 1)
For three phaseFor single phase
Three phase Single phase
Earth leak- age breaker
(NV)
Note 3)
* The controller is an example.
Be careful of interference with peripheral equipment. Especially don't give a shock to the shaft (J3 axis). When you install the hand, be careful not to knock at the shaft end by the hammer etc. The shaft may be damaged.
Collision detection function is valid condition for both of automatic and jog operation at shipping in RH-3FHR series. However, damage to the ball screw shaft cannot be prevented completely.
Refer to the separate instruction manual "Detailed explanations of functions and operations" for collision detection function.
Take care also of the following items.
(1)The robot's locus of movement may change with specified speed. Especially as for the corner section, short cut distance may change. Therefore, when begin- ning automatic operation, moves at low speed at first, and you should gather speed slowly with being careful of interference with peripheral equipment.
(2)It can be confirmed whether the specified position exist in the defined area by using the instruc- tion command "Zone". It can utilize as one of the methods for collision evasion. Refer to the "detailed description of the instructions manual/function, and operation" of the separate volume for the details of the instruction command.
CAUTION
Short cut
Arch movement (example)
Revision history
Date of print Specifications No. Details of revisions
2012-02-01 BFP-A8863 First print.
2012-03-21 BFP-A8863-A The painting color was corrected. (Error in writing) Notes were added to the example of safety measures. (The measure against the noise,
The electric specification of the output terminal)
2012-04-03 BFP-A8863-B CE specification was added.
2012-05-17 BFP-A8863-C The position repeatability was corrected (improvement).
ON voltage/ON current and OFF voltage/ OFF current of the parallel input-and-output
interface were corrected (error in writing).
The mechanical stopper position to change the operating range to +/-130 degree was
corrected to N12 (Error in writing)
EC-Statement of compliance was added.
2012-06-05 BFP-A8863-D The details of RH-12FH/20FH were added. Limitation of the electric current value of the relays (coil) connected to the external
emergency stop input was added.
The connection method of the Fig.3-16 AXMC terminal connector (CR750) corrected to
"soldering."
The description of the capability value of pose repeatability was deleted.
Internal wiring/piping set for hand optional (for RH-6FH series: 340mm stroke) was added.
2012-06-11 BFP-A8863-E The specification (the suction flow rate, the vacuum generator quantity) of inside suction for
clean type of RH-12FH/20FH was changed.
The note about the load center-of-gravity position of RH-20FH was added, and the related
graph of the offset length and the maximum-speed was corrected.
2012-06-14 BFP-A8863-F The specification and dimension of duct was added.
The upper limit of load center-of-gravity position was added.
The quantity of the coupling for the internal suction of RH-12FH / 20FH clean specification
was changed.
2012-06-21 BFP-A8863-G The graph of "Relationship Between Height of Shaft (J3 Axis) and Acceleration/Deceleration
Speed" was corrected. (error in writing)
The error in writing of connection method of CNUSR2 was corrected. (fig. 3-9)
2012-07-21 BFP-A8863-H The input voltage range (1-phase: AC207 to 253V) was added to RH-12FH/20FH series.
The connector name of hand input signal/output signal of "Fig.2-48: Wiring and piping for
hand" was corrected.
The outside dimension (moving position of the 340mm stroke type) of RH-6FH series clean/
oil mist specification were corrected.
2012-09-03 BFP-A8863-J The power supply capacity of RH-6FH/12FH/20FH was corrected.
The attachments of optional Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand were corrected.
2012-10-04 BFP-A8863-K The notes were added to "Fig 3-13: Example of EMC noise filter installation".
The lithium battery (ER6) was added to The United NationsRecommendations on the
Transport of Dangerous Goods.
The notes about installation of the controller and the robot arm were added. (neither direct
rays nor the heat of lighting)
2012-10-18 BFP-A8863-M The user's guide of KC mark was added.
2012-11-20 BFP-A8863-N The statement about trademark registration was added.
The center distance of Pilot hole of Installation surface was added. (RH-6FH)
The die center distance of Pilot hole of Installation surface was added and changed. (RH-
12FH/20FH)
The notes about the input-output connected to the controller were added. (do not ground
the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer)
Declaration of Incorporation was updated.
The metal plate which fixes "Hand internal wiring and piping set (option)" was changed to
attachment of the robot arm in standard.
2012-12-05 BFP-A8863-P The terminal name to connect when using the three phase specification by the single phase
power supply was added.
EC-Statement of Compliance was updated.
2013-01-11 BFP-A8863-R Note of the external emergency stop were added (opens the connector terminal at factory
shipping).
The specification description of CR750-MB was added.
2013-03-19 BFP-A8863-S The metal plate which fixes CR750 controller vertically was changed. (upward compati- bility)
The mass of the controller was shown which was divided by each robot type.
2013-07-19 BFP-A8863-T The simple spanner for resin nuts was added to the attachments of the external wiring/
piping box (option).
Declaration of Incorporation and EC-Statement of Compliance were updated.
Fig.2-54: Wiring and piping system diagram for hand and example the solenoid valve instal- lation was modified.
The cautions of operating in a low temperature environment or after a prolonged stop in 6.3
Precautions for handling were modified.
The caution about fumigation of wood packing was added to 6.3 Precautions for handling.
2013-09-19 BFP-A8863-U RH-3FHR-D series were added.
Fig.6-6: Limitations when connecting the relay etc. (CR750) was corrected.
(Error output Emergency stop output, Contactor controleoutput for additional axes
Error output)
The descriptions about CE marking specification were corrected. (CE marking specification
(IP54) was deleted.)
The description of Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand for RH-12FH/20FH series were cor- rected.
The numbers of hand curl tube for RH-12FH/20FH series was corrected.
The following descriptions of (5) in Fig.2-48 Wiring and piping for hand were corrected.
The power source wire only for the multifunctional hand Spare wire
The connector pins name of robot side and connector name of counter side were added.
The connector pins name of counter side was corrected.
The descriptions of solenoid valve set were corrected, and explanations were added.
Fig.2-50 Location of screw holes for fixing wiring/piping (RH-12FH/20FH) was cor- rected
Fig.2-54 Wiring and piping system diagram for hand and example the solenoid valve
installation was corrected.
The descriptions about the ventilation duct which the robot of clean specification has were
corrected.
2014-01-08 BFP-A8863-V Fig. 2-10: Relationship of the offset length and maximum velocity was corrected.
Conditions for the flexed type cables were corrected.
The note about an ambient temperature was added to 2.1.1 Basic specifications.
The station numbers of the parallel I/O interface and the parallel I/O unit was corrected.
The description of "MELFA BASIC IV" was added to Table 3-1: Specifications of control- ler.
2014-03-31 BFP-A8863-W The grounding representation was corrected.
The types of the ACIN terminal were added.
2014-07-04 BFP-A8863-X Type name of the optional solenoid valve set of the clean specification for RH-3FHR series
was corrected.
2014-08-20 BFP-A8863-Y The cover and corporate logo mark of this manual was changed.
The statement about trademark registration was modified.
The explanation of CR751 controller was added.
A connection space for a machine cable was added.
The description about screw holes using for tooling wiring and piping was added.
Correction of errors in the hand input cable (Option).
The note of turning ON the power supply for control (DCcable-2) for parallel I/O unit was
added.
A safety relay in example of safety measures wiring example 5 both CR750 and
CR751 controller were changed.
Declaration of Incorporation and EC-Statement of Compliance were updated.
2014-12-17 BFP-A8863-AA Allowance value of the offset amount were added to "2.2.2 Mass capacity".
The description of how to change the operating range moved into INSTRUCTION MAN- UAL/ROBOT ARM SETUP & MAINTENANCE.
Correction of errors in the Specifications discussion materials. (Network vision sensor: 4D-
2CG5***-PKG was deleted.)
The corporate logo mark of illustrations in this manual was changed.
2015-02-10 BFP-A8863-AB The description in case the ethernet cable is used as a backup wiring for data
communication was added.
2015-11-17 BFP-A8863-AC Declaration of Incorporation and EC-Statement of Compliance were updated.
Transportation precaution of the lithium battery was modified.
List of parts and manufacturer of parallel I/O unit was corrected.
Note1) in Table3-6: Function of the key switch interface was corrected.
2015-12-14 BFP-A8863-AD Circuit diagrams in 3.6.1 Connection of the external emergency stop and 6.1.7 Examples
of safety measures were modified.
2016-04-07 BFP-A8863-AE Windows10 was supported by RT ToolBox2.
EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY pages were deleted.
2017-05-22 BFP-A8863-AF Configuration device of CC-Link interface option was modified.
Contact information of the authorized representative was updated.
Date of print Specifications No. Details of revisions
2017-09-25 BFP-A8863-AG "2.8 About Overhaul" was modified.
2018-06-01 BFP-A8863-AH Description of countermeasures against unauthorized access was added.
Referenced Standard (Requirement of Chinese standardized law) was added.
Notes were added to section 3.6.
Environmental conditions of electromagnetic noise was modified.
3.9 Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition axes was modified.
2018-12-25 BFP-A8863-AJ The attachments for the external wiring/piping box were corrected.
3.7 Mode changeover switch input was modified.
2019-04-19 BFP-A8863-AK Correction of figures. (Fig. 2-30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 52 to 54)
2020-01-24 BFP-A8863-AM Added information on the space required for installing and removing the cover. (Fig. 2-18, 20,
22, 24, 26, 28)
Correction of errors.
Corrected the specifications of valves for solenoid valve sets. (Table 2-23)
2020-10-30 BFP-A8863-AN Amended the precautions regarding the prevention of unauthorized access.
Added "Appendix 1: Origin position adjustment of J2 axis".
Corrected the battery name. (ER6 ER6V)
Corrected other mistakes and changed some sections.
2021-01-29 BFP-A8863-AP Updated contents for the optional product "MELFA-3D Vision 3.0 (3F-53U-WINM)".
2021-06-25 BFP-A8863-AR Corrected examples of safety measures. (Fig. 6-1 to 6-4, 6-6 to 6-9)
Corrected limitations when connecting the relay etc. (Fig. 6-11, 12)
Added "Appendix 1: Classification of functions using external input/output signals".
2021-11-30 BFP-A8863-AS Corrected the explanation of the parameter "SRVON".
Corrected other mistakes and changed some sections.
2022-01-31 BFP-A8863-AT Revised "6.4 EMC installation guideline".
Corrected other mistakes and changed some sections.
Date of print Specifications No. Details of revisions
Introduction
This series offers small-size industrial robots developed using Mitsubishi's latest technology. They are especially designed to handle and assemble mechanical parts. They are Mitsubishi's answer to the cus- tomer's need to achieve a compact manufacturing facility capable of highly flexible production, as neces- sitated by the diffusion of high-density product groups and the shorter product life cycles that have become common-place in recent years.
About RH-3FHR-D series, because the installation surface does not give limitation to the operating range, it can work to the layout in the customer flexibly.
However, to comply with the target application, a work system having a well-balanced robot arm, periph- eral devices or robot and hand section must be structured.
When creating these standard specifications, we have edited them so that the Mitsubishi robot's charac- teristics and specifications can be easily understood by users considering the implementation of robots. However, if there are any unclear points, please contact your nearest Mitsubishi branch or dealer.
Mitsubishi hopes that you will consider these standard specifications and use our robots.
Note that in this specification document the specifications related to the robot arm is described Page 16, "2 Robot arm", the specifications related to the controller Page 127, "3 Controller", and software func- tions and a command list Page 207, "4 Software" separately.
This document has indicated the specification of the following types robot.
On floor type...........*RH-6FH-D series
*RH-12FH-D series
*RH-20FH-D series
Hanging type ...........*RH-3FHR-D series
About CE Marking in the automization system The Guidelines of the measures against EMC in the automization system manufactured by the cus- tomer is shown in Page 231, "6.4 EMC installation guideline". Please refer to it and carry out the measures against EMC of the automization system of the cus- tomer.
No part of this manual may be reproduced by any means or in any form, without prior consent from Mit- subishi.
The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice. The specifications values are based on Mitsubishi standard testing methods. The information contained in this document has been written to be accurate as much as possible.
Please interpret that items not described in this document "cannot be performed." or "alarm may occur". Please contact your nearest dealer if you find any doubtful, wrong or skipped point.
This specifications is original. Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10 are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
The official name of Windows is MicrosoftWindowsOperating System. WindowsXP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10 are either prod-
uct names of Microsoft Corporation in the United States. Ethernet is registered trademarks or trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States. All other company names and production names in this document are the trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective owners. Referenced Standard (Requirement of Chinese standardized law): This Product is designed and manu-
factured accordance with GB 11291.1. Illustrations in this Instruction Manual may differ from the actual products.
Copyright(C) 2012-2022 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
Contents
i
Page
1 General configuration .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Structural equipment ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.1 Standard structural equipment .................................................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.2 Special specifications .................................................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.3 Options ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.4 Maintenance parts ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Model type name of robot .................................................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.2.1 How to identify the robot model ................................................................................................................................ 1-2
(1) Floor installation type ................................................................................................................................................ 1-2 (2) Hanging installation type .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.2 Combination of the robot arm and the controller .............................................................................................. 1-4 (1) CR750 controller ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-4 (2) CR751 controller ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.3 CE marking specifications .................................................................................................................................................... 1-6 (1) CR750 controller ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-6 (2) CR751 controller ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.4 Indirect export .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.5 Instruction manuals ................................................................................................................................................................ 1-7
1.6 Contents of the structural equipment ............................................................................................................................ 1-8 1.6.1 Robot arm ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-8
(1) Floor installation type ................................................................................................................................................ 1-8 (2) Hanging installation type ........................................................................................................................................ 1-10
1.6.2 Controller .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11 (1) CR750controller ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-11 (2) CR751 controller ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-12
1.7 Contents of the Option equipment and special specification ............................................................................ 1-13
2 Robot arm ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.1 Standard specifications ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-16 2.1.1 Basic specifications ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-16
(1) RH-6FH series ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-16 (2) RH-12FH series ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-18 (3) RH-20FH series ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-20 (4) RH-3FHR series ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-22
2.1.2 The counter-force applied to the installation surface ................................................................................... 2-23 2.1.3 RH-3FHR installation stage ....................................................................................................................................... 2-24
(1) Example which uses the iron material .............................................................................................................. 2-24 (2) Example which uses the aluminum ..................................................................................................................... 2-25
2.2 Definition of specifications ................................................................................................................................................ 2-26 2.2.1 Pose repeatability .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-26 2.2.2 Mass capacity .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-27 2.2.3 Relationships Among Mass Capacity, Speed, and Acceleration/Deceleration Speed ...................... 2-29
(1) Setting Load Capacity and Size (Hand Conditions) .................................................................................... 2-29 2.2.4 Vibrations at the Tip of the Arm during Low-Speed Operation of the Robot ..................................... 2-29 2.2.5 Vibration of shaft (J3 axis) position and arm end ............................................................................................ 2-30
(1) Relationship Between Mass Capacity and Speed ....................................................................................... 2-30 (2) Relationship Between Height of Shaft (J3 Axis) and Acceleration/Deceleration Speed ........... 2-31 (3) Relation between offset length and the maximum speed ......................................................................... 2-33 (4) Time to reach the position repeatability ......................................................................................................... 2-35
2.2.6 About moving speed at singular point and near singular point. (RH-3FHR series) ........................... 2-36 2.2.7 Collision detection ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-37 2.2.8 Protection specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 2-38
(1) Types of protection specifications .................................................................................................................... 2-38 (2) About the use with the bad environment ........................................................................................................ 2-39
2.2.9 Clean specifications ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-40 (1) Types of clean specifications ............................................................................................................................... 2-40
Contents
ii
Page
2.3 Names of each part of the robot .................................................................................................................................... 2-42
2.4 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram ........................................................................................................ 2-44 2.4.1 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram (RH-6FH series) ............................................................. 2-44
(1) Standard Specification ............................................................................................................................................ 2-44 (2) Clean Specification and oil mist specification .............................................................................................. 2-50
2.4.2 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram (RH-12FH series) .......................................................... 2-56 (1) Standard Specification ............................................................................................................................................ 2-56 (2) Clean Specification and oil mist specification .............................................................................................. 2-62
2.4.3 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram (RH-20FH series) .......................................................... 2-68 (1) Standard Specification ............................................................................................................................................ 2-68 (2) Clean Specification and oil mist specification .............................................................................................. 2-72
2.4.4 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram of RH-3FHR series ....................................................... 2-76 (1) Standard Specification ............................................................................................................................................ 2-76 (2) Clean/Waterproof Specification .......................................................................................................................... 2-77
2.4.5 Mechanical interface and Installation surface ................................................................................................... 2-78 (1) Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-6FH series ......................................................... 2-78 (2) Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-12FH series ...................................................... 2-79 (3) Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-20FH series ...................................................... 2-80 (4) Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-3FHR series (Standard specification) .... 2-81 (5) Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-3FHR series (Clean/Waterproof specification)
2-82 2.4.6 Outside dimensions of machine cables ................................................................................................................ 2-83
(1) Connection with the CR750 controller ............................................................................................................ 2-83 (2) Connection with the CR751 controller ............................................................................................................ 2-83
2.5 Tooling ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-84 2.5.1 Wiring and piping for hand .......................................................................................................................................... 2-84 2.5.2 Internal air piping ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-86
(1) Floor installation type .............................................................................................................................................. 2-86 (2) Hanging installation type ........................................................................................................................................ 2-86
2.5.3 Internal wiring for the hand output cable ............................................................................................................ 2-86 (1) Floor installation type .............................................................................................................................................. 2-86 (2) Hanging installation type ........................................................................................................................................ 2-86
2.5.4 Internal wiring for the hand input cable ................................................................................................................ 2-87 (1) Floor installation type .............................................................................................................................................. 2-87 (2) Hanging installation type ........................................................................................................................................ 2-87
2.5.5 Ethernet cable (For RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series) .......................................................................................... 2-87 2.5.6 Spare Wiring (For FH-3FHR series) ....................................................................................................................... 2-88 2.5.7 About the Installation of Tooling Wiring and Piping (Examples of Wiring and Piping) ....................... 2-89
(1) RH-6FH series ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-89 (2) RH-12FH/20FH series ............................................................................................................................................ 2-90 (3) RH-3FHR series ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-91 (4) Example of wiring and piping <1> ........................................................................................................................ 2-92 (5) Wiring and piping example <2> ............................................................................................................................. 2-93 (6) Precautions for the oil mist/clean specification .......................................................................................... 2-94
2.5.8 Wiring and piping system diagram for hand ......................................................................................................... 2-95 2.5.9 Electrical specifications of hand input/output .................................................................................................. 2-97 2.5.10 Air supply circuit example for the hand ............................................................................................................. 2-98
2.6 Shipping special specifications, options, and maintenance parts ...................................................................... 2-99 2.6.1 Shipping special specifications ................................................................................................................................. 2-99
(1) Machine cable .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-100
2.7 Options .................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-101 (1) Machine cable extension ..................................................................................................................................... 2-102 (2) Stopper for changing the operating range ................................................................................................... 2-108 (3) Solenoid valve set .................................................................................................................................................. 2-109 (4) Hand input cable ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-115 (5) Hand output cable .................................................................................................................................................. 2-117 (6) Hand curl tube ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-118
Contents
iii
Page
(7) Hand tube .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-119 (8) Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand ................................................................................................................. 2-120 (9) External Wiring/Piping box ................................................................................................................................. 2-122
2.8 About Overhaul ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-125
2.9 Maintenance parts .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-126
3 Controller ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-127
3.1 Standard specifications ................................................................................................................................................... 3-127 3.1.1 Basic specifications ................................................................................................................................................... 3-127 3.1.2 Protection specifications and operating supply ............................................................................................. 3-128
3.2 Names of each part ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-129 3.2.1 Controller ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-129
(1) CR750 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-129 (2) CR751 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-132
3.3 Outside dimensions/Installation dimensions ........................................................................................................... 3-134 3.3.1 Outside dimensions .................................................................................................................................................... 3-134
(1) CR750 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-134 (2) CR751 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-135
3.3.2 Installation dimensions .............................................................................................................................................. 3-136 (1) CR750 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-136 (2) CR751 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-138
3.4 External input/output ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-140 3.4.1 Types ............................................................................................................................................................................... 3-140
3.5 Dedicated input/output ................................................................................................................................................... 3-141
3.6 Emergency stop input and output etc. ...................................................................................................................... 3-144 3.6.1 Connection of the external emergency stop ................................................................................................... 3-144
(1) CR750 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-145 (2) CR751 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-149
3.6.2 Special stop input (SKIP) ........................................................................................................................................ 3-152 (1) CR750 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-152 (2) CR751 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-153
3.6.3 Door switch function ................................................................................................................................................. 3-154 3.6.4 Enabling device function .......................................................................................................................................... 3-154
(1) When door is opening ............................................................................................................................................ 3-154 (2) When door is closing ............................................................................................................................................. 3-154 (3) Automatic Operation/Jog Operation/Brake Release and Necessary Switch Settings ........... 3-155
3.7 Mode changeover switch input ..................................................................................................................................... 3-156 (1) Specification of the key switch interface .................................................................................................... 3-156 (2) Connection of the mode changeover switch input .................................................................................. 3-158
3.8 Additional Axis Function .................................................................................................................................................. 3-159 3.8.1 Wiring of the Additional Axis Interface .............................................................................................................. 3-159
(1) CR750 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-159 (2) CR751 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 3-160 (3) Example of the installation of the noise filter ............................................................................................ 3-161
3.9 Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition axes ..................................................... 3-163 (1) Example circuit ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-163 (2) Image of how to connect the controller connector ................................................................................. 3-165
3.10 Options ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-166 (1) Teaching pendant (T/B) ...................................................................................................................................... 3-167 (2) Parallel I/O interface ............................................................................................................................................ 3-170 (3) External I/O cable .................................................................................................................................................. 3-175 (4) Parallel I/O unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-177 (5) External I/O cable .................................................................................................................................................. 3-188 (6) CC-Link interface .................................................................................................................................................. 3-190 (7) Controller protection box .................................................................................................................................... 3-193 (8) MELSOFT RT ToolBox2/RT ToolBox2 mini ............................................................................................... 3-203
Contents
iv
Page
(9) Instruction Manual (bookbinding) ..................................................................................................................... 3-205
3.11 Maintenance parts ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-206
4 Software ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-207
4.1 List of commands ............................................................................................................................................................... 4-207
4.2 List of parameters .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-210
5 Instruction Manual ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5-212
5.1 The details of each instruction manuals ................................................................................................................... 5-212
6 Safety .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-213
6.1 Safety ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-213 6.1.1 Self-diagnosis stop functions ................................................................................................................................ 6-213 6.1.2 External input/output signals that can be used for safety protection measures ........................... 6-214 6.1.3 Precautions for using robot .................................................................................................................................... 6-214
(1) Robot installation .................................................................................................................................................... 6-214 (2) Prevention of contact with operator .............................................................................................................. 6-214 (3) Work procedures ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-214 (4) Training ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-214 (5) Daily inspection and periodic inspection ...................................................................................................... 6-215
6.1.4 Safety measures for automatic operation ........................................................................................................ 6-215 6.1.5 Safety measures for teaching ............................................................................................................................... 6-215 6.1.6 Safety measures for maintenance and inspections, etc. ........................................................................... 6-215 6.1.7 Examples of safety measures ................................................................................................................................ 6-216
(1) CR750 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 6-216 (2) CR751 controller .................................................................................................................................................... 6-221 (3) External emergency stop connection [supplementary explanation] ................................................. 6-226
6.2 Working environment ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-229 (1) Power supply ............................................................................................................................................................ 6-229 (2) Noise ............................................................................................................................................................................ 6-229 (3) Temperature and humidity .................................................................................................................................. 6-229 (4) Vibration ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-229 (5) Installation environment ...................................................................................................................................... 6-229
6.3 Precautions for handling .................................................................................................................................................. 6-229
6.4 EMC installation guideline ............................................................................................................................................... 6-231 6.4.1 Outlines ........................................................................................................................................................................... 6-231 6.4.2 EMC .................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-231 6.4.3 EMC measures ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-232 6.4.4 Component parts for EMC measures ................................................................................................................. 6-232
(1) Ferrite core ............................................................................................................................................................... 6-232 (2) Line noise filter ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-232
7Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................................... Appendix-233 Appendix 1 Classification of functions using external input/output signals ................................ Appendix-233 Appendix 2 Origin position adjustment of J2 axis .................................................................................. Appendix-234 Appendix 3 Specifications discussion material (RH-6FH series: Floor installation type) ...... Appendix-235 Appendix 4 Specifications discussion material (RH-12FH series: Floor installation type) .... Appendix-237 Appendix 5 Specifications discussion material (RH-20FH series: Floor installation type) .... Appendix-239 Appendix 6 Specifications discussion material (RH-3FHR series: Hanging installation type) .... Appendix-
241
1-1 Structural equipment
1General configuration
1 General configuration
1.1 Structural equipment
Structural equipment consists of the following types.
1.1.1 Standard structural equipment The following items are enclosed as a standard.
(1) Robot arm (2) Controller (3) Machine cable (4) Robot arm installation bolts (5) Safety manual, CD-ROM (Instruction manual) (6) Guarantee card
1.1.2 Special specifications For the special specifications, some standard configuration equipment and specifications have to be changed before factory shipping. Confirm the delivery date and specify the special specifications at the order.
1.1.3 Options User can install options after their delivery.
1.1.4 Maintenance parts Materials and parts for the maintenance use.
1General configuration
Model type name of robot 1-2
1.2 Model type name of robot This robot has arranged the type name corresponding to load mass, arm length, and environment specification. Details are shown below, please select the robot suitable for the customer's use.
1.2.1 How to identify the robot model There are two types of robot, one is "Floor installation type" and the other is "Hanging installation
type", each of which are different in installation posture.
(1) Floor installation type
RH - FH - D - SMxx (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) ( i ) j
(a). RH ..............................................Indicates the horizontal multiple-joint robot.
(b). .........................................Indicates the maximum load. Ex.
6: 6kg 12: 12kg 20: 20kg
(c). FH..............................................Indicates the FH series.
(d). ..........................................Indicates the arm length. Ex.
35: 350mm 45: 450mm 55: 550mm 70: 700mm 85: 850mm 100: 1000mm
(e). ..........................................Indicates the vertical stroke length. Ex.
20: 200mm stroke 34: 340mm stroke 35: 350mm stroke 45: 450mm stroke
(f). ................................................Indicates environment specification. Ex.
Omitted: General specifications C: Clean specifications M: Oil mist specifications
(g). ................................................Indicates the controller series. Ex.
Omitted: CR750 controller 1: CR751 controller
(h). D .................................................Indicates the controller type. D: Stand alone type
(i). .................................................Technical standard of Conformity. Ex.
Omitted: No conformity of technical standard. 1: Conforms to the CE Marking
(j). - S M xx........................... Indicates a special model. In order, limit special specification. [1] [2]
[1] S: Indicates a special model. [2] M: Indicates a specification with protection specification control-
ler. (The controller protection box is attached.
1-3 Model type name of robot
1General configuration
(2) Hanging installation type
RH - 3 FH R 35 - D - Sxx (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) ( i ) ( j ) (k)
(a). RH ............................................. Indicates the horizontal multiple-joint robot.
(b). 3................................................. Indicates the maximum load. Ex.
3: 3kg
(c). FH............................................. Indicates the FH series.
(d). R ................................................ Indicates the installation posture is hung.
(e). .......................................... Indicates the arm length. Ex.
35: 350mm
(f). ........................................... Indicates the vertical stroke length. Ex.
12: 120mm stroke 15: 150mm stroke
(g). ............................................... Indicates environment specification. Ex.
Omitted: General specifications C: Clean specifications W: Waterproof specifications (IP 65)
(h). ............................................... Indicates the controller series. Ex.
Omitted: CR750 controller
( i ). D............................................... Indicates the controller type. D: Stand alone type
( j ). ............................................. Technical standard of Conformity. Ex.
Omitted: No conformity of technical standard. 1: Conforms to the CE Marking
(k). - S xx .................................. Indicates a special model. In order, limit special specification.
1General configuration
Model type name of robot 1-4
1.2.2 Combination of the robot arm and the controller (1) CR750 controller
Table 1-1 Combination of the robot arm (floor installation type) and the CR750 controller
Protection specification Robot arm
(Floor installation type)
Arm length (mm)
J3-axis stroke (mm)
Controller Note1)
Note1) When you use by adverse environment, please use the controller protection box.
RH-6FH series General-purpose environment RH-6FH3520-D 350
200
CR750-06HD-1
RH-6FH4520-D 450 RH-6FH5520-D 550 RH-6FH3534-D 350
340RH-6FH4534-D 450 RH-6FH5534-D 550
Clean specifications RH-6FH3520C-D 350 200RH-6FH4520C-D 450
RH-6FH5520C-D 550 RH-6FH3534C-D 350
340RH-6FH4534C-D 450 RH-6FH5534C-D 550
Oil mist specifications RH-6FH3520M-D 350 200RH-6FH4520M-D 450
RH-6FH5520M-D 550 RH-6FH3534M-D 350
340RH-6FH4534M-D 450 RH-6FH5534M-D 550
RH-12FH series General-purpose environment RH-12FH5535-D 550
350
CR750-12HD-1
RH-12FH7035-D 700 RH-12FH8535-D 850 RH-12FH5545-D 550
450RH-12FH7045-D 700 RH-12FH8545-D 850
Clean specifications RH-12FH5535C-D 550 350RH-12FH7035C-D 700
RH-12FH8535C-D 850 RH-12FH5545C-D 550
450RH-12FH7045C-D 700 RH-12FH8545C-D 850
Oil mist specifications RH-12FH5535M-D 550 350RH-12FH7035M-D 700
RH-12FH8535M-D 850 RH-12FH5545M-D 550
450RH-12FH7045M-D 700 RH-12FH8545M-D 850
RH-20FH series General-purpose environment RH-20FH8535-D 850
350
CR750-20HD-1
RH-20FH10035-D 1000 RH-20FH8545-D 850
450 RH-20FH10045-D 1000
Clean specifications RH-20FH8535C-D 850 350
RH-20FH10035C-D 1000 RH-20FH8545C-D 850
450 RH-20FH10045C-D 1000
Oil mist specifications RH-20FH8535M-D 850 350
RH-20FH10035M-D 1000 RH-20FH8545M-D 850
450 RH-20FH10045M-D 1000
1-5 Model type name of robot
1General configuration
Table 1-2 Combination of the robot arm (hanging installation type) and the CR750 controller
(2) CR751 controller Table 1-3 Combination of the robot arm (floor installation type) and the CR751 controller
Protection specification Robot arm
(Hanging installation type)
Arm length (mm)
J3-axis stroke (mm)
Controller Note1)
Note1) When you use by adverse environment, please use the controller protection box.
RH-3FHR series General-purpose environment RH-3FHR3515-D 350 150
CR750-03HRD-1Clean specifications RH-3FHR3512C-D 350 120 Waterproof specifications (IP65) RH-3FHR3512W-D 350 120
Protection specification Robot arm
(Floor installation type)
Arm length (mm)
J3-axis stroke (mm)
Controller Note1)
RH-6FH series General-purpose environment RH-6FH3520-1D 350
200
CR751-06HD-0
RH-6FH4520-1D 450 RH-6FH5520-1D 550 RH-6FH3534-1D 350
340RH-6FH4534-1D 450 RH-6FH5534-1D 550
Clean specifications RH-6FH3520C-1D 350 200RH-6FH4520C-1D 450
RH-6FH5520C-1D 550 RH-6FH3534C-1D 350
340RH-6FH4534C-1D 450 RH-6FH5534C-1D 550
Oil mist specifications RH-6FH3520M-1D 350 200RH-6FH4520M-1D 450
RH-6FH5520M-1D 550 RH-6FH3534M-1D 350
340RH-6FH4534M-1D 450 RH-6FH5534M-1D 550
RH-12FH series General-purpose environment RH-12FH5535-1D 550
350
CR751-12HD-0
RH-12FH7035-1D 700 RH-12FH8535-1D 850 RH-12FH5545-1D 550
450RH-12FH7045-1D 700 RH-12FH8545-1D 850
Clean specifications RH-12FH5535C-1D 550 350RH-12FH7035C-1D 700
RH-12FH8535C-1D 850 RH-12FH5545C-1D 550
450RH-12FH7045C-1D 700 RH-12FH8545C-1D 850
Oil mist specifications RH-12FH5535M-1D 550 350RH-12FH7035M-1D 700
RH-12FH8535M-1D 850 RH-12FH5545M-1D 550
450RH-12FH7045M-1D 700 RH-12FH8545M-1D 850
1General configuration
CE marking specifications 1-6
Table 1-4 Combination of the robot arm (hanging installation type) and the CR751 controller
1.3 CE marking specifications The robot shown in Table 1-5 or Table 1-6 are the CE marking/KC mark specification.
(1) CR750 controller Table 1-5 Robot models with CE marking specifications
RH-20FH series General-purpose environment RH-20FH8535-1D 850
350
CR751-20HD-0
RH-20FH10035-1D 1000 RH-20FH8545-1D 850
450 RH-20FH10045-1D 1000
Clean specifications RH-20FH8535C-1D 850 350
RH-20FH10035C-1D 1000 RH-20FH8545C-1D 850
450 RH-20FH10045C-1D 1000
Oil mist specifications RH-20FH8535M-1D 850 350
RH-20FH10035M-1D 1000 RH-20FH8545M-1D 850
450 RH-20FH10045M-1D 1000
Note1) When you use by adverse environment, please use the controller protection box.
Protection specification Robot arm
(Hanging installation type)
Arm length (mm)
J3-axis stroke (mm)
Controller Note1)
Note1) When you use by adverse environment, please use the controller protection box.
RH-3FHR series General-purpose environment RH-3FHR3515-1D 350 150
CR751-03HRD-0Clean specifications RH-3FHR3512C-1D 350 120 Waterproof specifications (IP65) RH-3FHR3512W-1D 350 120
Robot type Note1)
Note1) The "xx" indicate the arm length, "yy"indicate J3-axis stroke.
Controller Note2)
Note2) The specification and the handling method of the controller are the same as standard type controller.
External signal logic Language setting
RH-6FHxxyy-D1-S13
CR750-06HD1-1-S13
Source type English (ENG)
RH-6FHxxyyC-D1-S13 Note3)
Note3) This robot is the clean specification. As long as there is no special description about CE marking specification, refers to the contents of standard type clean specification.
RH-6FHxxyyM-D1-S13 Note4)
Note4) This robot is the oil mist specification. As long as there is no special description about CE marking specification, refers to the contents of standard type oil mist specification.
RH-12FHxxyy-D1-S15
CR750-12HD1-1-S15RH-12FHxxyyC-D1-S15 Note3)
RH-12FHxxyyM-D1-S15 Note4)
RH-20FHxxyy-D1-S15
CR750-20HD1-1-S15RH-20FHxxyyC-D1-S15 Note3)
RH-20FHxxyyM-D1-S15 Note4)
Protection specification Robot arm
(Floor installation type)
Arm length (mm)
J3-axis stroke (mm)
Controller Note1)
1-7 Indirect export
1General configuration
(2) CR751 controller Table 1-6 Robot models with CE marking specifications
1.4 Indirect export The display in English is available by setting parameter LNG as "ENG."
1.5 Instruction manuals The instruction manuals supplied in CD-ROM, except for the Safety Manual. This CD-ROM (electronic manual) includes instruction manuals in both Japanese and English versions.
Robot type Note1)
Note1) The "xx" indicate the arm length, "yy"indicate J3-axis stroke.
Controller Note2)
Note2) The specification and the handling method of the controller are the same as standard type controller.
External signal logic Language setting
RH-6FHxxyy-1D1-S13
CR751-06HD1-0-S13
Source type English (ENG)
RH-6FHxxyyC-1D1-S13 Note3)
Note3) This robot is the clean specification. As long as there is no special description about CE marking specification, refers to the contents of standard type clean specification.
RH-6FHxxyyM-1D1-S13 Note4)
Note4) This robot is the oil mist specification. As long as there is no special description about CE marking specification, refers to the contents of standard type oil mist specification.
RH-12FHxxyy-1D1-S15
CR751-12HD1-0-S15RH-12FHxxyyC-1D1-S15 Note3)
RH-12FHxxyyM-1D1-S15 Note4)
RH-20FHxxyy-1D1-S15
CR751-20HD1-0-S15RH-20FHxxyyC-1D1-S15 Note3)
RH-20FHxxyyM-1D1-S15 Note4)
1 General configuration
Contents of the structural equipment 1-8
1.6 Contents of the structural equipment
1.6.1 Robot arm The list of structural equipment is shown in below.
(1) Floor installation type
Fig.1-1 Structural equipment (RH-6FH series)
* Refer to Page 16, "2.1 Standard specifi- cations" for details on the specifications.
Horizontal four-axis multiple-jointed type RH-6FH series
Hand output cable 1F-GR60S-01 4sets
Hand input cable 1F-HC35C-01
Hand curl tube 1E-ST0408C-300
Solenoid valve set 1F-VD0*-01 (Sink type) 1F-VD0*E-01 (Source type) (*: 1 to 4 = 1 set to 4 set)
*With hand output cable.
Pneumatic hand customer-manu- factured parts
Caution Standard configuration
Special specifications
Option equipment
Prepared by customer
RH-6FH series
Stopper for changing the operating range 1F-DH-01
Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand 1F-HS408S-01 (200mm stroke) 1F-HS408S-02 (340mm stroke)
This option
External Wiring/Piping box 1F-UT-BOX
Pull out Wiring/Piping
This option
Machine cable Standard product: 5m attachment
For CR751 controllerFor CR750 controller
Machine cable (Fixed type: 2m) For CR750 controller: 1S-02UCBL-01 For CR751 controller: 1F-02UCBL-02
Machine cable extension CR750 controller
Fixed type: 1S- CBL-01 (extension type) Flexed type: 1S- LCBL-01 (extension type)
1S- LUCBL-01 (direct type) CR751 controller
Fixed type: 1F- UCBL-02 (direct type) Flexed type: 1F- LUCBL-02 (direct type)
Note1) refer the length. Refer to Table 1-7 for details.
1-9 Contents of the structural equipment
1 General configuration
Fig.1-2 Structural equipment (RH-12FH/20FH series)
* Refer to Page 16, "2.1 Standard specifi- cations" for details on the specifications.
Horizontal four-axis multiple-jointed type RH-12FH/20FH series
Hand output cable 1F-GR60S-01 4sets
Hand input cable 1F-HC35C-02
Hand curl tube 1N-ST0608C-01
Solenoid valve set 1S-VD0*-01 (Sink type) 1S-VD0*E-01 (Source type) (*: 1 to 4 = 1 set to 4 set)
* With hand output cable.
Pneumatic hand customer-manu- factured parts
Caution Standard configuration
Special specifications
Option equipment
Prepared by customer
RH-12FH/20FH series
Stopper for changing the operating range 1F-DH-02
Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand 1F-HS604S-01(350mm stroke) 1F-HS604S-02(450mm stroke)
This option
External Wiring/Piping box 1F-UT-BOX-01
Pull out Wiring/Piping
This option
Machine cable Standard product: 5m attachment
For CR751 controllerFor CR750 controller
Machine cable (Fixed type: 2m) For CR750 controller: 1S-02UCBL-01 For CR751 controller: 1F-02UCBL-02
Machine cable extension CR750 controller
Fixed type: 1S- CBL-01 (extension type) Flexed type: 1S- LCBL-01 (extension type)
CR751 controller Fixed type: 1F- UCBL-02 (direct type) Flexed type: 1F- LUCBL-02 (direct type)
Note1) refer the length. Refer to Table 1-7 for details.
1 General configuration
Contents of the structural equipment 1-10
(2) Hanging installation type
Fig.1-3 Structural equipment (RH-3FHR series)
* Refer to Page 16, "2.1 Standard specifi- cations" for details on the specifications.
Horizontal four-axis multiple-jointed type RH-3FHR series
Hand output cable
1S-GR35S-02 4sets
Hand input cable
1S-HC00S-01
Hand tube
1S-ST0304S Caution Standard configuration
Special specifications
Option equipment
Prepared by customer
RH-3FHR series
Solenoid valve set
* With hand output cable.
Pneumatic hand customer- manufactured parts
Stopper for changing the operating range For J1 axis: 1S-DH-05J1 For J2 axis: 1S-DH-05J2
*Refer to Table 1-7 for the angle which can be changed.
*Installed by customer.
Machine cable Standard product: 5m attachment
For CR751 controllerFor CR750 controller
Machine cable (Fixed type: 2m) For CR750 controller: 1S-02UCBL-01 For CR751 controller: 1F-02UCBL-02
Machine cable extension CR750 controller
Fixed type: 1S- CBL-01 (extension type) Flexed type: 1S- LCBL-01 (extension type)
CR751 controller Fixed type: 1F- UCBL-02 (direct type) Flexed type: 1F- LUCBL-02 (direct type)
Note1) refer the length. Refer to Table 1-7 for details.
1-11
1 General configuration
1.6.2 Controller The devices shown below can be installed on the controller.
The controllers that can be connected differ depending on the specification of the robot. (Refer to Page 2, "1.2 Model type name of robot".)
(1) CR750controller
Fig.1-4 Structural equipment
MELSOFT RT ToolBox2/RT ToolBox2 mini RT ToolBox2 3D-11C-WINE(CD-ROM)
(Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7,
Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10)
RT ToolBox2 mini 3D-12C-WINE(CD-ROM)
(Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7,
Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10)
*)Refer to Table 1-9 for USB cable
Personal computer Prepared by customer
Instruction Manual (bookbinding)
RH-6FH/12FH/20FH-D series:
5F-FB01-PE01
RH-3FHR-D series:
5F-FP01-PE01
CC-Link interface 2D-TZ576
Parallel I/O unit 2A-RZ361(Sink)/ 2A-RZ371(Source)
External I/O cable 2D-CBL05 (5m) 2D-CBL15 (15m)
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) External device Prepared by customer
Teaching pendant (T/B) R32TB
R56TB
Parallel I/O interface 2D-TZ368(Sink)/ 2D-TZ378(Source)
*2)
External I/O cable 2A-CBL05 (5m) 2A-CBL15 (15m)
Controller RH-6FH: CR750-06HD-1 RH-12FH: CR750-12HD-1 RH-20FH: CR750-20HD-1 RH-3FHR: CR750-03HRD-1
Controller protection box CR750-MB
Standard configuration
Special specifications
Options
Prepared by customer
Caution
equipment
The photograph is the image figure.
1 General configuration
1-12
(2) CR751 controller
Fig.1-5 Structural equipment
MELSOFT RT ToolBox2/RT ToolBox2 mini RT ToolBox2 3D-11C-WINE(CD-ROM)
(Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7,
Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10)
RT ToolBox2 mini 3D-12C-WINE(CD-ROM)
(Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7,
Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10)
*)Refer to Table 1-9 for USB cable
Personal computer Prepared by customer
Instruction Manual (bookbinding)
RH-6FH/12FH/20FH-D series:
5F-FB01-PE01
RH-3FHR-D series:
5F-FP01-PE01
CC-Link interface 2D-TZ576
Parallel I/O unit 2A-RZ361(Sink)/ 2A-RZ371(Source)
External I/O cable 2D-CBL05 (5m) 2D-CBL15 (15m)
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) External device Prepared by customer
Teaching pendant (T/B) R33TB
R57TB
Parallel I/O interface 2D-TZ368(Sink)/ 2D-TZ378(Source)
*2)
External I/O cable 2A-CBL05 (5m) 2A-CBL15 (15m)
Controller RH-6FH: CR751-06HD-0 RH-12FH: CR751-12HD-0 RH-20FH: CR751-20HD-0 RH-3FHR: CR751-03HRD-0
Controller protection box CR751-MB
Standard configuration
Special specifications
Options
Prepared by customer
Caution
equipment
The photograph is the image figure.
1-13 Contents of the Option equipment and special specification
1 General configuration
1.7 Contents of the Option equipment and special specification
A list of all Optional equipment and special specifications are shown below.
Table 1-7 The list of the robot arm option equipment and special specification
Item Type Specifications
Classification Note1)
Description
CR750 CR751
Stopper for changing the
operating range
1F-DH-01 The stopper parts for J1 axis
This must be installed by the customer. For RH-6FH series
1F-DH-02 The stopper parts for J1 axis
This must be installed by the customer. For RH-12FH/20FH series
1S-DH-05J1 The stopper parts for J1 axis Plus side / Minus side both are 90 degree. * Change both simultaneously Standard specification is +/- 225 degree.
This must be installed by the customer. For RH-3FHR series
1S-DH-05J2 The stopper parts for J2 axis Plus side / Minus side both are 60 degree. * Change both simultaneously Standard specification is +/- 225 degree.
Machine cable (Replaced to shorter cable)
1S-02UCBL-01 For fixing
(Set of power and signal) -
2m (A 2m cable is supplied instead of the 5m cable that is supplied as standard)
1F-02UCBL-02 For fixing
(Set of power and signal) -
Extended machine cable (extension type)
1S- CBL-01 For fixing (Set of power and signal) - " " in type shows the length of the cables as follows.
05=5m, 10=10m, 15=15m1S- LCBL-01 For flexing (Set of power and signal) -
Extended machine cable
(direct type)
1S- LUCBL-01 For flexing (Set of power and signal) -
1F- UCBL-02 For fixing (Set of power and signal) - " " in type shows the length of the cables as follows.
10=10m, 15=15m, 20=20m1F- LUCBL-02 For flexing (Set of power and signal) -
Solenoid valve set 1F-VD01-01/VD01E-01 1 set (Sink type)/(Source type) The solenoid-valve set for the hand of the customer setup. For RH-6FH series. 1F-VD02-01/VD02E-01 2 set (Sink type)/(Source type)
1F-VD03-01/VD03E-01 3 set (Sink type)/(Source type)
1F-VD04-01/VD04E-01 4 set (Sink type)/(Source type)
1S-VD01-01/VD01E-01 1 set (Sink type)/(Source type) The solenoid-valve set for the hand of the customer setup. For RH-12FH/20FH series. 1S-VD02-01/VD02E-01 2 set (Sink type)/(Source type)
1S-VD03-01/VD03E-01 3 set (Sink type)/(Source type)
1S-VD04-01/VD04E-01 4 set (Sink type)/(Source type)
1S-VD04-05/
1S-VD04E-05
4 set (Sink type)/(Source type)
For Standard specification
The solenoid-valve set for the hand of
the customer setup. For RH-3FHR series. 1S-VD04W-05/
1S-VD04WE-05
4 set (Sink type)/(Source type)
For Clean/Waterproof specification
Hand input cable 1F-HC35C-01 Robot side: connector. Hand side: wire.
The cable is connected to the sensor by the customer. Attaches the cable clamp (drip proof type) For RH-6FH series
1F-HC35C-02 Robot side: connector. Hand side: wire.
The cable is connected to the sensor by the customer. Attaches the cable clamp (drip proof type) For RH-12FH/20FH series
1S-HC00S-01 Robot side: connector. Hand side: wire.
The cable is connected to the sensor by the customer. For RH-3FHR series
Hand output cable 1F-GR60S-01 Robot side: connector. Hand side: wire
This cable can be used for the solenoid valve prepared by the customer.
1S-GR35S-02 Robot side: connector. Hand side: wire
This cable can be used for the solenoid
valve prepared by the customer.
Hand curl tube 1E-ST0408C-300 For solenoid valve 4set.:4x8
Curl type air tube For RH-6FH series
1N-ST0608C-01 For solenoid valve 4set.:6x8
Curl type air tube For RH-12FH/20FH series
1 General configuration
Contents of the Option equipment and special specification 1-14
Table 1-8 The list of the controller option equipment and special specification
Hand tube 1S-ST0304S For solenoid valve 4set.:3x4
The tube for piping the hand through the
ball screw shaft by the customer. For RH-3FHR series
External Wiring/Piping box 1F-UT-BOX For solenoid valve 4set.:4x8
Box which pulls out the Wire/Piping
(Hand I/O cable, Hand curl tube) For RH-6FH series
1F-UT-BOX-01 For solenoid valve 4set.:6x8
Box which pulls out the Wire/Piping
(Hand I/O cable, Hand curl tube) For RH-12FH/20FH series
Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand
1F-HS408S-01 Hand input cable (eight signal lines and two power lines), 4 eight hoses
Wiring/Piping to pass in the shaft For RH-6FH series (200mm stroke)
1F-HS408S-02 Hand input cable (eight signal lines and two power lines), 4 eight hoses
Wiring/Piping to pass in the shaft For RH-6FH series (340mm stroke)
1F-HS604S-01 Hand input cable (eight signal lines and two power lines), 6 four hoses
Wiring/Piping to pass in the shaft For RH-12FH/20FH series (350mm stroke)
1F-HS604S-02 Hand input cable (eight signal lines and two power lines), 6 four hoses
Wiring/Piping to pass in the shaft For RH-12FH/20FH series (450mm stroke)
Note1) : option, : special specifications.
Item Type Specifications
Classification Note1)
Description
CR750 CR751
Simple teaching pendant R32TB Cable length 7m - With 3-position enable switch IP65
R32TB-15 Cable length 15m -
R33TB Cable length 7m -
R33TB-15 Cable length 15m -
Highly efficient teaching
pendant
R56TB Cable length 7m -
R56TB-15 Cable length 15m -
R57TB Cable length 7m -
R57TB-15 Cable length 15m -
Parallel I/O Interface 2D-TZ368(Sink type)/
2D-TZ378(Source type)
DO: 32 point DI: 32 point Insulated type output signal
(0.1A/24V /point)
Insulated type input signal
(9mA/ 24V /point)
The card type external input-and-output. Interface. Install to the slot of controller.
External I/O cable
(For Parallel I/O Interface) 2D-CBL05 5m Use to connect the external peripheral
device to the parallel input/output interface.2D-CBL15 15m
Parallel I/O Unit 2A-RZ361(Sink type)/ 2A-RZ371(Source type)
DO: 32 point/ DI: 32 point Insulated type output signal
(0.1A/24V /point)
Insulated type input signal
(7mA/ 24V /point)
The unit for expansion the external input/output. Electrical isolated Type (100mA/Point)
External I/O cable (For Parallel I/O Unit)
2A-CBL05 5m Use to connect the external peripheral device to the parallel input/output unit
2A-CBL15 15m
CC-Link interface 2D-TZ576 Only Intelligent device station, Local station For MELSEC PLC with CC-Link con-
nection.
Controller protection box CR750-MB IP54 - The controller protection box is used to protect the controller from an oil mist or other operating environment.CR751-MB -
RT ToolBox2 (Personal computer Sup- port software)
3D-11C-WINE CD-ROM
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10 (With the simulation function)
RT ToolBox2 mini (Personal computer Sup- port software mini)
3D-12C-WINE CD-ROM
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10
Item Type Specifications
Classification Note1)
Description
CR750 CR751
1-15 Contents of the Option equipment and special specification
1 General configuration
[Reference]:The recommendation products of the USB cable are shown below
Table 1-9 Recommendation article of the USB cable
Be careful to the USB cable to apply neither the static electricity nor the noise. Otherwise, it becomes the cause of malfunction.
Use the network equipments (personal computer, USB hub, LAN hub, etc) confirmed by manufacturer. The thing unsuitable for the FA environment (related with conformity, temperature or noise) exists in the equipments connected to USB. When using network equipment, measures against the noise, such as measures against EMI and the addition of the ferrite core, may be necessary. Please fully confirm the operation by customer. Guarantee and maintenance of the equipment on the market (usual office automation equipment) cannot be performed.
Instruction Manual 5F-FB01-PE01 RH-6FH/12FH/20FH-D series
5F-FP01-PE01 RH-3FHR-D series
Note1) : option, : special specifications.
Name Type name Supplier
USB cable
(USB A type-USB mini B type) KU-AMB530 SANWA SUPPLY INC.
USB-M53 ELECOM CO., LTD.
GT09-C30USB-5P MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SYSTEM & SERVICE CO.,
LTD.
MR-J3USBCBL3M MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
USB adapter
(USB B type-USB mini B type) AD-USBBFTM5M ELECOM CO., LTD.
Item Type Specifications
Classification Note1)
Description
CR750 CR751
Caution
Caution
2Robot arm
Standard specifications 2-16
2 Robot arm 2.1 Standard specifications 2.1.1 Basic specifications
(1) RH-6FH series Table 2-1 Standard specifications of robot arm
Item Unit Specifications
TypeNote1) RH-6FH3520/3534
RH-6FH3520C/3534C
RH-6FH3520M/3534M
RH-6FH4520/4534
RH-6FH4520C/4534C
RH-6FH4520M/4534M
RH-6FH5520/5534
RH-6FH5520C/5534C
RH-6FH5520M/5534M
Environment Blank: Standard specification
C: Clean specification
M: Oil mist specification Note2)
Installation posture On floor
Degree of freedom 4
Structure Horizontal, multiple-joint type
Drive system AC servo motor
Position detection method Absolute encoder
Motor capacity J1 750
J2 400
J3 (Z) 200
J4 (axis) 100
Brake J1, J2, J4: no brake, J3: with brake
Arm length 1 arm mm 125 225 325
2 arm mm 225
Max.reach radius( 1+ 2) mm 350 450 550
Operating range J1 deg 170
J2 deg 145
J3 (Z)
mm RH-6FH**20/**20C/**20M: 200 (+133 to +333)
RH-6FH**34: 340 (-7 to +333)
RH-6FH**34C/**34M: 340 (-43 to +297)
J4 (axis) deg 360
Speed of motion Note3) J1 deg/s 400
J2 deg/s 670
J3 (Z) mm/s 2,400
J4 (axis) deg/s 2,500
Maximum horizontal composite speed Note4)
mm/s 6,900 7,600 8,300
Cycle time Note5) sec 0.29
Load Rating kg
(N)
3
Maximum 6
Z axis pressing force Note6)
Maximum N 165
Allowable inertia Rating kg m2 0.01
Maximum 0.12
Pose repeatability Note7) X-Y
direction mm 0.010 0.010 0.012
J3 (Z) mm 0.010
J4 (axis) deg 0.004
Ambient temperature Note8) 0 to 40
Mass k 36 37
Tool wiring Input 8 points/Output 8 points, (total 20 cores)
Dedicated signal cable for multifunctional hand (Two cores + Power cable two cores)
Ethernet cable one cable (100BASE-TX, eight cores) Note9)
Tool pneumatic pipes Primary: 6 x two hoses, Secondary: 4 x eight hoses Note10)
Supply pressure MPa 0.510%
Protection specification Note11) Standard specification: IP20
Clean specification: ISO class 3 Note12)
Oil mist specification: IP65 Note13) Note14)
Painting color Light gray (Equivalent to Munsell: 0.6B7.6/0.2)
2-17 Standard specifications
2Robot arm
Note1) The table is joint writing on the general environment and clean and oil mist (IP65) specification. If the type ends in a letter C, this corresponds to the clean specification, and where it ends in a letter M, it corresponds to the mist specification. The type in which operating range of J3 axis (Z) is 200mm and 340mm are shown together.
Note2) The oil-mist specification of CE specification is the standards. Note3) The maximum speed is the value which applied MvTune2 (high-speed movement mode). Note4) At the maximum speed on the X-Y flat surface in the robot's control point, it is obtained with each speed of J1, J2,
and J4. The control point is the position offset by the rated inertia from the flange. Note5) The value of the following movement which applied MvTune2 (high-speed movement mode) with the carrying mass of
2kg. The cycle time may increase with the case where the positioning accuracy of the work etc. is necessary, or by the
moving position.
Note6) This is the downwards pressing force that occurs at the end of the load when the maximum load is on board and the J1, J2 and J4 axis are in their resting state. Please operate at this level or below. When pressing for long periods of time, an excess load error may occur. Please operate in a manner that does not cause errors.
Note7) The pose repeatability details are given in Page 26, "2.2.1 Pose repeatability". Note8) Sets the robot's operating environmental temperature as parameter OLTMX. Corresponding to the environment, the con-
tinuous control action performance and the overload-protection function are optimized. (Refers to "Optimizing the over- load level" described in "Chapter 5 Functions set with parameters" of separate instruction manual/ Detailed explanations of functions and operations for details.)
Note9) The 8-wire cable designated for LAN wiring can also be used for backup wiring. Note10) The 4 secondary piping can be obtained with the electromagnetic valve (option). Details regarding the electro-
magnetic valve (optional) are shown on Page 109, "(3) Solenoid valve set". Note11) The protection specification details are given in Page 38, "2.2.8 Protection specifications". Note12) The details of the clean specifications are described in Page 40, "2.2.9 Clean specifications". The conditions nec-
essary to guarantee cleanliness are as follows: clean room down flow 0.3 m/s or greater, robot internal suction of 30-50L/min and installation of an exhaust duct at the rear of the robots main base. A 8 joint is prepared at the rear of the base for suction.
Note13) Direct jet flow to the bellows section is not included. Note14) If you use the controller in oil mist or similar environments, use the controller protection box to protect the con-
troller from the operation environment. A robot equipped with the controller protection box as standard is available.
300
2 5
2Robot arm
Standard specifications 2-18
(2) RH-12FH series
Table 2-2 Standard specifications of robot arm
Item Unit Specifications
TypeNote1)
Note1) The table is joint writing on the general environment and clean and oil mist (IP65) specification. If the type ends in a letter C, this corresponds to the clean specification, and where it ends in a letter M, it corresponds to the mist specification. The type in which operating range of J3 axis (Z) is 350mm and 450mm are shown together.
RH-12FH5535/5545
RH-12FH5535C/5545C
RH-12FH5535M/5545M
RH-12FH7035/7045
RH-12FH7035C/7045C
RH-12FH7035M/7045M
RH-12FH8535/8545
RH-12FH8535C/8545C
RH-12FH8535M/8545M
Environment Blank: Standard specification
C: Clean specification
M: Oil mist specification
Installation posture On floor
Degree of freedom 4
Structure Horizontal, multiple-joint type
Drive system AC servo motor
Position detection method Absolute encoder
Motor capacity J1 750
J2 750
J3 (Z) 400
J4 (axis) 200
Brake J1, J2, J4: no brake, J3: with brake
Arm length 1 arm mm 225 375 525
2 arm mm 325
Max.reach radius( 1+ 2) mm 550 700 850
Operating range J1 deg 170
J2 deg 145 153
J3 (Z) mm
RH-12FH**35/**35C/**35M: 350 (-10 +340)
RH-12FH**45/**45C/**45M: 450 (-110 +340)
J4 (axis) deg 360
Speed of motion Note2)
Note2) The maximum speed is the value which applied MvTune2 (high-speed movement mode).
J1 deg/s 420 280
J2 deg/s 450
J3 (Z) mm/s 2,800
J4 (axis) deg/s 2,400
Maximum horizontal composite speed Note3)
Note3) At the maximum speed on the X-Y flat surface in the robot's control point, it is obtained with each speed of J1, J2, and J4. The control point is the position offset by the rated inertia from the flange.
mm/s 11,435 12,535 11,350
Cycle time Note4) sec 0.30
Load Rating kg
(N)
3
Maximum 12
Z axis pressing force Note5)
Maximum N 200
Allowable
inertia
Rating kg m2 0.025
Maximum 0.3
Pose repeatability Note6) X-Y direc- tion
mm 0.012 0.015
J3 (Z) mm 0.010
J4 (axis) deg 0.005
Ambient temperature Note7) 0 to 40
Mass kg 65 67 69
Tool wiring Input 8 points/Output 8 points, (total 20 cores)
Dedicated signal cable for multifunctional hand (Two cores + Power cable two cores)
Ethernet cable one cable (100BASE-TX, eight cores) Note8)
Tool pneumatic pipes Primary: 6 x two hoses, Secondary: 6 x eight hoses Note9)
Supply pressure MPa 0.510%
Protection specification Note10) Standard specification: IP20
Clean specification: ISO class 3 Note11)
Oil mist specification: IP65 Note12) Note13)
Painting color Light gray (Equivalent to Munsell: 0.6B7.6/0.2)
2-19 Standard specifications
2Robot arm
Note4) The value of the following movement which applied MvTune2 (high-speed movement mode) with the carrying mass of 2kg.
The cycle time may increase with the case where the positioning accuracy of the work etc. is necessary, or by the moving position.
Note5) This is the downwards pressing force that occurs at the end of the load when the maximum load is on board and the J1, J2 and J4 axis are in their resting state. Please operate at this level or below. When pressing for long periods of time, an excess load error may occur. Please operate in a manner that does not cause errors.
Note6) The pose repeatability details are given in Page 26, "2.2.1 Pose repeatability". Note7) Sets the robot's operating environmental temperature as parameter OLTMX. Corresponding to the environment, the con-
tinuous control action performance and the overload-protection function are optimized. (Refers to "Optimizing the over- load level" described in "Chapter 5 Functions set with parameters" of separate instruction manual/ Detailed explanations of functions and operations for details.)
Note8) The 8-wire cable designated for LAN wiring can also be used for backup wiring. Note9) The 6 secondary piping can be obtained with the electromagnetic valve (option). Details regarding the electromag-
netic valve (optional) are shown on Page 109, "(3) Solenoid valve set". Note10) The protection specification details are given in Page 38, "2.2.8 Protection specifications". Note11) The details of the clean specifications are described in Page 40, "2.2.9 Clean specifications". The conditions
necessary to guarantee cleanliness are as follows: clean room down flow 0.3 m/s or greater, robot internal suction of 60-140L/min and installation of an exhaust duct at the rear of the robots main base. A 8 joint is prepared at the rear of the base for suction.
Note12) Direct jet flow to the bellows section is not included. Note13) If you use the controller in oil mist or similar environments, use the controller protection box to protect the con-
troller from the operation environment. A robot equipped with the controller protection box as standard is available.
300
2 5
2Robot arm
Standard specifications 2-20
(3) RH-20FH series
Table 2-3 Standard specifications of robot arm
Item Unit Specifications
TypeNote1)
Note1) The table is joint writing on the general environment and clean and oil mist (IP65) specification. If the type ends in a letter C, this corresponds to the clean specification, and where it ends in a letter M, it corresponds to the mist specification. The type in which operating range of J3 axis (Z) is 350mm and 450mm are shown together.
RH-20FH8535/8545
RH-20FH8535C/8545C
RH-20FH8535M/8545M
RH-20FH10035/10045
RH-20FH10035C/10045C
RH-20FH10035M/10045M
Environment Blank: Standard specification
C: Clean specification
M: Oil mist specification
Installation posture On floor
Degree of freedom 4
Structure Horizontal, multiple-joint type
Drive system AC servo motor
Position detection method Absolute encoder
Motor capacity J1 750
J2 750
J3 (Z) 400
J4 (axis) 200
Brake J1, J2, J4: no brake, J3: with brake
Arm length 1 arm mm 525
2 arm mm 325 475
Max.reach radius( 1+ 2) mm 850 1,000
Operating range J1 deg 170
J2 deg 153
J3 (Z) mm
RH-20FH**35/**35C/**35M: 350 (-10 +340)
RH-20FH**45/**45C/**45M: 450 (-110 +340)
J4 (axis) deg 360
Speed of motion Note2)
Note2) The maximum speed is the value which applied MvTune2 (high-speed movement mode).
J1 deg/s 280
J2 deg/s 450
J3 (Z) mm/s 2,400
J4 (axis) deg/s 1,700
Maximum horizontal composite speed Note3)
Note3) At the maximum speed on the X-Y flat surface in the robot's control point, it is obtained with each speed of J1, J2, and J4. The control point is the position offset by the rated inertia from the flange.
mm/s 11,372 13,283
Cycle time Note4) sec 0.30 0.36
Load Rating kg
(N)
5
Maximum 20
Z axis pressing force Note5)
Maximum N 230
Allowable
inertia
Rating kg m2 0.065
Maximum 1.05 Note6)
Pose repeatability Note7) X-Y direc- tion
mm 0.015 0.020
J3 (Z) mm 0.010
J4 (axis) deg 0.005
Ambient temperature Note8) 0 to 40
Mass kg 75 77
Tool wiring Input 8 points/Output 8 points, (total 20 cores)
Dedicated signal cable for multifunctional hand (Two cores + Power cable two cores)
Ethernet cable one cable (100BASE-TX, eight cores) Note9)
Tool pneumatic pipes Primary: 6 x two hoses, Secondary: 6 x eight hoses Note10)
Supply pressure MPa 0.510%
Protection specification Note11) Standard specification: IP20
Clean specification: ISO class 3 Note12)
Oil mist specification: IP65 Note13) Note14)
Painting color Light gray (Equivalent to Munsell: 0.6B7.6/0.2)
2-21 Standard specifications
2Robot arm
Note4) The value of the following movement which applied MvTune2 (high-speed movement mode) with the carrying mass of 2kg.
The cycle time may increase with the case where the positioning accuracy of the work etc. is necessary, or by the moving position.
Note5) This is the downwards pressing force that occurs at the end of the load when the maximum load is on board and the J1, J2 and J4 axis are in their resting state. Please operate at this level or below. When pressing for long periods of time, an excess load error may occur. Please operate in a manner that does not cause errors.
Note6) When offset hand is used, the adjustment of moving speed and acceleration/deceleration speeds may be the Required. Refers to it, because the details is shown in Page 27, "2.2.2 Mass capacity".
Note7) The pose repeatability details are given in Page 26, "2.2.1 Pose repeatability". Note8) Sets the robot's operating environmental temperature as parameter OLTMX. Corresponding to the environment, the
continuous control action performance and the overload-protection function are optimized. (Refers to "Optimizing the overload level" described in "Chapter 5 Functions set with parameters" of separate instruction manual/ Detailed explanations of functions and operations for details.)
Note9) The 8-wire cable designated for LAN wiring can also be used for backup wiring. Note10) The 6 secondary piping can be obtained with the electromagnetic valve (option). Details regarding the electro-
magnetic valve (optional) are shown on Page 109, "(3) Solenoid valve set". Note11) The protection specification details are given in Page 38, "2.2.8 Protection specifications". Note12) The details of the clean specifications are described in Page 40, "2.2.9 Clean specifications". The conditions
necessary to guarantee cleanliness are as follows: clean room down flow 0.3 m/s or greater, robot internal suction of 60-140L/min and installation of an exhaust duct at the rear of the robots main base. A 8 joint is prepared at the rear of the base for suction.
Note13) Direct jet flow to the bellows section is not included. Note14) If you use the controller in oil mist or similar environments, use the controller protection box to protect the con-
troller from the operation environment. A robot equipped with the controller protection box as standard is avail- able.
300
2 5
2Robot arm
Standard specifications 2-22
(4) RH-3FHR series
Table 2-4 Standard specifications of robot arm
Item Unit Specifications
Type Note1)
Note1) The table is joint writing on the general environment and clean and waterproof (IP65) specification. If the type ends in a letter C, this corresponds to the clean specification, and where it ends in a letter W, it corresponds to the waterproof specification.
RH-3FHR3515 RH-3FHR3512C RH-3FHR3512W
Environment Standard specification Clean specification Waterproof specification
Installation posture Hanging
Degree of freedom 4
Structure Horizontal, multiple-joint type
Drive system AC servo motor
Position detection method Absolute encoder
Motor capacity J1 750
J2 200
J3 (Z) 200
J4 (axis) 100
Brake J1, J2, J4: no brake J3: with brake
Arm length 1 arm mm 175
2 arm mm 175
Max.reach radius( 1+ 2) mm 350
Operating range J1 deg 225
J2 deg 225
J3 (Z) mm 150 120
J4 (axis) deg 720
Speed of motion Note2)
Note2) The maximum speed is the value which applied MvTune2 (high-speed movement mode).
J1 deg/s 672
J2 deg/s 708
J3 (Z) mm/s 1,500
J4 (axis) deg/s 3,146
Maximum horizontal composite speed Note3)
Note3) At the maximum speed on the X-Y flat surface in the robot's control point, it is obtained with each speed of J1, J2, and J4. The control point is the position offset by the rated inertia from the flange. Although based on specified speed, speed drops generally. Refer to Page 36, "2.2.6 About moving speed at sin- gular point and near singular point. (RH-3FHR series)" for details.
mm/s 6,267
Cycle time Note4) sec 0.32
Load Rating kg
(N)
1
Maximum 3
Allowable
inertia
Rating kg m2 0.005
Maximum 0.05 Note5)
Pose repeatability Note6) X-Y direc- tion
mm 0.01
J3 (Z) mm 0.01
J4 (axis) deg 0.01
Ambient temperatureNote7) 0 40
Mass kg 24 28
Tool wiring Input 8 points/Output 8 points, eight spare wires
Tool pneumatic pipes Primary: 6 x two hoses, Secondary: 4 x eight hoses Note8)
Supply pressure MPa 0.510%
Protection specification Note9) General-purpose environment:
IP20
Clean: ISO class 5 Note10) Waterproof: IP65 Note11)
Painting color Not painting. Plating (silver)
2-23 Standard specifications
2Robot arm
2.1.2 The counter-force applied to the installation surface The counter-force applied to the installation surface for the strength design of the robot installation surface is shown.
Table 2-5 Value of each counter-force
Note4) The value of the following movement which applied MvTune2 (high-speed movement mode) with the carrying mass of 1kg. The cycle time may increase with the case where the positioning accuracy of the work etc. is necessary, or by
the moving position.
The robot's moving time is influenced by the posture etc. As reference, the reduction method of cycle time is shown in Page 33, " [Supplementary explanation 1]: The setting which shortens execution time".
Note5) When offset hand is used, the adjustment of moving speed and acceleration/deceleration speeds may be the Required. Refers to it, because the details is shown in Page 27, "2.2.2 Mass capacity".
Note6) The pose repeatability details are given in Page 26, "2.2.1 Pose repeatability". Note7) Sets the robot's operating environmental temperature as parameter OLTMX. Corresponding to the environment, the
continuous control action performance and the overload-protection function are optimized. (Refers to "Optimizing the overload level" described in "Chapter 5 Functions set with parameters" of separate instruction manual/ Detailed explanations of functions and operations for details.)
Note8) The 4 secondary piping can be obtained with the electromagnetic valve (option). Details regarding the electro- magnetic valve (optional) are shown on Page 109, "(3) Solenoid valve set".
Note9) The protection specification details are given in Page 38, "2.2.8 Protection specifications". Note10) The details of the clean specifications are described in Page 40, "2.2.9 Clean specifications". Protection of the
cleanness of the robot is required if the down flow in a clean room is 0.3 m/s or more and robot internal suction is 30-50 L/min. A 8 joint is prepared at the base rear part for suction.
Note11) Direct jet flow to the bellows section is not included.
Item Unit Value
RH-6FH series Falls moment: ML Nm 1,640 Torsion moment: MT Nm 710 Horizontal translation force: FH N 1,653 Vertical translation force: FV N 2,318
RH-12FH/20FH series Falls moment: ML Nm 3,190 Torsion moment: MT Nm 1,840 Horizontal translation force: FH N 2,240 Vertical translation force: FV N 2,500
RH-3FHR series Falls moment: ML Nm 380 Torsion moment: MT Nm 410 Horizontal translation force: FH N 920 Vertical translation force: FV N 570
300
2 5
2Robot arm
Standard specifications 2-24
2.1.3 RH-3FHR installation stage RH-3FHR is the robot which hangs. Please manufacture the stage by the customer as shown below, and install
the robot.
As an example of the installation stage, the stage using the iron (cheap) and the stage using the aluminum (easy to process) are shown. Since the product made from the aluminum has strengthened reinforcement, both have the almost same weight.
(1) Example which uses the iron material
Fig.2-1 Installation stage (Example of iron-material use)
NO1 J1255
NO2 J1NO1410
4-10
60604.5t
60603.2t
4-3.2t
44-3.2t
501003.2t
4-
24-
22
900 450
170170(60)
9 0 0
45 0
8 0
80
25 0
220
240
24 0
7 6 0
16 00
7 8 0
Note1) The gross weight of this stage is about 200kg.
Note2) This stage is an example. Please design based on the conditions of the system.
Note3) Fixing the stage to the floor by anchor etc. If the center of gravity of the stage is in the high position, the stage may fall by movement of the robot.
* 1 )
* 1 )
The No1 arm end maximum operating range The radius 255 from J1 axis center
The No2 arm end maximum operating range The radius 410 from J1 axis center. (The No1 arm is included)
4-10 hole
(Robot installation bolt)
60x60 iron rectangular lumber 4.5t
The frame without specification is 60x60 iron rectangular lumber. 3.2t
4-reinforcing plate 3.2t of iron
4x4-reinforcing plate 3.2t of iron
50x10 steel pipe 3.2t
4-caster (Don't use united with adjuster)
2x4-adjuster
2x anchors
The center is reinforced as shown in the above.
*1) Please arrange operations height based on peripheral equipment, such as the work-piece and the hand.
2-25 Standard specifications
2Robot arm
(2) Example which uses the aluminum
Fig.2-2 Installation stage (Example of aluminum frame use)
NO1 J1255
NO2 J1NO1410
4-10
6060
8080
4-3.2t
64-3.2t
4-
24-
22
900
450 170170(80)
9 0 0
4 5 0
80 80
2 5 0
220
240
24 0
7 6 0
1 6 0 0
78 0
Note1) The gross weight of this stage is about 200kg.
Note2) This stage is an example. Please design based on the conditions of the system.
Note3) Fixing the stage to the floor by anchor etc. If the center of gravity of the stage is in the high position, the stage may fall by movement of the robot.
* 1 )
* 1 )
*1) Please arrange operations height based on peripheral equipment, such as the work-piece and the hand.
The No1 arm end maximum operating range The radius 255 from J1 axis center
The No2 arm end maximum operating range The radius 410 from J1 axis center. (The No1 arm is included)
4-10 hole (Robot installation bolt)
4-reinforcing plate 3.2t of iron
6x4-reinforcing plate 3.2t of iron
60x60 aluminum frame
The frame without specification is 80x80 aluminum frame.
The center is reinforced as shown in the above.
4-caster (Don't use united with adjuster)
2x4-adjuster
x2 anchors
2 Robot arm
Definition of specifications 2-26
2.2 Definition of specifications
The accuracy of pose repeatability mentioned in catalogs and in the specification manual is defined as follows.
2.2.1 Pose repeatability For this robot, the pose repeatability is given in accordance with JIS B 8432 (Pose repeatability). Note that the value is based on 100 measurements (although 30 measurements are required according to JIS).
Caution The specified "pose repeatability" is not guaranteed to be satisfied under the following conditions.
[1] Operation pattern factors 1) When an operation that approaches from different directions and orientations are included in rela-
tion to the teaching position during repeated operations
2) When the speed at teaching and the speed at execution are different
[2] Load fluctuation factor 1) When work is present/absent in repeated operations
[3] Disturbance factor during operation 1) Even if approaching from the same direction and orientation to the teaching position, when the
power is turned OFF or a stop operation is performed halfway
[4] Temperature factors 1) When the operating environment temperature changes
2) When accuracy is required before and after a warm-up operation
[5] Factors due to differences in accuracy definition 1) When accuracy is required between a position set by a numeric value in the robot's internal coor-
dinate system and a position within the actual space
2) When accuracy is required between a position generated by the pallet function and a position within the actual space
[6] Positioning movement near the singular point (RH-3FHR)
2-27
Robot arm
2.2.2 Mass capacity The robot's mass capacity is expressed solely in terms of mass, but even for tools and works of similar mass, eccentric loads will have some restrictions When designing the tooling or when selecting a robot, consider the fol- lowing issues.
(1) The tooling should have the value less or equal than the smaller of the allowable moment of inertia found in Page 16, "2.1.1 Basic specifications".
(2) Fig. 2-3 to Fig. 2-6 shows the distribution dimensions for the center of gravity in the case where the vol- ume of the load is relatively small. Use this figure as a reference when designing the tooling. Please use the robot in the allowable moment of inertia of maximum moment of inertia shown in Fig. 2-3 to Fig. 2-6.
[Caution] The mass capacity is greatly influenced by the operating speed of the robot and the motion posture. Even if you are within the allowable range mentioned previously, a vibration, an overload or generate an overcurrnt alarm could occur. In such cases, please reduce acceleration and deceleration (Accel com- mand) speeds and movement speed (Ovrd command). Although the standard value to reduce is 50% for each command, please adjust corresponding to the movement posture. Refer to separate "Instruction Manual/Detailed Explanation of Functions and Operations" for details of each command. Moreover, if hand/workpiece parameters are not set exactly, the similar phenomenon will be easier to occur.
[Caution] Refer to Page 29, "2.2.3 Relationships Among Mass Capacity, Speed, and Acceleration/Deceleration Speed", and set the values of the mass, magnitude, and distance to the centroid of a tool and a workpiece to parameters. If parameters are not set exactly, the lifetime of reduction gears, a belt, etc. is affected.
[Caution] The overhang amount of the load, such as the mass capacity and the allowable moment of inertia defined in this section, are dynamic limit values determined by the capacity of the motor that drives axes or the capacity of the speed reducer. Therefore, it does not guarantee the accuracy on all areas of tooling. Guaranteed accuracy is measured from the center point of the mechanical interface surface. Please note that if the point of operation is kept away from the mechanical interface surface by long and low-rigid tooling, the positioning accuracy may deteriorate or may cause vibration. Note that the allowable offset value (Z direction) from the lower edge of the shaft to the position of center of gravity is 100 mm.
[Caution] Even within the allowable range previously mentioned, an overload alarm may be generated if an ascend- ing operation continues at a micro-low speed. In such a case, it is necessary to increase the ascending speed.
[Caution] This robot will restrict speed automatically by internal controls when the load center-of-gravity position separates from the shaft center. Refer to Page 29, "2.2.3 Relationships Among Mass Capacity, Speed, and Acceleration/Deceleration Speed" in detail. The allowance distance (allowance offset amount) from the center of the shaft to the gravity center of loading weight are shown below. RH-6FH: less than 140mm, RH-12FH: less than 240mm, RH-20FH: less than 320mm, RH-3FHR: less than 50mm.
Fig.2-3 Position of center of gravity for loads (for loads with comparatively small volume): RH-6FH series
200mm (3kg)
mm
60mm(3kg)
140mm(6kg)
Unit: m
Shaft center
Allowable moment of inertia
Maximum
Rating
200 (less than 3kg)
Robot arm
2-28
Fig.2-4 Position of center of gravity for loads (for loads with comparatively small volume): RH-12FH series
Fig.2-5 Position of center of gravity for loads (for loads with comparatively small volume): RH-20FH series
Fig.2-6 Position of center of gravity for loads (for loads with comparatively small volume): RH-3FHR series
mm
85mm(3kg)
150mm(12kg)
170mm(10kg)
240mm(5kg)
Unit: m
Shaft center
Allowable moment of inertia
Maximum
Rating
(less than 5kg)
mm
110mm(5kg)
230mm(20kg)
260mm(15kg)
300mm(12kg)
320mm(10kg)
Unit: m
Shaft center
Allowable moment of inertia
Maximum
Rating
(less than 10kg)
mm
20mm(3kg)
40mm(1kg)
50mm(1kg)
Unit: mm
Shaft center
Allowable moment of inertia
Maximum
Rating
50mm (less than 1kg)
2-29
Robot arm
2.2.3 Relationships Among Mass Capacity, Speed, and Acceleration/Deceleration Speed This robot automatically sets the optimum acceleration and deceleration speeds and maximum speed, according to the load capacity and size that have been set, and operates using these automatically set speeds. To achieve that, it is necessary to correctly set the actual load data (mass and size of hand and work) to be used. However, vibration, overheating and errors such as excessive margin of error and overload may occur, depending on the robot operation pattern or ambient temperature.
In this case, reduce the speed and the acceleration and deceleration rate before continuing to use. This is done by accessing the robot program and adjusting the speed settings (Ovrd) and the acceleration and deceleration set- tings (Accel).
If a setting is performed in such a way that it falls below the mounted load, the life span of the mechanism ele- ments used in the robot may be shortened. In the case of a work requiring a high degree of accuracy, set up the load correctly and use the robot by lowering the ratios of the acceleration and deceleration speeds.
(1) Setting Load Capacity and Size (Hand Conditions) Set up the capacity and size of the hand with the "HNDDAT*" parameter (optimum acceleration/deceleration setting parameter), and set up the capacity and size of the work with the "WRKDAT*" parameter. Numbers 0 to 8 can be used for the asterisk (*) part. Designate the "HNDDAT*" and "WRKDAT*" parameters to be used using the "LoadSet" command in a program. For more details, refer to the separate "Instruction Manual/Detailed Explanation of Functions and Operations." It is the same meaning as "LoadSet 0.0" if not using the "LoadSet".
Note) The position of the center of gravity is located at the center of the surface at the bottom of the shaft. Set the X, Y and Z center of gravity positions for the tool coordinate directions (the Z center of gravity position will be a plus for downward directions).
2.2.4 Vibrations at the Tip of the Arm during Low-Speed Operation of the Robot Vibrations at the tip of the arm may increase substantially during the low-speed operation of the robot, depending on the combination of robot operation, hand mass and hand inertia. This problem occurs when the vibration count specific to the robot arm and the vibration count of the arm driving force are coming close to each other. These vibrations at the tip of the arm can be reduced by taking the following measures:
1) Change the robot's operating speed by using the Ovrd command. 2) Change and move the teaching points of the robot. 3) Change the hand mass and hand inertia.
Hand mass kg
size X mm
size Y mm
size Z mm
center-of-gravity position X mm
center-of-gravity position Y mm
center-of-gravity position Z mm
RH-6FH series
HNDDAT* 6.0 99.0 99.0 76.0 0.0 0.0 38.0
WRKDAT* 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
RH-12FH series
HNDDAT* 12.0 165.0 165.0 64.0 0.0 0.0 16.0
WRKDAT* 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
RH-20FH series
HNDDAT* 20.0 165.0 165.0 109.0 0.0 0.0 37.0
WRKDAT* 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
RH-3FHR series
HNDDAT* 3.0 76.0 76.0 58.0 0.0 0.0 24.0
WRKDAT* 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Robot arm
2-30
2.2.5 Vibration of shaft (J3 axis) position and arm end Vibrations at the tip of the arm may increase substantially during operation under the shaft position near the
low end or the high end of the robot, depending on the combination of hand mass and hand inertia. This problem occurs according to that inertia, because the distance from the shaft support section to the shaft end becomes long. When this vibration affects the robot's operations, please change operating speed etc. like the above Page 29, "2.2.4 Vibrations at the Tip of the Arm during Low-Speed Operation of the Robot".
(1) Relationship Between Mass Capacity and Speed A function to optimize the maximum speed of each axis according to the setting value of the load capacity will be activated (Refer to Fig. 2-7).
However, this function does not work with the following load mass: RH-6FH/12FH series: 3kg or less RH-20FH series: 5kg or less RH-3FHR series: 1kg or less
When the load mass is changed to following, the maximum speed is compensated according to the load mass: RH-6FH/12FH series: exceed 3kg RH-20FH series: exceed 5kg RH-3FHR series: exceed 1kg
[CAUTION] Depending on the operation pattern, the speed and/or acceleration/deceleration at the front edge may not be parallel with the speed and the rate of change of acceleration/deceleration specified in a program.
Fig.2-7 Automatic compensation of speed
100
68
0 0
3
6
(%)
RH-6FH series
M ax
im u m
s pe
e d
ra ti o ( % )
Load capacity (kg)
RH-12FH series RH-20FH series
100
50
0 0
20
(%)
5 10 15
100
52
0 0
6
12
(%)
3 9M ax
im u m
s pe
e d
ra ti o ( % )
Load capacity (kg)
M ax
im u m
s pe
e d
ra ti o ( % )
Load capacity (kg)
100
80
0 0
1 3
RH-3FHR series
M ax
im u m
s pe
e d
ra ti o (
%)
Load capacity (kg)
2-31
Robot arm
(2) Relationship Between Height of Shaft (J3 Axis) and Acceleration/Deceleration Speed A function to optimize the acceleration/deceleration speed according to the height of the shaft (Refer to Fig. 2-8, Fig. 2-9) will be activated. This function is invalid if the shaft (axis J3) operates at a position above P3 in Fig. 2-8. Acceleration/deceleration is compensated for at a position below P3 in Fig. 2-8 if the position of the center of gravity of the load is located at the front edge of the shaft.
This function contains both a standard acceleration and deceleration pattern and a high acceleration and deceler- ation pattern, both of which can be selected in the parameters. The original settings are set to the standard acceleration and deceleration pattern, which enables operation while keeping vibration at the shaft tip (including residual vibration) to a minimum. Users are also able to select the high acceleration and deceleration pattern and operate the robot at high speed. When doing so, users should make sure that additional vibration will not have a negative impact on work carried out by the robot. Where necessary the pattern should be changed, allowing the robot to be used in the most effective way.
The relevant parameter names and their set values are shown below. For more details about parameters and how to change them, please refer to the separate Instruction Manual/Detailed Explanation of Functions and Opera- tions.
Parameter name.....................MAPMODE (acceleration and deceleration optimization pattern selected)
Set value and function.........0: Standard acceleration and deceleration pattern (original setting)
1: High acceleration and deceleration pattern The RH-3FHR series have standard acceleration-and-deceleration mode only.
Fig.2-8 Area in which acceleration/deceleration speed is compensated
Table 2-6 Area in which acceleration/deceleration speed is compensated
Type J3 axis stroke (mm) Compensation area
P2 to P3Stroke length P1(Upper end) P2(Lower end)
RH-6FH series Note1)
Note1) When stroke of J3 axis is 200mm this function is not operate.
340 333 -7 -7 to 133
RH-12FH/20FH series 350 340 -10 -10 to 240
450 340 -110 -110 to 155
RH-3FHR series 150 -583 -733 -733 to -643
P3
(J3)
P1
P2 Shaft (J axis)
Area in which speed and acceleration/deceleration speed are not compensated
Area in which speed and acceleration/deceleration speed are compensated
Robot arm
2-32
Fig.2-9 Automatic compensation of acceleration/deceleration speed
100
50
0 333 133 -7
mm
(%)
73
2
100
50
0 333 133 -7
mm
(%)
73
34
J3 axis (Z) stroke 340mm
A c c e le
ra ti o n / de
c e le
ra -
ti o n
sp ee
d ra
ti o (%
)
Shaft position (mm)
(Standard Acceleration/deceleration speed)
A c c e le
ra ti o n / de
c e le
ra -
ti o n
sp ee
d ra
ti o (%
)
Shaft position (mm)
(High acceleration and deceleration rate) J3 axis (Z) stroke 340mm
100
65
0 340 240 -110
mm
(%)
0
20
140
38
-10
100
65
0 340 240
mm
(%)
0
61
140 -10
-110
58
100
0 340
mm
(%)
0
50
155 70
30 41
-10 -110
100
0 340
mm
(%)
0
50
155 70
20 37
-10 -110
J3 (Z) 340mm( ) J3 (Z) 340mm( )
RH-12FH series
J3 (Z) 340mm( ) J3 (Z) 340mm( )
RH-20FH series
RH-6FH series
A cc
e le
ra ti o n / de
c e le
ra -
ti o n s
pe e d
ra ti o (%
)
Shaft position (mm)
(Standard Acceleration/deceleration speed) axis (Z) stroke 350/450mm
A c c el
e ra
ti o n / de
c e le
ra -
ti o n s
pe e d
ra ti o (%
)
Shaft position (mm)
(Standard Acceleration/deceleration speed) axis (Z) stroke 350/450mm
A c c e le
ra ti o n / de
c e le
ra -
ti o n s
pe e d
ra ti o (%
)
Shaft position (mm)
axis (Z) stroke 350/450mm
A c c e le
ra ti o n / de
c e le
ra -
ti o n s
p ee
d r
at io
(% )
Shaft position (mm)
axis (Z) stroke 350/450mm
(Standard Acceleration/deceleration speed)
(Standard Acceleration/deceleration speed)
Note) The high acceleration-and-deceleration pattern of the type without illustration of the high acceleration-and- deceleration pattern is the same as the standard acceleration-and-deceleration pattern.
100
24 36
0 -583 -643 -675 -713
mm
-733
J3 axis (Z) stroke: 150mm (Standard Acceleration/deceleration speed)
RH-3FHR series
A c c e le
ra ti o n / de
c e le
ra -
ti o n s
pe e d
ra ti o (%
)
Shaft position(mm)
2-33
Robot arm
(3) Relation between offset length and the maximum speed A function to optimize the maximum speed of each axis according to the offset length will be activated. (Refer to Fig. 2-10)
Fig.2-10 Relationship of the offset length and maximum velocity
[Supplementary explanation 1]: The setting which shortens execution time The execution time can be improved by using the following methods.
1) Perform continuous path operation using the Cnt command. 2) Control the optimum acceleration/deceleration using the Oadl command. 3) Control the optimum speed using the Spd command. 4) Setting a larger value in the optimum acceleration/deceleration adjustment rate parameter: JADL. (Maxi-
mum 100) The moving time can be shortened by setting a larger value in the optimum acceleration/deceleration adjustment rate parameter (JADL). In this robot, the acceleration/deceleration speed is initialized to allow continuous moving with a short wait time (setting of B in the Fig. 2-11). This setting is suited for continuous operations that have a short tact time, such as palletizing work. Conversely, if quick moves (short moving time) are required, such as L/UL work on machined parts, the acceleration/ deceleration speed can be increased by initial setting (setting of A in the Fig. 2-11). However, please note that some setting values of acceleration/deceleration speed tend to cause overload and overheat errors. In such a case, extend the wait time, reduce the acceleration/deceleration speed, or decrease the moving speed.
100
50
0 0 30 140
mm
(%)
60
76
100
70
0 0 20 140
mm
(%)
40
40
Offset length (mm) Offset length (mm)
100
0 0
mm
(%)
92
91
150
100
0 0
mm
(%)
60
26016060
20
Offset length (mm) Offset length (mm)
M ax
im u m
s pe
e d
ra ti o ( % )
M ax
im u m
s pe
e d
ra ti o ( % )
M ax
im um
s pe
e d
ra ti o ( % )
M ax
im um
s pe
e d
ra ti o ( % )
Robot arm
2-34
Fig.2-11 Relationship between Acceleration/deceleration Speed and Tact Time (Conceptual Drawing)
5) Move without changing the posture. (RH-3FHR series) The robot's moving time is influenced not only by the size of moving distance but by posture change. The example is shown in Fig. 2-12. When moving changing the posture (left side of the figure), the movement distance is shorter, but moving time may become long conversely. Conversely, When moving without changing the posture, moving time may become shorter (right side of the figure).
Fig.2-12 Moving time by posture change (Conceptual Drawing)
Tact time/ 1 cycle Operation time
Wait time B
A
Increased acceleration/deceleration speed
x Accel instruction [%] x parameter JADL [%]
Acceleration/deceleration speed [m/sec2] = optimum acceleration/deceleration speed [m/sec2]
+Y
+X
+Y
+X
Current position Left hand posture
Locus
Moving with posture change
Moving without posture change
The robot's posture (arm)
The robot's posture (arm)
Current position
Left hand posture
Target position Right hand posture
Target position
Left hand posture
Locus
2-35
Robot arm
(4) Time to reach the position repeatability When using this robot, the time to reach the position repeatability may be prolonged due to the effect of residual vibration at the time of stopping. If this happens, take the following measures:
1) Change the operation position of the Z axis to the location near the top as much as possible. 2) Increase the operation speed prior to stopping. 3) When positioning the work near the bottom edge of the Z axis, if no effectiveness is achieved in step "2)"
above, perform operation (robot path: O A C). In the case of operation (robot path: O B
C), residual vibration may occur. (Refer to Fig. 2-13.)
Fig.2-13 Recommended path when positioning at the bottom edge of the Z axis
O
A
B 1 5 0m
m
M o re
t h an
1 5 0 m
m
Robot arm
2-36
2.2.6 About moving speed at singular point and near singular point. (RH-3FHR series) The robot of our company has memorized the teaching position and calculates of linear interpolation movement
using the position data in the XYZ coordinate system. Even if it is the same position data, the robot can take two or more postures. For example, if X coordinate value is "0" and Y coordinate value is also "0", the rotation angle of J1 axis is not decided uniquely. This position is called singular point, and positioning or passing with XYZ JOG and linear interpolation will not be performed. And, even though based on the specified speed, when moving near singular point with linear interpolation , the error occurs , because the J1 axis must rotate at the big speed. ("a)" of Fig. 2- 14) However, in RH-3FHR series, speed was lowered automatically and it has the function which can be passed without the error. In addition, this function can be changed valid/invalid by setting of parameter:SPDOPT, and SpdOpt command. Refer to the separate manual "Detailed explanations of functions and operations" for details. And, the area in R2 shown in "b)" of Fig. 2-14 is the singular point, and positioning and passage with linear interpolation movement cannot be performed. In joint interpolation movement, positioning and passage are possible. It is in valid condition at shipping.
Fig.2-14 The singular point and the speed regulation near the singular point
J2
+Y
+X
J2
J4
J4
J1
Singular point
The J1 axis rotates at high speed.
(X=0,Y=0)
J2
+Y
+X
J2
J4
J4
J1
R1
R2
b) Speed regulation area
a) The singular point and the movement near the singular point
Speed regulation area (R1-R2)
V
The range of the speed regulation area RH-3FHR series
R1=240.0mm R2=1.0mm
Moving near of the singular point by linear interpolation.
c) Speed change in the speed regulation area
A
B
C
A
B
C
A: Starts the slowdown if robot goes into the speed regulation area.
B: Accelerates slowly towards going out. C: If robot goes out completely from speed regulation
area, it returns to specification speed.
Speed
Time
Speed regulation area
2-37
Robot arm
2.2.7 Collision detection This series have the "collision detection function" which detects the abnormalities by the collision of the robot arm, and the initial setting has set this function as the enable to suppress damage to the minimum. Although the enable/disable of this function can be changed by parameter: COL and command: ColChk, you should use in valid condition of this function for protection of the robot and of the peripheral equipment.
The abnormalities are detected by the robot's kinetics model, presuming torque necessary for movement at any time. Therefore, the setting parameter (HNDDAT*, WRKDAT*) of the hand and the work piece conditions should be right. And, it may be detected as the collision in movement as speed and motor torque are changed rapidly. (for example, the movement near the place of the origin by linear interpolation, the reversal movement, the cold con- dition, the operation after long term stoppage)
In such a case, by adjusting the value of the setting parameter (COLLVL, COLLVLJG) of the collision detection level according to actual use environment, the sensitivity of collision detection can be optimized and the damage risk can be reduced further. And, in the operation after the low temperature or long term stoppage, please operate by accustoming at low speed (warm-up), or use the warm-up operation mode.
Refer to the separate instruction manual "Detailed explanations of functions and operations" for details of related
parameter.
Table 2-7 Factory-shipments condition
JOG operation Automatic
RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series Valid Invalid
RH-3FHR series Valid Valid
Robot arm
2-38
2.2.8 Protection specifications (1) Types of protection specifications
The robot arm has protection specifications that comply with the IEC Standards. The protection specifications and applicable fields are shown in Table 2-8.
Table 2-8 Protection specifications and applicable fields
Use the controller protection box to protect the controller from the environment when the controller will be used in the environment such as the oil mist shown in the Table 2-8.
The IEC IP symbols define the degree of protection against solids and fluids, and do not indicate a protective structure against the entry of oil.
The IEC standard is described by the following "Information" And, the corrosion of the rust etc. may occur to the robot with the liquids.
Information
The IEC IP20
It indicates the protective structure that prevents an iron ball 12 0 +0.05mm diameter, which is being pressed
with the power of 3.1 kg10%, from going through the opening in the outer sheath of the supplied equipment.
The IEC IP65
Protection against water infiltration as specified in IP65 indicates a protective structure that is not harmfully affected when 12.55% liters of water is supplied from a test device at a position approx. 3m away in various directions and a water pressure of 30kPa at the nozzle section. The water is filled one minute per 1m2 of test device surface area for a total of three minutes.
Type Protection
specifications (IEC Standards value)
Classification Applicable field Remarks
RH-6FHxx20/xx34
RH-12FHxx35/xx45
RH-20FHxx35/xx45
RH-3FHR3515
Robot arm: IP20 General-purpose environment speci- fications
General assembly Slightly dusty environment
RH-6FHxx20M/xx34M
RH-6FHxx20-SM/xx34-SM Note1)
RH-12FHxx35M/xx45M
RH-12FHxx35M-SM/
xx45M-SM Note1)
RH-20FHxx35M/xx45M
RH-20FHxx35M-SM/
xx45M-SM Note1)
Note1) The "-SM" specification comes with the controller protection box as standard.
Robot arm: IP65 (Direct jet flow to the bellows section is not included.)
Oil mist specifica- tions
Machine tool (cutting) Machine shop with heavy oil mist Dusty work shop
Note that if the cutting machine is using abra- sive materials, the robot's life will be shortened.
RH-3FHR3512W Robot arm: IP65 (Direct jet flow to the bellows section is not included.)
Waterproof specifi- cations
Food processing (handling) The work shops which requires washing of a robot arm.
CAUTION
2-39
Robot arm
(2) About the use with the bad environment The protection specifications robot has protection methods that conform to IEC's IP65 standards. (Direct jet flow to the bellows section is not included.) It has protection structure designed to prevent harmful effects caused by splashing water coming from various directions, as the robot is operating. (Direct jet flow to the bellows section is not included.)
Recommended usage conditions 1) The robot is designed for use in combination with machining device. 2) Robot's protection performance can be improved by pressurizing its interior. If you use a robot in an envi-
ronment where oil mist is present, it is recommended that the interior of the robot be pressurized to ensure its reliability over a long period of time. Use the provided 8 joint (AIR PURGE) to supply dry air for pressurizing. The 8 joint (AIR PURGE) can be found at the base rear part of the robot arm.
Table 2-9 Specification of the dry air for pressurization
3) We are confirming examining with the cutting oil, and satisfying protection specification. Our warranty does not cover damages or failure resulting from the robot being operated in any environment where other cutting oils than those listed in the table are used (except cutting oils with respect to which the robot's compatibil- ity with the protection specification is verified through our operability evaluation) or where the robot body may be directly splashed with water, oil or dust in quantities larger than stated in the protection specifica- tion.
4) Take measures so that the robot will not be exposed to water, oil and/or chips for a long period of time. 5) The packing gets deteriorated with the passage of time and must be replaced as required. Table 2-10 pro-
vides guidelines for replacing the packing.
Table 2-10 Packing replacement guideline
Failure to replace deteriorated packing permits water or oil to enter the interior of the robot, possibly causing it to become inoperable.
Packing required and liquid gasket used therewith are available from dealer.
Also, entrained water droplets lead to the formation of rust on the robot, but would not usually affect the robot's ability to operate normally.
The warranty is invalid for any faults that occur when the robot is used under the following conditions.
Also, if the cover and/or other parts are damaged by interferences caused by the peripheral devices and the robot, the protection specification (seal performance, etc.) may be degraded. Therefore, please pay extra attention when handling the robot.
Refer to Page 229, "6.2 Working environment".
1) In surroundings that generate inflammable gases or corrosive gasses. 2) Atmosphere of the mist containing polish liquid etc. 3) Atmosphere in which the water, the oil, and the dust exceeding protection specification fall on the robot arm
directly. 4) Pressurization by the dry air exceeding the specification of Table 2-9.
Item Dew point Pressure
Specification The atmospheric pressure dew point is -
20 degree or less.
0 to 3kPa
Environment Whether or not robot is
pressurized When packing must be replaced
General environment Not pressurized Note1)
Note1) The pressurization inside the robot arm is unnecessary in general environment and clean room environ- ment.
When signs of cracking or peeling are noted in the packing.Clean room Not pressurized Note1)
Oil mist Pressurized
Not pressurized When removing and installing the cover.
Robot arm
2-40
2.2.9 Clean specifications (1) Types of clean specifications
The robot arm with clean specification is made by order. Please check the delivery schedule.
Table 2-11 Clean specifications
Precautions for use 1) A 8 VACUUM coupling is provided in the base section of the robot arm for vacuum inside the robot arm.
(Refer to Fig. 2-57 or Fig. 2-58) When using the robot, connect this coupling with the vacuum generating valve (Refer to Table 2-12) and vacuum pump (furnished by the customer).
2) To suck in the robot arm, use the vacuum generator of the specification shown in following a) and b). a) When using the vacuum generator
Table 2-12 Specifications of vacuum generation valve (Confirmed in our company
b) When using the vacuum pump Assure the vacuum flow rate of RH-6FH series: 30-50L/min, RH-12FH/20FH series: 60-140L/min, and RH-3FHR series: 3-5L/min . And, secure the exhaust course from the pump not to affect the power sup- ply and the cleanness for the vacuum pumps. RH-12FH/20FH has two VACUUM couplings. Please be sure to suck in using both of couplings.
Type Degree of cleanliness Internal suction Remarks
RH-6FHxx20C/xx34C
RH-12FHxx35C/xx45C
RH-20FHxx35C/xx45C
ISO class 3 Note1)
Note1) The conditions necessary to guarantee cleanliness are as follows: clean room down flow 0.3 m/s or greater, robot internal suction of RH-6FH series: 30-50L/min RH-12FH/20FH series: 60-140L/min, and installation of an exhaust duct at the rear of the robots main base. A 8 joint is prepared at the rear of the base for suction.
Suck the inside of robot arm with
vacuum pump. (prepared by cus- tomer)
Use it in the clean room with the
down flow (flow velocity 0.3 m/s
above).
The use of a vacuum generating valve
is recommended.
RH-3FHR3512C ISO class 5 Note2)
Note2) The conditions necessary to guarantee cleanliness are as follows: clean room down flow 0.3 m/s or greater, robot internal suction of 3-5L/min. A 8 joint is prepared at the rear of the base for suction.
Type Maker Air pressure Note1)
Note1) It is the vacuum pump maker's written specification.
Quantity
MEDT 14 KOGANEI CORPORATION Vacuum rate: 90.0 L/min(ANR) RH-6FH series : 1 RH-12FH/20FH series : 2
ME05 KOGANEI CORPORATION Vacuum rate: 6.3 L/min(ANR) RH-3FHR series : 1
2-41
Robot arm
3) The ventilation duct is attached to the robot arm rear (refer to Fig. 2-15). As the Z axis moves up and down the volume of the bellows varies, and air is sucked in and released out of the robots ventilation duct opening. Be sure to locate the ventilation ducts opening in a position that will not affect the robots clean- liness. Furthermore, whilst it is only a small amount, internal suction results in external air flows into the robot through the ventilation ducts opening, and therefore the following two points should be considered when deciding where to locate the ventilation ducts opening.
The opening should be facing downwards The opening should not be located in the vicinity of dust/dirt or liquids, etc.
(Recommended cleanliness of surrounding area: less than ISO class 5)
Fig.2-15 Installation of Ventilation Duct
4) When using the optional electromagnetic valve set, we recommend using the primary pipings spare piping (6 air hose) to release the exhaust fumes. Please take care as leaking exhaust fumes inside the robot may have an impact on the robots cleanliness.
Robot base
Ventilation duct
Opening
Internal suction
Machine cable
Robot arm
Names of each part of the robot 2-42
2.3 Names of each part of the robot
Fig.2-16 Names of each part of the robot (Floor installation type)
2
J4
J2
J1
J3
A
View A
Note 1) The operation method of the brake release switch. The brake of J3 axis can be released with this switch and the enabling switch of T/B. The brake is released in an off-and-on way. Please be sure to perform brake release operation by two-person operations. Always assign an operator other than the switch operator to prevent the arm from dropping. This operation must be carried out with the switch operator giving signals.
When releasing the brake the J3 axis will drop. Be sure to perform brake release operation by two- person operations.
(1) One person supports so that the J3 axis may not drop. (2) The one more person pushes the brake release switch of the robot arm, in the
condition that the enabling switch of T/B is turned on. Only when both switches are pressed, the brake is released in an off-and-on way.
CAUTION
Note1)
Brake release switch
No.1 arm
No.2 arm
J1 axis
J2 axis
Robot base
J3 axis
Shaft
J4 axis
T/B
Enabling switch
(Hold down to the left or the right.)
Brake release switch
2-43 Names of each part of the robot
Robot arm
Fig.2-17 Names of each part of the robot (Hanging installation type)
J4
J2
J3
J1
2
No.1 arm
J2-axis
Base
(Rear)
J1-axis
Brake release switch
No.2 arm
Shaft
J3-axis
J4-axis
Note 1) The operation method of the brake release switch. The brake of J3 axis can be released with this switch and the enabling switch of T/B. (RH-3FHR series: J3 axis) Please be sure to perform brake release operation by two-person operations. Always assign an operator other than the switch operator to prevent the arm from dropping. This operation must be carried out with the switch operator giving signals.
When releasing the brake the J3 axis will drop. Be sure to perform brake release operation by two- person operations.
(1) One person supports so that the J3 axis may not drop. (2) The one more person pushes the brake release switch of the robot arm, in the
condition that the enabling switch of T/B is turned on. Only when both switches are pressed, the brake is released in an off-and-on way.
CAUTION
T/B
Enabling switch
(Hold down to the left or the right.)
Note 1)
Robot arm
Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-44
2.4 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram
2.4.1 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram (RH-6FH series) (1) Standard Specification
Fig.2-18 Outside dimensions of RH-6FH35xx
340mm (200mm stroke) 480mm (340mm stroke)
*5)
Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes (M4 depth 6mm) for fixing user wiring/piping. Six places on both-sides of No.2 arm, Two
places on front surface. *3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *4) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *5) Required space to installing/removing the cover.
Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.
Note) Refer to Fig. 2-52 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.
2-45 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram
Robot arm
Fig.2-19 Operating range diagram of RH-6FH35xx
Installation surface
Robot arm
Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-46
Fig.2-20 Outside dimensions of RH-6FH45xx
340mm (200mm stroke) 480mm (340mm stroke)
*5)
Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes (M4 depth 6mm) for fixing user wiring/piping. Six places on both-sides of No.2 arm, Two
places on front surface. *3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *4) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *5) Required space to installing/removing the cover.
Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.
Note) Refer to Fig. 2-52 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.
2-47 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram
Robot arm
Fig.2-21 Operating range diagram of RH-6FH45xx
Installation surface
Robot arm
Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-48
Fig.2-22 Outside dimensions of RH-6FH55xx
340mm (200mm stroke) 480mm (340mm stroke)
*5)
Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes (M4 depth 6mm) for fixing user wiring/piping. Six places on both-sides of No.2 arm, Two places
on front surface. *3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *4) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *5) Required space to installing/removing the cover.
Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.
Note) Refer to Fig. 2-52 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.
2-49 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram
Robot arm
Fig.2-23 Operating range diagram of RH-6FH55xx
Installation surface
Robot arm
Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-50
(2) Clean Specification and oil mist specification
Fig.2-24 Outside dimensions of RH-6FH35xxC/M
340mm (200mm stroke) 480mm (340mm stroke)
*6)
Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes (M4 depth 6mm) for fixing user wiring/piping. Six places on both-sides of No.2 arm, Two places on
front surface. *3) The duct (25, length: 3m) attached to the clean specification. Be careful for the hand etc. not to interfere and arrange the
duct. *4) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *5) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *6) Required space to installing/removing the cover.
Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.
Note) Refer to Fig. 2-52 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.
2-51 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram
Robot arm
Fig.2-25 Operating range diagram of RH-6FH35xxC/M
Installation surface
Robot arm
Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-52
Fig.2-26 Outside dimensions of RH-6FH45xxC/M
340mm (200mm stroke) 480mm (340mm stroke)
*6)
Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes (M4 depth 6mm) for fixing user wiring/piping. Six places on both-sides of No.2 arm, Two places on
front surface. *3) The duct (25, length: 3m) attached to the clean specification. Be careful for the hand etc. not to interfere and arrange the
duct. *4) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *5) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *6) Required space to installing/removing the cover.
Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.
Note) Refer to Fig. 2-52 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.
2-53 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram
Robot arm
Fig.2-27 Operating range diagram of RH-6FH45xxC/M
Installation surface
Robot arm
Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-54
Fig.2-28 Outside dimensions of RH-6FH55xxC/M
340mm (200mm stroke) 480mm (340mm stroke)
*6)
Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes (M4 depth 6mm) for fixing user wiring/piping. Six places on both-sides of No.2 arm, Two places on
front surface. *3) The duct (25, length: 3m) attached to the clean specification. Be careful for the hand etc. not to interfere and arrange
the duct. *4) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *5) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *6) Required space to installing/removing the cover.
Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.
Note) Refer to Fig. 2-52 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.
2-55 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram
Robot arm
Fig.2-29 Operating range diagram of RH-6FH55xxC/M
Installation surface
Robot arm
Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-56
2.4.2 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram (RH-12FH series) (1) Standard Specification
Fig.2-30 Outside dimensions of RH-12FH55xx
Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.
Note) Refer to Fig. 2-53 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.
Note
*1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery.
*2) Indicates screw holes for fixing user wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-59)
*3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.
*4) Required space to installing/removing the cover.
*5) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.
2-57 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram
Robot arm
Fig.2-31 Operating range diagram of RH-12FH55xx
Installation surface
Robot arm
Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-58
Fig.2-32 Outside dimensions of RH-12FH70xx
Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.
Note) Refer to Fig. 2-53 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.
Note
*1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery.
*2) Indicates screw holes for fixing user wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-59)
*3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.
*4) Required space to installing/removing the cover.
*5) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.
2-59 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram
Robot arm
Fig.2-33 Operating range diagram of RH-12FH70xx
Installation surface
Robot arm
Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-60
Fig.2-34 Outside dimensions of RH-12FH85xx
Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.
Note) Refer to Fig. 2-53 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.
Note
*1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery.
*2) Indicates screw holes for fixing user wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-59)
*3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.
*4) Required space to installing/removing the cover.
*5) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.
2-61 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram
Robot arm
Fig.2-35 Operating range diagram of RH-12FH85xx
Installation surface
Robot arm
Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-62
(2) Clean Specification and oil mist specification
Fig.2-36 Outside dimensions of RH-12FH55xxC/M
Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.
Note) Refer to Fig. 2-53 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.
Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes for fixing user wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-59) *3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *4) Required space to installing/removing the cover. *5) The duct (50, length: 2m) attached to the clean specification. Be careful for the hand etc. not to interfere and arrange
the duct. *6) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.
2-63 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram
Robot arm
Fig.2-37 Operating range diagram of RH-12FH55xxC/M
Installation surface
Robot arm
Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-64
Fig.2-38 Outside dimensions of RH-12FH70xxC/M
Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.
Note) Refer to Fig. 2-53 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.
Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes for fixing user wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-59) *3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *4) Required space to installing/removing the cover. *5) The duct (50, length: 2m) attached to the clean specification. Be careful for the hand etc. not to interfere and arrange the
duct. *6) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.
2-65 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram
Robot arm
Fig.2-39 Operating range diagram of RH-12FH70xxC/M
Installation surface
Robot arm
Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-66
Fig.2-40 Outside dimensions of RH-12FH85xxC/M
Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes for fixing user wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-59) *3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *4) Required space to installing/removing the cover. *5) The duct (50, length: 2m) attached to the clean specification. Be careful for the hand etc. not to interfere and arrange
the duct. *6) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.
Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.
Note) Refer to Fig. 2-53 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.
2-67 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram
Robot arm
Fig.2-41 Operating range diagram of RH-12FH85xxC/M
Installation surface
Robot arm
Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-68
2.4.3 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram (RH-20FH series) (1) Standard Specification
Fig.2-42 Outside dimensions of RH-20FH85xx
Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.
Note) Refer to Fig. 2-54 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.
Note
*1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery.
*2) Indicates screw holes for fixing user wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-59)
*3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.
*4) Required space to installing/removing the cover.
*5) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.
2-69 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram
Robot arm
Fig.2-43 Operating range diagram of RH-20FH85xx
Installation surface
Robot arm
Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-70
Fig.2-44 Outside dimensions of RH-20FH100xx
Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.
Note) Refer to Fig. 2-54 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.
Note
*1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery.
*2) Indicates screw holes for fixing user wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-59)
*3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.
*4) Required space to installing/removing the cover.
*5) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.
2-71 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram
Robot arm
Fig.2-45 Operating range diagram of RH-20FH100xx
Installation surface
Robot arm
Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-72
(2) Clean Specification and oil mist specification
Fig.2-46 Outside dimensions of RH-20FH85xxC/M
Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes for fixing user wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-59) *3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *4) Required space to installing/removing the cover. *5) The duct (50, length: 2m) attached to the clean specification. Be careful for the hand etc. not to interfere and arrange the
duct. *6) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.
Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.
Note) Refer to Fig. 2-54 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.
2-73 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram
Robot arm
Fig.2-47 Operating range diagram of RH-20FH85xxC/M
Installation surface
Robot arm
Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-74
Fig.2-48 Outside dimensions of RH-20FH100xxC/M
Note) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot.
Note) Refer to Fig. 2-54 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions.
Note *1) Indicates the space necessary to replace the battery. *2) Indicates screw holes for fixing user wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-59) *3) The distance to a minimum bendable radius of the machine cable for CR750/751 controller. *4) Required space to installing/removing the cover. *5) The duct (50, length: 2m) attached to the clean specification. Be careful for the hand etc. not to interfere and arrange the
duct. *6) Indicates the space necessary to connect the machine cable for CR750/751 controller.
2-75 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram
Robot arm
Fig.2-49 Operating range diagram of RH-20FH100xxC/M
Installation surface
Robot arm
Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-76
2.4.4 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram of RH-3FHR series (1) Standard Specification
Fig.2-50 Outside dimensions, Operating range diagram of RH-3FHR series (Standard specification)
1. 2.J1=0J2=+180J3=-583mmJ4=0 3.*1M5 4.*2 5.*3 6.*4CR750/751 7.*5 8.*6
No.1
Operating range diagram
. arm circle radius
The locus of J2 axis center The locus
of J4 axis center
Maintenance space
4-9 Installation hole
2-M12 hole for hanging tools
4-M8 hole for the jack-up
Robot's origin
Maintenance space
View B
View A
Installation surface
J1 axis center J2 axis
center
J4 axis center
(Installation reference)
(I n st
al la
ti o n
re fe
re n c e )
Detailed drawing of T slot
Dimension a
Ra6.3
R a6
.3 Controller Dimension a
CR750 183
CR751 127
Note1) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot. Note2) Refer to Fig. 2-55 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions. Note3) Use of the optional solenoid valve set. The solenoid valve set installed at the side on the No.2 arm. (*1 mark) Take care
at layout design. Note4) The position on the vertical extension of the "robot origin" becomes the singular point. Positioning and passage to this
position with linear interpolation movement cannot be performed. Take care at layout design.
Notice 1. The outside dimensions exclude projecting parts. 2. The posture of the figure are J1=0 degree, J2=+180
degree, J3=-583mm, and J4=0 degree. 3. *1 is the T slot for piping, wiring, and solenoid valve instal-
lation. (Attach the M5 nut) 4. *2 is the installation stage (customer arrangements). 5. *3 is allowance stage dimensions. 6. *4 is the space necessary for connection of the machine
cable for CR750/751 controller. 7. *5 is the maintenance space necessary for battery
replacement etc. 8. *6 is the distance to a minimum bendable radius of the
machine cable for CR750/751 controller.
2-77 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram
Robot arm
(2) Clean/Waterproof Specification
Fig.2-51 Outside dimensions, Operating range diagram of RH-3FHR series (Clean/Waterproof specification)
1. 2.J1=0J2=+180J3=-583mmJ4=0 3.*1M5 4.*2 5.*3 6.*4CR750/751 7.*5 8.*6
No.1
Controller Dimension a
CR750 183
CR751 127
Operating range diagram
arm circle radius
The locus of J2 axis center The locus
of J4 axis center
Maintenance space
4-9 Installation hole
2-M12 hole for hanging tools
4-M8 hole for the jack-up
Robot's origin
Maintenance space
View B
View A
Installation surface
J1 axis center
J2 axis center
J4 axis center
(Installation reference)
(I n st
al la
ti o n
re fe
re n c e )
Detailed drawing of T slot
Bellows
(Dimension of J1 axis)
(Dimension of J2 axis)
Dimension a
Ra6.3
R a6
.3
Note1) The drawing shows an example of the CR750 controller connection robot. Note2) Refer to Fig. 2-56 for the mechanical interface section and installation base section dimensions. Note3) Use of the optional solenoid valve set. The solenoid valve set installed at the side on the No.2 arm. (*1 mark) Take care
at layout design. Note4) The position on the vertical extension of the "robot origin" becomes the singular point. Positioning and passage to this
position with linear interpolation movement cannot be performed. Take care at layout design.
Notice 1. The outside dimensions exclude projecting parts. 2. The posture of the figure are J1=0 degree, J2=+180 degree,
J3=-583mm, and J4=0 degree. 3. *1 is the T slot for piping, wiring, and solenoid valve installa-
tion. (Attach the M5 nut) 4. *2 is the installation stage (customer arrangements). 5. *3 is allowance stage dimensions. 6. *4 is the space necessary for connection of the machine
cable for CR750/751 controller. 7. *5 is the maintenance space necessary for battery replace-
ment etc. 8. *6 is the distance to a minimum bendable radius of the
machine cable for CR750/751 controller.
Robot arm
Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-78
2.4.5 Mechanical interface and Installation surface (1) Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-6FH series
Fig.2-52 Mechanical interface and Installation surface (RH-6FH series)
Note) Don't install the robot arm in the position where direct rays or the heat of lighting hits. The skin temperature of the robot arm may rise, and the error may occur.
(Base section of a robot arm)
2-79 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram
Robot arm
(2) Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-12FH series
Fig.2-53 Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-12FH series
Note) Don't install the robot arm in the position where direct rays or the heat of lighting hits. The skin temperature of the robot arm may rise, and the error may occur.
(Base section of a robot arm)
Robot arm
Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-80
(3) Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-20FH series
Fig.2-54 Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-20FH series
Note) Don't install the robot arm in the position where direct rays or the heat of lighting hits. The skin temperature of the robot arm may rise, and the error may occur.
(Base section of a robot arm)
2-81 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram
Robot arm
(4) Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-3FHR series (Standard specification)
Fig.2-55 Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-3FHR series (Standard specification)
Don't give a shock to the ball screw shaft at the time of hand installation. Especially don't strike the shaft end by hammer etc. The ball screw shaft may be damaged.
Y-Y
Section of Y-Y
Detail of Mechanical interface
(Installation reference)
(I n st
al la
ti o n
re fe
re n c e )
Maintenance space
Maintenance space
4-9 installation hole
2-M12 hole for hanging tools
4-M8 hole for the jack-up
Robot's origin
Installation surface
Installation dimension details
11
th ro
ug h h
ole
Ball screw shaft (J3 axis)
Ra6.3
R a6
.3
CAUTION
Robot arm
Outside dimensions Operating range diagram 2-82
(5) Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-3FHR series (Clean/Waterproof specification)
Fig.2-56 Mechanical interface and Installation surface of RH-3FHR series (Clean/Waterproof specification)
Don't give a shock to the ball screw shaft at the time of hand installation. Especially don't strike the shaft end by hammer etc. The ball screw shaft may be damaged.
Y-YSection of Y-Y Detail of Mechanical interface
(Installation reference)
(I n st
al la
ti o n
re fe
re n c e )
Maintenance space
Maintenance space
4-9 installation hole
2-M12 hole for hanging tools
4-M8 hole for the jack-up
Robot's origin
Installation surface
Installation dimension details
11
th ro
ug h
ho le
Ball screw shaft (J3 axis)
Ra6.3
R a6
.3
CAUTION
2-83 Outside dimensions Operating range diagram
Robot arm
2.4.6 Outside dimensions of machine cables
(1) Connection with the CR750 controller 1) Power cable
2) Signal cable
(2) Connection with the CR751 controller 1) Power cable
2) Signal cable
Approx. 82
Approx. 82
[Controller side] [Robot arm side]
Approx. 55
A p pr
ox . 7 0
Approx. 95
A p pr
ox .
2 4
Approx. 95
A p pr
o x.
7 0
Approx. 55
Note) If using an optional machine cable extension, refer to Page 102, "(1) Machine cable extension" in a diameter of the cable.
Approx. 78
A pp
ro x.
7 0
A pp
ro x.
7 0
Approx. 90
Approx. 90
A pp
ro x.
1 6
[Controller side] [Robot arm side]
Approx. 45
Approx. 78
Approx. 45
Note) If using an optional machine cable extension, refer to Page 102, "(1) Machine cable extension" in a diameter of the cable.
A pp
ro x.
88
[Controller side] [Robot arm side]
58
7 1
Approx. 15
Approx. 45 Approx. 90
A p p ro
x. 1
4 7
A p p ro
x.
1 5
Approx. 55 Approx. 23 Approx. 12
A p p ro
x. 1
6
Approx. 20
Note) If using an optional machine cable extension, refer to Page 102, "(1) Machine cable extension" in a diameter of the cable.
[Controller side] [Robot arm side]
A p p ro
x.
9
Approx. 45
7 1
52
Approx. 12
A pp
ro x.
85
Approx. 14
A p p ro
x. 4
5
Approx. 40 Approx. 40
Note) If using an optional machine cable extension, refer to Page 102, "(1) Machine cable extension" in a diameter of the cable.
Robot arm
Tooling 2-84
2.5 Tooling
2.5.1 Wiring and piping for hand Shows the wiring and piping configuration for a standard-equipped hand.
Fig.2-57 Wiring and piping for hand (Floor installation type)
Connector and pneumatic coupling
No. Name Qty. Robot side (Robot arm side) Counter side (customer-prepared)
Manufacturer Connectors, couplings Connector pins Connector Connector pins
(1) Coupling 2 UKBL6 - - - Koganei Corporation
(2) Coupling 1 or 2 Note1)
Note1) The clean specification RH-6FH series: one coupling, RH-12FH/20FH series: two couplings. The oil-mist specification is common to between the types, and is one coupling. The general-purpose environment specification is nothing.
UKBL8 - - - Koganei Corporation
(3) Connector 2 1-1717834-4 1318108-1 1-1318115-4 1318112-1 Tyco Electronics AMP
(4) Connector 2 1-1717834-3 1318108-1 1-1318115-3 1318112-1 Tyco Electronics AMP
(5) Connector 1 1-1318117-3 1318112-1 1-1318120-3 1318108-1 Tyco Electronics AMP
(6) Connector 1 2-1717834-4 1318108-1 2-1318115-4 1318112-1 Tyco Electronics AMP
(7) Connector 1 TM21P-88P - - -
View A
A
(4)Hand input signal connector (HC1, 2)
(3)Hand output signal connector (GR1, 2)
Secondary piping pneumatic hose (Option, or customer prepared) RH-6FH series: 4 hose (Max. 8 hoses) RH-12FH/20FH series: 6 hose (Max. 8 hoses)
Primary piping pneumatic hose (AIR OUT, RETURN)
Solenoid valve set (Option)
(3)Hand output signal connector (GR1, 2)
Primary piping pneumatic hose
(AIR OUT, RETURN)
(6)The signal wire only for the multifunctional hand.
(7)Ethernet cable (8 cores)
* If the LAN connector is cut and connector of customer preparation is connected, it can be use as other usages.
Pulling out wiring and piping
Wiring and piping can be passed through the inside of the shaft. It can also be pulled out externally from the rear of the No. 2 arm by using the Page 122, "(9) External Wiring/Piping box". Ethernet cables and the power supply chord for remote input/output can be pulled out from the grommet at the rear of the base section. Note) On the clean and oil mist
specifications it is necessary to seal the cable aperture closed.
(Robot arm side)
(Robot arm side)
No.2 arm
No.1 arm
Robot base
(two cores + two wires)
(5)Spare wire
(two wires)
B
(1) Primary piping pneumatic coupling (6) AIR IN, RETURN
Cable apertures of Ethernet cable and signal wire only for the multifunctional hand (Grommet)
Machine cable connector
(power supply) (AMP1, AMP2) (Inside the cover)
Machine cable connector
(for signal) (CN2) (Inside the cover)
(2)Clean specification: for suction (VACUUM)8 coupling
Oil mist specification: for pressurization (AIR PARGE)8 coupling
Machine cable connector (for
brake) (BRK) (Inside the cover)
Machine cable con- nector (for signal)
(CN2)
Machine cable con- nector (power supply)
(CN1)
Robot arm rear side: View B
2-85 Tooling
Robot arm
Fig.2-58 Wiring and piping for hand (Hanging installation type)
AWG#270.1mm28
CONBOX
(1)
()
(1)
AMP2 ()
AMP1 ()
CN2 ()
()
1 (62)
(2)
2 (44)
2 (44) ()
(1)1
(21)
1() (62)
(3)
2() (44)
2(44)
( )
( )
Connector and pneumatic coupling
No Name Qty. Robot side (Robot arm side) Counter side (customer-prepared)
Manufacturer Connectors, couplings Connector pins Connector Connector pins
(1) Coupling 4 UKBL6 Koganei Corporation
(2) Connector 2 1-1717834-3 1318108-1 1-1318115-3 1318112-1 Tyco Electronics AMP
(3) Connector 2 1-1717834-4 1318108-1 1-1318115-4 1318112-1 Tyco Electronics AMP
Wiring for power supply and signals
(1) Primary piping air coupling
Connector for spare wiring
Grommet
Spare wiring (AWG#27 (0.1mm2)8)
Hand input cable Hand output cable
Primary piping pneumatic hoses (62
(2) Hand input signal connector (Connect the optional hand input cable)
Secondary piping air coupling (4 4)
Secondary piping pneumatic hoses (44) (customer-prepared)
Connector for spare wiring
) Hand output signal connector
Secondary piping pneumatic hoses (44 Solenoid valve (optional)
installation section
Solenoid valve
(1)Primary piping air coupling
Piping/wiring cover
Spare cable inlet (grommet)
AMP2 connector (inside a cover)
AMP1 connector (inside a cover)
(1) Primary piping air coupling
Grommet
CN2 connector (inside a cover)
Spare cable inlet (grommet)
Primary piping pneumatic hoses (62) (customer-prepared)
Spare piping, electrical wiring opening Grommet (21))
Secondary piping air coupling (4 4) (Connect the optional hand hoses)
Robot arm
Tooling 2-86
2.5.2 Internal air piping (1) Floor installation type
1) Standard type/Oil mist specifications The robot has two 6 urethane hoses from the pneumatic entrance on the base section to the No.2 arm.
One hose is the primary piping for the pneumatic equipment, and the other pipe is used for air exhaust.
The pneumatic inlet in the base section has a 6 pneumatic coupling bridge.
The solenoid valve set (optional) can be installed to the side on No.2 arm.
Refer to Page 109, "(3) Solenoid valve set" for details on the electronic valve set (optional).
Protection performance can be improved by pressurizing the inside of the robot arm. Since the joint (AIR PURGE) of 8 is prepared at the rear of the base section, please supply the dry air for pressurization from this joint. Refer to Page 38, "2.2.8 Protection specifications" for the details of dry air.
2) Clean type The primary piping is the same piping as the standard type.
With the clean specification, a 8 coupling is provided in the base section for suction inside the machine. For use, connect it to the suction port of the vacuum pump or the coupling on the "VACUUM" side of the vacuum generating valve. Moreover, to clean the exhaust from the vacuum pump or vacuum generator, use the exhaust filter (prepared by the customer).
Refer to Page 40, "2.2.9 Clean specifications" for details of the vacuum for suction.
Supply clean air to the vacuum generator.
(2) Hanging installation type 1) Standard type/Waterproof type
The robot has two 6 urethane hoses from the pneumatic entrance on the base section to the No.2 arm. One hose is the primary piping for the pneumatic equipment, and the other pipe is used for air exhaust.
The pneumatic inlet in the base section has a 6 pneumatic coupling bridge.
The solenoid valve set (optional) can be installed to the side on No.2 arm.
Refer to Page 109, "(3) Solenoid valve set" for details on the electronic valve set (optional).
The four air hoses (4) are piped as the secondary from the No.2 arm back end to near the shaft.
2) Clean type The primary piping is the same piping as the standard type.
With the clean specification, a 8 coupling is provided in the base section for suction inside the machine. For use, connect it to the suction port of the vacuum pump or the coupling on the "VACUUM" side of the vacuum generating valve. Moreover, to clean the exhaust from the vacuum pump or vacuum generator, use the exhaust filter (prepared by the customer).
Refer to Page 40, "2.2.9 Clean specifications" for details of the vacuum for suction.
Supply clean air to the vacuum generator.
2.5.3 Internal wiring for the hand output cable (1) Floor installation type
1) The hand output primary cable extends from the connector PCB of the base section to the back side of the
No.2 arm. (AWG#24(0.2mm2): 10 cables) The cable terminals have connector bridges for eight hand out- puts.The connector names are GR1 and GR2. To pull the wiring out of the arm, following separate options are required.
Hand output cable ....................................1F-GR60S-01
External wiring and piping box .............1F-UT-BOX (RH-6FH series) 1F-UT-BOX-01 (RH-12FH/20FH series)
(2) Hanging installation type 1) The hand output primary cable extends from the connector of the base section to the back side of the No.2
arm. (AWG#24(0.2mm2)) The cable terminals have connector bridges for eight hand outputs.The connector names are GR1 and GR2. The separate cable (optional "hand output cable 1S-GR35S-02") is necessary, to extend the cable to outside of the arm.
2-87 Tooling
Robot arm
2.5.4 Internal wiring for the hand input cable (1) Floor installation type
1) The hand input cable extends from the connector PCB of the base section to the No.2 arm.
(AWG#24(0.2mm2): 10 cables) The cable terminals have connector bridges for eight hand inputs. The con- nector names are HC1 and HC2.
2) The hand check signal of the pneumatic hand is input by connecting this connector. To extend the wiring to the outside of the arm, following separate options are required.
Hand input cable........................................1F-HC35C-01 (RH-6FH series) 1F-HC35C-02 (RH-12FH/20FH series)
External wiring and piping box .............1F-UT-BOX (RH-6FH series) 1F-UT-BOX-01 (RH-12FH/20FH series)
(2) Hanging installation type 1) The hand input cable extends from the connector PCB of the base section to the No.2 arm.
(AWG#24(0.2mm2)) The cable terminals have connector bridges for four hand inputs. The connector names are HC1 and HC2.
2) The hand check signal of the pneumatic hand is input by connecting this connector.
2.5.5 Ethernet cable (For RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series) Ethernet cables are installed from the RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series robots base section up to the No. 2 arm
section, and can be used. Similar to on our previous models, these cables can also be used for backup wiring. For further details please refer to the separate Instruction Manual/Robot Arm Setup.
Example of use for backup wiring.
When connecting previously used tools to the robot
Folding back the hand output cable when attaching the electromagnetic valve to the robots exterior.
When attaching 8 devices or more to the hand section such as sensors, (8 input and 8 output dedicated points are available for hand signals.). In this case connect the signals (of the sensors, etc.) to parallel input/output signals.
When shipped from the factory, both ends are LAN connectors.
When using it as backup wiring, cut the LAN connectors off and use with user supplied connectors.
When using it as backup wiring for data communication, the shield wire must be grounded. If the shield wire is not grounded, it may cause a communication abnormality by noise superposed on the cable.
Table 2-13 Ethernet cable specification
Item Specification
Communication speed 100BASE-TX
Size AWG #26 (0.13mm2) x four pair (total eight cores)
Externality of insulator Approx. 0.98 mm
Robot arm
Tooling 2-88
2.5.6 Spare Wiring (For FH-3FHR series)
As spare wiring, four pairs of cab tire cables (AWG#27(0.1mm2), total is eight cores both) are preinstalled between the base section and the No.2 arm rear section in the RH-3FHR series robot. Customer can utilize it. Refer to the separate "Instruction Manual/ROBOT ARM SETUP & MAINTENANCE" for details.
Both ends of the wire terminals are unprocessed. Use them under the following circumstances:
For folding as the hand output cable when installing the solenoid valve in outside the robot. For when installing six or more hand I/O points for the sensor in the hand section
(Connects to the parallel I/O general purpose input.) Reference) Pin assignment of the connector, and the matching connector
Pin assignment
Pin Color
A1 Red
A2 Brown
A3 Green
A4 Black
B1 Orange
B2 White
B3 Yellow
B4 Blue
Robot side connector
Connection place Connector Contactor Maker
Base portion 2-1318115-4 - Tyco Electronics AMP K.K.
Fore arm portion 2-1717834-4 -
Other party connector (recommendation)
Connection place Connector Contactor Maker
Base portion 2-1717834-4 1318108-1 Tyco Electronics AMP K.K.
Fore arm portion 2-1318115-4 1318112-1
2-89 Tooling
Robot arm
2.5.7 About the Installation of Tooling Wiring and Piping (Examples of Wiring and Piping) The customer is required to provide tooling wiring, piping and metal fixtures. Screw holes are provided on the robot arm for the installation of tooling wiring, piping and metal fixtures. (Refer to the Fig. 2-59 to Fig. 2-61.) The length of wiring and piping and the installation position on the robot must be adjusted according to the work to be done by the robot. Please use the following example as reference.
A hand input cable and a hand curl cable are available as optional accessories for your convenience. After performing wiring and piping to the robot, operate the robot at low speed to make sure that each part does not interfere with the robot arm and the peripheral devices. Confirm that there is no interference also with bellows of the shaft section by clean specification and oil mist specification.
Please be aware that dust may be generated from friction if wires and pipes come into contact with the robot arm when using it according to the clean specifications.
If you install metal fixtures and a solenoid valve using the screw holes on the No.2 arm portion, add the mass of the metal fixtures and the solenoid valve to mass of a hand then set the HNDDAT parameter. Moreover, Fix the parts, such as a solenoid valve, firmly to prevent the parts getting shaky during operation of a robot.
(1) RH-6FH series
Fig.2-59 Location of screw holes for fixing wiring/piping (RH-6FH)
164 102
2-M46 () 10
2-M48 ()
2-M48 ()
25
55
B
2-M48
20
B A
11
11 0
4- M5
11
A
2-M4, depth 8
2-M4, depth 8
View B
(Usable on opposite side too.)
2-M4, depth 6
2-M4, depth 8 (Usable on opposite side too.)
View
4- M5 s
cre w, d
ep th
11
(Usable on opposite side too.)
Robot arm
Tooling 2-90
(2) RH-12FH/20FH series
Fig.2-60 Location of screw holes for fixing wiring/piping (RH-12FH/20FH)
B
A
RH-12FH55xx RH-12FH70xx
RH-12FH/20FH85xx
RH-20FH100xx
2-M4, depth 8 2-M4, depth 8 (Usable on opposite side too.)
2-M4, depth 8 (Usable on opposite side too)
View B
View A
2-M4, depth 8 (Usable on opposite side too)
4-M5 screw, depth 15 4-M5 screw, depth 15
2-91 Tooling
Robot arm
(3) RH-3FHR series
Fig.2-61 Location of screw holes for fixing wiring/piping (RH-3FHR series)
Example which installed the solenoid valve
M5 nut for T slot (Four attachments)
2-M5 x 8 screw
Note)
Note) T slot The T slot is on the side of the No.2 arm. (Two of right and left) Utilize the M5 screw and T slot for fixing the hose or wire. Refer to "Page 76, "Fig.2-50 Outside dimensions, Operating range diagram of RH-3FHR series (Standard specification)"or Page 77, "Fig.2-51 Outside dimen- sions, Operating range diagram of RH-3FHR series (Clean/Water- proof specification)" for detail of T slot. The Clean/Waterproof robot are supplied with the packing. After fixation of wirings and pipings, stuff the packing into the T slot.
10
Robot arm
Tooling 2-92
(4) Example of wiring and piping <1> By feeding wiring and piping through the inside of the shaft, the wiring and piping to the hand becomes compact.
Fig.2-62 Example of wiring and piping <1> (RH-6FH series)
Fig.2-63 Example of wiring and piping <1> (RH-12FH/20FH series)
2-M5M6
M5
23
60
()
1(AIR OUTRETURN)(2)
(GR1GR2)()
(GR1GR2)(2)
()
2 () (48(82)) ()
Solenoid valve set (Option)
Cable fixed plate for Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand (Option)
Secondary piping air hose, etc Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand (Option)
(Hand tube: 4 x 8 hoses, Hand input cable (For signal: 8 cable, For power: 2 cable)) or Hand tube (Customer prepared)
Primary piping air hose (AIR OUT, RETURN)
Inside the No.2 arm
Hand output signal connector ( 1, GR2)
(Solenoid valve (option) side)
Hand output signal connector (GR1, GR2)
(Inside the No.2 arm)
Example of the customer preparation tool
Two set screws M5-M6
Slot set screw M5
Example of a flange
2
12
1
2-M4M5
M4
30 20
23
40
50
20
RH-6SDH
2-M5M6
M5
23
60
RH-12SDH/18SDH/20SDH
2-M5M6
M5
23
60
()
1(AIR OUTRETURN)(2)
(GR1GR2)()
(GR1GR2)(2)
()
2 () (48(82)) ()
Solenoid valve set (Option)
Cable fixed plate for Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand (Option)
Secondary piping air hose, etc Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand (Option)
(Hand tube: 6 x 4 hoses, Hand input cable (For signal: 8 cable, For power: 2 cable)) or
Hand tube (Customer prepared)
Primary piping air hose (AIR OUT, RETURN)
Inside the No.2 arm
Hand output signal connector ( 1, GR2)
(Solenoid valve (option) side)
Hand output signal connector (GR1, GR2)
(Inside the No.2 arm)
Example of the customer preparation tool
Example of a flange
Slot set screw M5
Two set screws M5-M6
Slot set screw M5
Example of a flange
2-93 Tooling
Robot arm
Fig.2-64 Example of wiring and piping <1> (Hanging installation type)
(5) Wiring and piping example <2>
Notes in wiring 1. The air hose which can be passed in the shaft is four 4 hoses maximum. (Customer preparations) 2. Wire the cable and piping the tube without interference with ball screw and cover. 3. Because to prevent the bend of the air tube, secure the minimum radius with which tube can be bent. 4. When using an optional solenoid valve, add the mass of solenoid valve to mass of hand and set to parameter: HNDDAT.
(RH-3FHR series only) 5. The hand tube (four 3 tubes) and the hand input cable (4 point) are prepared optional.
Please confirm that there is no rubbing or crack etc per six months.
Hand tube (4 x 4: customer preparation) or Hand tube (i3 x 4: optional) and the hand input cable (optional)
Example) How to pass the phi 4 air hose into the shaft
*1) Adjustment of the fixing position In the condition that the J3 axis is upper limit and the J4 axis is 0 degree, align the top of air tube with the upper end of the Piping fixing bracket.
*1)
Clamp position (cutting two places) Fixing by cable tie
Hand input cable
Air tube Union (4 to 3) Attachment
Clamp position Fixing by cable tie etc.
Hand input cable
Example of the customer preparation tool
Hand tube (6 x 2: customer preparation)
Hand tube (4 x 4: customer preparation) *Use, when letting the tube pass in the shaft.
Robot arm
Tooling 2-94
This is an effective method in cases where the wiring and piping is often changed, or when the hand rotation is minimal (within 90), etc.
Fig.2-65 Example of wiring and piping <2>
(6) Precautions for the oil mist/clean specification The through hole of the top part of the tip shaft are taped at shipment.
Perform the following actions as necessary in order to ensure that the robot keeps sufficiently protective performance during the operation:
1) When the through hole of the shaft is not used Keep the top part of the tip shaft taped while the robot is in use.
2) When the through hole of the shaft is used for wiring. Remove the rubber cap on top of the tip shaft and perform the necessary wiring. Once the wiring is com-
pleted, seal the bottom part of the tip shaft using liquid seal in order to avoid accumulation of dust and to protect from oil mist
Perform the wiring in such a way that the wires around the area below the tip shaft will not get into contact with other parts while the robot is operating.
()
()
() ()
()
() ()
Example of the customer preparation tool
Fixing plate (Customer preparation) Wiring/Piping (Customer preparation) or Hand input cable (Option)
External Wiring/Piping box (Option)
Wiring/Piping (Customer preparation) or Hand curl tube (Option)
Metal fittings (customer preparation)
Note) Although the illustration is the RH-6FH series robot, RH- 12/20FH series robot also have the screw holes for fixation of the wiring/piping. (Refer to Fig. 2-60.)
2-95 Tooling
Robot arm
2.5.8 Wiring and piping system diagram for hand Shows the wiring and piping configuration for a standard-equipped hand.
Fig.2-66 Wiring and piping system diagram for hand and example the solenoid valve installation (RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series)
A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4
<+24V> <>
A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3
<+24V(COM)>
A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4
<+24V(COM)>
GR2
GR1
HC1
<> <24G>
A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3
HC2
<> <>
6
1
6
6
6
AIR IN
RETURN ()
2
8
A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GR1
GR2
HC1
HC2
RIO/ ADD
LAN LAN
ADD
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
* Refer to Fig. 2-68 for air
supply circuit example.
*1)
*1) Using the External Wiring/Piping box, the hand output/input signal cable and the air hose can be pulled out externally.
(This option comes equipped with two 6 joints for primary piping, eight 4 joints for secondary piping (RH-6FH series) or two 6 joints
for primary piping, eight 6 joints for secondary piping (RH-12FH/20FH series), and holes for pulling out the cables.)
*2) Using the Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand, the hand input signal cable and air hose can be fed through the inside of the shaft.
(This option comes as a set that includes 4 x 8 (RH-6FH series) or 6 x 4 (RH-12FH/20FH series) air hoses, hand input cables (8 x signal
lines, 2 x power chords), and fixing tools.
*1), *2)
Hand output signal
Connect to the optional solenoid
valve set directly
or
Connect with customer's tool
drive equipment (solenoid valve,
etc), by the optional hand output
cable.
Hand input signal
Connect with customer's tool
drive equipment (hand, etc), by
the optional hand input cable.
Piping
Connect with customer's hand,
etc.
*1), *2)
Hand signal output connector (GR1)
Hand signal output connector (GR2)
Hand signal input connector (HC1)
Hand signal input connector (HC2)
Solenoid
valve set (Option)
No.2 arm Base
6 quick coupling 6 quick coupling
8 quick coupling
Primary piping pneumatic hose 6 hose
6 hose
Reserved>
Reserved>
White
White Black White Black
Black
White Black White Black
White Black White Black White Black
White Black White Black White Black
R o bo
t ar
m w
ir in
g re
la y
bo ar
d
C o n tr
o lle
r
Power line> Power line>
Ethernet cable AWG#24(0.2mm2)x8 (Both ends are LAN connectors) (Cab tire cables with the shield)
Spare line> Spare line>
VACCUM :clean specification AIR PURGE:oil-mist specification Note) Only Clean/Oil mist specification. clean specification
RH-6FH series : one coupling RH-12FH/20FH series : two couplings
oil-mist specification is common to between the types, and is one coupling.
White Black
White Black White Black
Brown White/ Brown Green White/Blue Blue White/Green Orange White/Orange
Robot arm
Tooling 2-96
Fig.2-67 Wiring and piping system diagram for hand and example the solenoid valve installation (RH-3FHR series)
White
Black
White
Black
White
Black
White
Black
White
Black
White
Black
White
Black
White
Black
White
Black
White
Black
White
Black
White
Black
Hand output cable
(option)
Secondary pneumatic hose piping (customer-prepared)
Hand output cable attached to the solenoid set
Hand input cable
(option)
quick coupling (1 to 8)
AIR IN
RETURN
A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3
<+24V>
A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4
<+24V(COM)>
<+24V(COM)>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3
A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4
Solenoid set (option) valve mounting section 6 quick coupling 6 quick coupling
6 hose
6 hose
Primary piping pneumatic hoses
Driving devices, such as solenoid and hand, provided by the customer
Hand prepared by customer
BaseNo.2 arm
Hand signal input connector (HC1 connector) 1-1717834-3 (Tyco Electronics AMP)
1-1318115-3 (Tyco Electronics AMP)
Hand signal output connection connector
1-1318115-4 (Tyco Electronics AMP)
Hand signal input connection connector
Hand signal input connector (HC2 connector)
1-1717834-4 (Tyco Electronics AMP)
Hand signal output connector (GR1 connector)
Hand signal output connector (GR2 connector)
Spare wiring AWG#27(0.1mm2)8 (cab tire cables with the shield)
VACCUM or AIR PARGE 8
Yellow
White
Red
Blue
Orange Green Black
Brown
R o bo
t ar
m w
ir in
g re
la y
b o ar
d
R o bo
t co
nt ro
lle r
*Refer to Fig. 2-68 for Air supply circuit example.
RH-3FHR series: 4hose
RH-3FHR series: 4 hose
2-97 Tooling
Robot arm
2.5.9 Electrical specifications of hand input/output
Table 2-14 Electrical specifications of input circuit
Table 2-15 Electrical specifications of output circuit
Item Specifications Internal circuit
Type DC input
* HCn HC1 to HC8
No. of input points 8
Insulation method Photo-coupler insulation
Rated input voltage 24VDC
Rated input current approx. 7mA
Working voltage range DC10.2 to 26.4V (ripple rate within 5%)
ON voltage/ON current 8VDC or more/2mA or more
OFF voltage/OFF current 4VDC or less/1mA or less
Input resistance Approx. 3.3k
Response time
OFF-ON 10ms or less (DC24V)
ON-OFF 10ms or less (DC24V)
Item Specification Internal circuit
Type Transistor output
* GRn GR1 to GR8
No. of output points 8
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated load voltage DC24V
Rated load voltage range DC21.6 to 26.4VDC
Max. current load 0.1A/ 1 point (100%)
Current leak with power OFF 0.1mA or less
Maximum voltage drop with power ON DC0.9V(TYP.)
Response time OFF-ON 2ms or less (hardware response time)
ON-OFF 2ms or less (resistance load) (hardware response time)
Protects Protects the over-current (0.9A)
3.3K
+24V
24G
820 HCn*
+24V
3.3K
820
24G
+24V
HCn*
+24V
+24V(COM)
*GRn
24G
Protection of over-current
(Initial power supply)
* GRn
+24V
24G
Protection of over-current
2 Robot arm
2-98
2.5.10 Air supply circuit example for the hand An example of pneumatic supply circuitry for the hand is shown below.
(1) Make sure that a surge voltage protection circuit such as a diode is connected to the solenoid coil in parallel. (2) When the factory pneumatic pressure drops, as a result of the hand clamp strength weakening, there can be
damage to the work. To prevent it, install a pressure switch to the source of the air as shown in Fig. 2-68 and use the circuit described so that the robot stops when pressure drops. Use a hand with a spring-pressure clamp, or a mechanical lock-type hand, that can be used in cases where the pressure switch becomes dam- aged.
(3) The optional hand and solenoid valve are of an oilless type. If they are used, don't use any lubricator. (4) Supply clean air to the vacuum generation valve when you use clean type robot. (5) If the air supply temperature (primary piping) used for the tool etc. is lower than ambient air temperature, the
dew condensation may occur on the coupling or the hose surface.
Fig.2-68 Air supply circuit example for the hand
() 0.7MPa
AIR IN (0.5MPa%)
Pneumatic source (Clean) 0.7MPa less Filter Regulator
Pressure switch
To the AIR IN (Robot arm) (0.5 10 )
2-99 Shipping special specifications, options, and maintenance parts
Robot arm
2.6 Shipping special specifications, options, and maintenance parts
2.6.1 Shipping special specifications
What are sipping special specifications? Shipping special specifications are changed before shipping from the factory. Consequently, it is necessary to confirm the delivery date by the customer.
To make changes to the specifications after shipment, service work must be performed at the work site or the robot must be returned for service.
How to order (1) Confirm beforehand when the factory special specifications can be shipped, because they may not be
immediately available. (2) Specify, before shipping from our company. (3) Specified method Specify the part name, model, and robot model type.
Robot arm
Shipping special specifications, options, and maintenance parts 2-100
(1) Machine cable
Order type Fixed type .........CR750 controller: 1S-02UCBL-01 (2m) CR751 controller: 1F-02UCBL-02 (2m)
Outline
This cable is exchanged for the machine cable (5 m for fixed type) that was supplied as standard to shorten the distance between the controller and the robot arm.
Configuration Table 2-16 Configuration equipment and types
[Caution] Orders made after purchasing a robot are treated as purchases of optional equipment. In this case, the machine cable (5 m for fixed type) that was supplied as standard is not reclaimed.
Part name Type Qty. Mass (Kg) Note1)
Note1) Mass indicates one set.
Remarks Note2)
Note2) Standard 5 m (for fixed type) is not attached.
CR750 controller
Fixed Set of signal and power cables 1S-02UCBL-01 1 set 3.4 2m
Motor signal cable (1 cable) -
Motor power cable (1 cable) -
RCR751 controller
Fixed Set of signal and power cables 1F-02UCBL-02 1 set 2.6 2m
Motor signal cable (1 cable) -
Motor power cable (1 cable) -
2-101 Options
Robot arm
2.7 Options
What are options? There are a variety of options for the robot designed to make the setting up process easier for customer needs.
customer installation is required for the options. Options come in two types: "set options" and "single options".
1. Set options .......................................A combination of single options and parts that together, from a set for serving some purpose.
2. Single options ..................................That are configured from the fewest number of required units of a part. Please choose customer's purpose additionally.
Robot arm
Options 2-102
(1) Machine cable extension
Order type: CR750 controller .........Fixed type: 1S- CBL-01 (extension type) Flexed type: 1S- LCBL-01 (extension type)
Flexed type: 1S- LUCBL-01 (direct type)
CR751 controller .........Fixed type: 1F- UCBL-02 (direct type)
Flexed type: 1F- LUCBL-02 (direct type)
Note) refer the length.
Outline
The distance between the robot controller and the robot arm is extensible by this option.
A fixed type and flexible type are available.
The fix and flexible types are both configured of the motor signal cable and motor power cable.
The extended method is discriminated as follows.
Direct type ............ Exchanges with the machine cable attached in the standards.
Extension type..... Adds to the machine cable attached in the standards.
Configuration Table 2-17 Configuration equipment and types
Part name Type Note1)
Note1) The numbers in the boxes refer the length.
Qty. Mass (kg) Note2)
Note2) Mass indicates one set.
Remarks Fixed Flexed
CR750 controller
Fixed Set of signal and power cables 1S- CBL-01 1 set - 6.7(5m)
12(10m)
17(15m)
5m, 10m or 15m each
Extension typeMotor signal cable (1 cable) -
Motor power cable (1 cable) -
Flexed Set of signal and power cables 1S- LCBL-01 - 1 set 7(5m)
13(10m)
17(15m)
5m, 10m or 15m each
Extension typeMotor signal cable - (1 cable)
Motor power cable - (1 cable)
Flexed Set of signal and power cables 1S- LUCBL-01 - 1 set 7(5m)
13(10m)
17(15m)
5m, 10m or 15m each
Direct typeMotor signal cable - (1 cable)
Motor power cable - (1 cable)
Nylon clamp NK-14N - 2 pcs. - for motor signal cable
Nylon clamp NK-18N - 2 pcs. - for motor power cable
Silicon rubber - 4 pcs -
CR751 controller
Fixed Set of signal and power cables 1F- UCBL-02 1 set - 6.7(10m)
12(15m)
17(20m)
10m, 15m or 20m each
Direct typeMotor signal cable (1 cable) -
Motor power cable (1 cable) -
Flexed Set of signal and power cables 1F- LUCBL-02 - 1 set 7(10m)
13(15m)
17(20m)
10m, 15m or 20m each
Direct typeMotor signal cable - (1 cable)
Motor power cable - (1 cable)
Nylon clamp NK-14N - 2 pcs. - for motor signal cable
Nylon clamp NK-18N - 2 pcs. - for motor power cable
Silicon rubber - 4 pcs -
2-103 Options
Robot arm
Specifications The specifications for the fixed type cables are the same as those for standard cables.
Shows usage conditions for flexed type cables in Table 2-18.
Table 2-18 Conditions for the flexed type cables
[Caution] The guidance of life count may greatly differ according to the usage state items related to Table 2-18 and to the amount of silicon grease applied in the cableveyor. Recommendation grease: G-501 (Supplier: Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)
[Caution] This option can be installed on clean-type, but its cleanliness is not under warranty. [Caution] When a cableveyor is used, partitions are required to avoid overlapping or riding up of the cables. Also,
adjust the cable length to eliminate tension or excessive looseness, and fix it securely.
Cable configuration The configuration of the flexible cable is shown in Table 2-19. Refer to this table when selecting the cableveyor.
The configuration is the same between the length difference in the cable, and extension type / direct type.
Table 2-19 Cable configuration (Flexed type)
Item Specifications
Cable 1S- LCBL-01
1S- LUCBL-01
1F- LUCBL-02
Minimum flexed radius 100mm or more
Cableveyor, etc., occupation rate 50% or less
Maximum movement speed 2,000mm/s or less
Guidance of life count 7.5 million times (With silicone grease coating)
Environmental proof IP54 IP54 (except for the area approximately
500 mm from the end of the connector on
the controller side)
Cable configuration Motor signal cable 6 x 5, 8.5 x 1, and 1.7 x 1 6 x 7 and 1.7 x 1
Motor power cable 8.9 x 2 and 6.5 x 8 6.5 x 8 and 8.9 x 2
Item Motor signal cable Motor power cable
CR750 controller
No. of cores AWG#24
(0.2mm2)-4P
AWG#24
(0.2mm2)-7P
AWG#18
(0.75mm2)
AWG#16
(1.25mm2)-4C
AWG#18
(0.75mm2)-4C
Finish dimensions Approx. 6mm Approx. 8.5mm Approx. 1.7mm Approx. 8.9mm Approx. 6.5mm
No.of cables used 5 cables 1 cable 1 cable 3 cable 6 cable
No. in total 7 cables 9 cables
CR751 controller
No. of cores AWG#24
(0.2mm2)-4P
AWG#18
(0.75mm2)
AWG#16
(1.25mm2)-4C
AWG#18
(0.75mm2)-3C
Finish dimensions Approx. 6mm Approx. 1.7mm Approx. 8.9mm Approx. 6.5mm
No.of cables used 7 cables 1 cable 2 cable 8 cable
No. in total 8 cables 10 cables
Robot arm
Options 2-104
Fixing the flexible cable
Fig.2-69 Fixing the flexible cable (CR750 controller with RH-6/12/20FH series robot)
200
250
CN1
CN2
CN1
CN2
5m
NK-14N
NK-18N
NK-18N
NK-14N 300400mm
300400mm
Controller
Nylon clamp
Silicon rubber
Robot arm
Cover the extension terminal area with the cover etc. so that it may not be easily touched to the latch lever.
CAUTION
Nylon clamp
Nylon clamp
Nylon clamp
Nylon clamp
Extended flexible cable (Option)
The fixed cable (Standard attachment)
Extension section
Motor power cable Motor signal cable
(1) Connect the connector to the robot arm. The connection method to a robot arm is the same as a standard machine cable. Please refer to the sepa- rate "Instruction Manual/ROBOT ARM SETUP & MAINTENANCE" and connect.
(2) Wind the silicon rubber around the cable at a position 300 to 400 mm from the side of robot arm and exten- sion section as shown below, and fix with the nylon clamp to protect the cable from external stress.
min.
The bend size of cables are as follows.
240
290
min.
*1) The connection space for a machine cable.*1) *1)
2-105 Options
Robot arm
Fig.2-70 Fixing the flexible cable (CR750 controller with RH-3FHR series robot)
CN1 CN2
CN1
CN2
CN1 CN2
CN1
CN2
5m
()
NK-18N
300400mm
NK-14N
300400mm
230
300
Note1) When direct type, exchanges with the standard cable and connect directly.
Controller
Nylon clamp
Silicon rubber
Robot arm (Rear side of the base section)
Cover the extension terminal area with the cover etc. so that it may not be easily touched to the latch lever.
CAUTION
Nylon clamp
Nylon clamp
The fixed cable (Standard attachment)
Motor power cable
Motor signal cable
Extended flexible cable (Option)
Extension section Note1)
Latch
Latch Latch
The cable should bend and the size should be 230mm or more. And a connection space for a machine cable needs 300mm or more.
Motor power
Motor signal
Motor power Motor signal
min.
Robot arm
Options 2-106
Fig.2-71 Fixing the flexible cable (CR751 controller with RH-6/12/20FH series robot)
CN2
NK-14N
NK-18N
NK-18N
NK-14N
300500mm
300 500mm
AMP1AMP2
BRK
CN2
CN1
(CN2)(CN1)
AMP1 AMP2 BRK
( 2)
( 2)
Motor signal cable
Motor power cable
Nylon clamp
Robot arm
Nylon clamp
Silicon rubber
Nylon clamp
Nylon clamp
Robot controller
300 to 500
300 to 500m
Controller connector face
Motor power (CN1) Motor signal (CN2)
*1)
Two fixing screws
Two fixing screws
(1) Connect the connector to the robot arm. The connection method to a robot arm is the same as a standard machine cable. Please refer to the sep- arate "Instruction Manual/ROBOT ARM SETUP & MAINTENANCE" and connect.
(2) For protection of wires from external stress, refer to following. Wrap the cable with the supplied silicon rubber and fix the cable with nylon clamps in the area between the heat shrink tubes on the robot and the controller sides (flexible cable area).
Heat shrink tube
Heat shrink tube
Nylon clamp
*1) Connect the robot arm side connector to the connector which is inside the CONBOX cover. *2) The flexible cable area is the area between the heat shrink tubes on the robot and the controller sides.
*2)
*2)
200
250
min.
The bend size of cables are as follows.
240
290 *1) The connection space for a machine cable.*1) *1)
min.
2-107 Options
Robot arm
Fig.2-72 Fixing the flexible cable (CR751 controller with RH-3FHR series robot)
CN1
CN2
CN2
CN1 ( 2)
(CN2)(CN1)
AMP1 AMP2 BRK
NK-18N
300 500mm
NK-14N
( 2)
NK-18N
NK-14N
300500mm
ControllerNylon clamp
Silicon rubber
Robot arm (Rear side of the base section)
Nylon clamp Motor power cable
Motor signal cable
*1) Motor power (CN1) Motor signalMotor power
Motor signal
(CN2)
Nylon clamp
Heat shrink tube
300 to 500mm
Nylon clamp Nylon clamp
Two fixing screws
Heat shrink tube Two fixing screws
Controller connector face
*1) Connect the robot arm side connector to the connector which is inside the CONBOX cover.
*2) The flexible cable area is the area between the heat shrink tubes on the robot and the controller sides.
*2)
*2)
3 0 to 500mm
127
250
The cable should bend and the size should be 127mm or more. And a connection space for a machine cable needs 250mm or more.
min.
Robot arm
Options 2-108
(2) Stopper for changing the operating range
Order type: RH-6FH series ............................J1 axis: 1F-DH-01 RH-12FH/20FH series ............J1 axis: 1F-DH-02
RH-3FHR series.........................J1 axis: 1S-DH-05J1
J2 axis: 1S-DH-05J2
Outline
The operating range axis is limited by the robot arm's mechanical stopper and the controller parameters.
You can change the operating range of the RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series robot's J1 axis. And the RH-3FHR series robot, you can change the operating range of J1 and J2 axis.
If the axis could interfere with the peripheral devices, etc., and the operating range need to be limited, use this.
Configuration Table 2-20 Configuration devices
Specifications Table 2-21 Specifications
(1) The changeable angle shown in Table 2-21 indicates the operation range by the software. The limit by the mechanical stopper is positioned 3 degrees outward from that angle, so take care when designing the layout.
(2) The operating range is changed with robot arm settings (insertion of the pin) and parameter settings. Refer to the separate "Instruction Manual/ROBOT ARM SETUP & MAINTENANCE" and "Instruction Manual/ Detailed Explanation of Functions and Operations" for details.
(3) If the arm collides with mechanical stopper for operating range change at the automatic operation, replace- ment of the mechanical stopper is necessary.
Part name Type Qty. Mass(kg) Remarks
RH-6FH series
Stopper for changing the operat- ing range
1F-DH-01 1 set 0.05 hexagon socket head bolt (M10 x 20): 2 bolts
RH-12FH/20FH series
Stopper for changing the operat- ing range
1F-DH-02 1 set 0.05 hexagon socket head bolt (M12 x 20): 2 bolts
RH-3FHR series
Stopper for changing the operat- ing range
1S-DH-05J1 1 set 0.1 Pin (10 x 2)
Installation bolt (M4 x 12): two attachments
1S-DH-05J2 1 set 0.1 Pin (8 x 2)
Installation bolt (M4 x 12): two attachments
Axis Standard Changeable angle
RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series
J1 +/- side +/- 170 deg +/- 130 deg, +/- 150 deg
RH-3FHR series Note1)
Note1) Although the J1 axis and the J2 axis can be changed independently (independent per axis), each axis changes plus side /minus side both simultaneously per axis.
J1 +/- side +/- 225 deg +/- 90 deg
J2 +/- side +/- 225 deg +/- 60 deg
RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series
RH-3FHR series
2-109 Options
Robot arm
(3) Solenoid valve set
Order type: RH-6FH series ............................One set: 1F-VD01-01(Sink type)/1F-VD01E-01(Source type) Two sets: 1F-VD02-01(Sink type)/1F-VD02E-01(Source type)
Three sets: 1F-VD03-01(Sink type)/1F-VD03E-01(Source type)
Four sets: 1F-VD04-01(Sink type)/1F-VD04E-01(Source type)
RH-12FH/20FH series.............One set: 1S-VD01-01(Sink type)/1S-VD01E-01(Source type)
Two sets: 1S-VD02-01(Sink type)/1S-VD02E-01(Source type)
Three sets: 1S-VD03-01(Sink type)/1S-VD03E-01(Source type)
Four sets: 1S-VD04-01(Sink type)/1S-VD04E-01(Source type)
RH-3FHR series (Four sets) ... Standard specification: ....................... 1S-VD04-05(Sink type)
1S-VD04E-05(Source type)
Clean/Waterproof specification: ..... 1S-VD04W-05(Sink type)
1S-VD04WE-05(Source type)
Outline
The solenoid valve set is an option that is used for controlling toolings when various toolings, such as the hand, are installed at the end of the arm. Also, for easy installation of this electromaagnetic set onto the robot, it comes equipped with a manifold, couplings, connectors, among other things.
Configuration Table 2-22 Configuration equipment
Part name Type Q'ty Mass(kg)
Note1) Remark
RH-6FH series
Solenoid valve set (1 sets) 1F-VD01-01/
1F-VD01E-01
Either
one pc.
1.0
Hand output cable is already connected.
Refer to Page 117, "(5) Hand output cable".
M4 x 30 Two screws (Installation screws)
1F-VD0*-01: Sink type 1F-VD0*E-01: Source type.
Solenoid valve set (2 sets) 1F-VD02-01/
1F-VD02E-01
Either
one pc.
1.0
Solenoid valve set (3 sets) 1F-VD03-01/
1F-VD03E-01
Either
one pc.
1.0
Solenoid valve set (4 sets) 1F-VD04-01/
1F-VD04E-01
Either
one pc.
1.0
RH-12FH/20FH series
Solenoid valve set (1 sets) 1S-VD01-01/
1S-VD01E-01
Either
one pc.
1.0
Hand output cable is already connected.
Refer to Page 117, "(5) Hand output cable".
M4 x 8 Two screws (Installation screws)
1S-VD0*-01: Sink type 1S-VD0*E-01: Source type.
Solenoid valve set (2 sets) 1S-VD02-01/
1S-VD02E-01
Either
one pc.
1.0
Solenoid valve set (3 sets) 1S-VD03-01/
1S-VD03E-01
Either
one pc.
1.0
Solenoid valve set (4 sets) 1S-VD04-01/
1S-VD04E-01
Either
one pc.
1.0
1F-VD0*-01 1F-VD0*E-01
1S-VD0*-01 1S-VD0*E-01
1S-VD04-05 1S-VD04E-05
1S-VD04W-05 1S-VD04WE-05
Robot arm
Options 2-110
Specifications Table 2-23 Valve specifications
Table 2-24 Solenoid specifications
RH-3FHR series
Solenoid valve set (4 sets)
For Standard specification
1S-VD04-05/
1S-VD04E-05
Either
one pc.
0.6 For Standard specification
M5 x 8 Two screws (Installation screws)
Fixing nut for T slot : Two nuts
1S-VD04-05: Sink type
1S-VD04E-05: Source type
Solenoid valve set (4 sets)
For Clean/Waterproof spec- ification
1S-VD04W-05/
1S-VD04WE-05
Either
one pc.
0.6 For Clean/Waterproof specification
M5 x 8 Two screws (Installation screws)
Fixing nut for T slot : Two nuts
1S-VD04W-05: Sink type
1S-VD04WE-05: Source type
Note1) Mass indicates one set.
Item Specifications
Solenoid valve set type 1F-VD0*-01, 1F-VD0*E-01
1S-VD04-05, 1S-VD04E-05
1S-VD04W-05, 1S-VD04WE-05
1S-VD0*-01, 1S-VD0*E-01
Number of positions 2
Port 5 Note1)
Note1) Couplings of unused solenoid valves must be blocked with plugs. If they are not blocked, supplied air will blow out from the couplings, lowering the air pressure of the solenoid valves being used and making them nonfunctional.
Recommended plugs: KQ2P-04 plug (RH-6FH series, RH-3FHR series) made by SMC KQ2P-06 plug (RH-12FH/20FH series) made by SMC.
Valve function Double solenoid
Operating fluid Clean air Note2)
Note2)
Operating method Internal pilot method
Effective sectional area (CV value) 1.1mm2 (0.06) 7.92mm2 (0.44)
Oiling Unnecessary
Operating pressure range 0.1 to 0.7MPa
Response time 15msec or less (at 0.5 MPa) 22msec or less (at 0.5 MPa)
Max. operating frequency 10Hz 5Hz
Ambient temperature -10 to 50 (However, there must be no condensation.)
Item Specifications
Method Built-in fly-wheel diodes with surge protection
Coil rated voltage DC24V 10%
Power consumption 0.55W
Voltage protection circuit with power surge protection Diode
Part name Type Q'ty Mass(kg)
Note1) Remark
CAUTION The air to be provided must be clean, i.e., filtered with a mist separator or air filter. Failing to do so may lead to malfunctions.
2-111 Options
Robot arm
Fig.2-73 Outline dimensional drawing (RH-6FH series)
SOL1A
SOL1B
SOL2A
SOL2B
A3
A4
A1 A2
B3 B4
B1 B2
SOL3A
SOL3B
SOL4A
SOL4B
A3
A4
A1 A2
B3 B4
B1 B2
<><>
SOL1A
SOL1B
SOL2A
SOL2B
A3
A4
A1 A2
B3 B4
B1 B2
SOL3A
SOL3B
SOL4A
SOL4B
A3
A4
A1 A2
B3 B4
B1 B2
GR1
GR2
+24V (COM)
GR3
GR4
GR5
GR6
+24V (COM)
GR7
GR8
GR1
GR2
24G
GR3
GR4
GR5
GR6
24G
GR7
GR8
50mm80mm
Part name 1 set 2 sets 3 sets 4 sets Specification
Solenoid valve 1 2 3 4
Manifold block 1 1 1 1
Quick coupling (A/B port) 8 8 8 8 4
Quick coupling (P/R port) 2 2 2 2 6
Connector 1 1 2 2 1-1318115-4
Contact 3 5 8 10 1318112-1
Installation screw (Combination slotted-cross recessed pan head machine screw)
2 2 2 2 M4x30
Note) The hand output cable (1F-GR60S-01: Option) is unnecessary.
Sink type> Connector name
Reserved
Reserved Reserved
Reserved
Reserved Reserved
White
White
Black
Red Black
Red Black
Red Black
Red
Black
Red Black
Red Black
Red Black
Red
Source type Connector name
Reserved
Reserved Reserved
Reserved
Reserved Reserved
White
White
Red
Black
Red
Black Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Robot arm
Options 2-112
Fig.2-74 Outline dimensional drawing (RH-12FH/20FH series)
SOL1A
SOL1B
SOL2A
SOL2B
A3
A4
A1 A2
B3 B4
B1 B2
SOL3A
SOL3B
SOL4A
SOL4B
A3
A4
A1 A2
B3 B4
B1 B2
<><>
SOL1A
SOL1B
SOL2A
SOL2B
A3
A4
A1 A2
B3 B4
B1 B2
SOL3A
SOL3B
SOL4A
SOL4B
A3
A4
A1 A2
B3 B4
B1 B2
GR1
GR2
+24V (COM)
GR3
GR4
GR5
GR6
+24V (COM)
GR7
GR8
GR1
GR2
24G
GR3
GR4
GR5
GR6
24G
GR7
GR8
102
93 4.5
13 1
1 3 8.
5
3 .5
80 11
50.137.8
87.9
4.5
21
GR1
GR2
4.5
Note) The hand output cable (1F-GR60S-01: Option) is unnecessary.
Part no. Part name 1 sets 2 sets 3 sets 4 sets Specifications
<1> Solenoid valve 1 2 3 4
<2> Manifold block 1 1 1 1
<3> Quick coupling 2 4 6 8 6
<4> Block plate 1 1 1 1
<5> Quick coupling 1 1 1 1 6
<6> Quick coupling 1 1 1 1 6
<7> Connector 1 1 2 2 1-1318115-4
<8> Contact 6 6 12 12 1318112-1
<9> Installation screw 4 4 4 4 M48
Sink type> Connector name
Reserved
Reserved Reserved
Reserved
Reserved Reserved
White
White
Black
Red Black
Red Black
Red Black
Red
Black
Red Black
Red Black
Red Black
Red
Source type Connector name
Reserved
Reserved Reserved
Reserved
Reserved Reserved
White
White
Red
Black
Red
Black Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
2-113 Options
Robot arm
Fig.2-75 Outline dimensional drawing (RH-3FHR series: Standard specification)
SOL1A
SOL1B
SOL2A
SOL2B
A3
A4
A1 A2
B3 B4
B1 B2
SOL3A
SOL3B
SOL4A
SOL4B
A3
A4
A1 A2
B3 B4
B1 B2
<><>
SOL1A
SOL1B
SOL2A
SOL2B
A3
A4
A1 A2
B3 B4
B1 B2
SOL3A
SOL3B
SOL4A
SOL4B
A3
A4
A1 A2
B3 B4
B1 B2
GR1
GR2
+24V (COM)
GR3
GR4
GR5
GR6
+24V (COM)
GR7
GR8
GR1
GR2
24G
GR3
GR4
GR5
GR6
24G
GR7
GR8
Sink type> Connector name
Reserved
Reserved Reserved
Reserved
Reserved Reserved
White
White
Black
Red Black
Red Black
Red Black
Red
Black
Red Black
Red Black
Red Black
Red
Source type Connector name
Reserved
Reserved Reserved
Reserved
Reserved Reserved
White
White
Red
Black
Red
Black Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
(S O
L *
A )
(S O
L *
B )
Part no. Part name Qty. Specifications
Solenoid valve 4
Quick coupling 8 4 (Elbow)
Quick coupling 1 6 (Elbow)
Quick coupling 1 6 (Elbow)
Connector 2 1-1318115-4
Contact 12 1318112-1
Solenoid valve cover 1
Manifold block 1
Installation screw 2 Fixing screw M5x8, spring washer, plain washer (attachments)
RH-3FHR series (Standard specification)
2-5.5 through hole
*The length to connector from solenoid valve is 430mm each.
Note) The optional hand output cable (1S-GR35S-02) is unnecessary.
Robot arm
Options 2-114
Fig.2-76 Outline dimensional drawing (RH-3FHR series: Clean/Waterproof specification)
SOL1A
SOL1B
SOL2A
SOL2B
A3
A4
A1 A2
B3 B4
B1 B2
SOL3A
SOL3B
SOL4A
SOL4B
A3
A4
A1 A2
B3 B4
B1 B2
<><>
SOL1A
SOL1B
SOL2A
SOL2B
A3
A4
A1 A2
B3 B4
B1 B2
SOL3A
SOL3B
SOL4A
SOL4B
A3
A4
A1 A2
B3 B4
B1 B2
GR1
GR2
+24V (COM)
GR3
GR4
GR5
GR6
+24V (COM)
GR7
GR8
GR1
GR2
24G
GR3
GR4
GR5
GR6
24G
GR7
GR8
Sink type> Connector name
Reserved
Reserved Reserved
Reserved
Reserved Reserved
White
White
Black
Red Black
Red Black
Red Black
Red
Black
Red Black
Red Black
Red Black
Red
Source type Connector name
Reserved
Reserved Reserved
Reserved
Reserved Reserved
White
White
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
AIR IN RETURN
Part no. Part name Qty. Specifications
Solenoid valve 4
Quick coupling 8 4 (Elbow)
Quick coupling 1 6 (Elbow)
Quick coupling 1 6 (Elbow)
Connector 2 1-1318115-4
Contact 12 1318112-1
Solenoid valve cover 1
Manifold block 1
Installation screw 2 Fixing screw M5x8, spring washer, plain washer (attachments)
RH-3FHR series (Clean/Waterproof specification)
*The length to connector from solenoid valve is 430mm each.
Note) The optional hand output cable (1S-GR35S-02) is unnecessary.
2-115 Options
Robot arm
(4) Hand input cable
Order type: RH-6FH series ............................1F-HC35C-01 RH-12FH/20FH series ............1F-HC35C-02
RH-3FHR series.........................1S-HC00S-01
Outline
The hand input cable is used for customer-designed pneumatic hands.
It is necessary to use this to receive the hand's open/close confirmation signals and grasping confirmation signals, at the controller.
One end of the cable connects to the connector for hand input signals, which is in the wrist section of the hand. The other end of the cable connected to the sensor inside the hand customer designed.
To extend the wiring to the outside of the robot arm, optional external wiring and pip- ing box (RH-6FH series: 1F-UT-BOX, RH-12FH/20FH series: 1F-UT-BOX-01) is required.
Configuration Table 2-25 Configuration equipment
Specifications Table 2-26 Specifications
Part name Type Qty. Mass (kg) Note1)
Note1) Mass indicates one set.
Remarks
RH-6FH series
Hand input cable 1F-HC35C-01 1 cable 0.2
RH-12FH/20FH series
Hand input cable 1F-HC35C-02 1 cable 0.2
RH-3FHR series
Hand input cable 1S-HC00S-01 1 cable 0.1 Three rubber sheets, seven cable clamp attachment
Item Specifications Remarks
RH-6FH series
Size x cable core AWG#24 (0.2mm2)12 One-sided connector, one-sided cable bridging
Total length 1,650mm (Including the curl section, which is 350mm long
RH-12FH/20FH series
Size x cable core AWG#24 (0.2mm2)12 One-sided connector, one-sided cable bridging
Total length 1,800mm (Including the curl section, which is 350mm long
RH-3FHR series
Size x cable core AWG#24 (0.2mm2)6 One-sided connector, one-sided cable bridging
Total length 1,210mm
Robot arm
Options 2-116
Fig.2-77 Outside dimensional drawing and pin assignment (RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series)
Fig.2-78 Outside dimensional drawing and pin assignment (RH-3FHR series)
[Caution] This option can be installed on clean-type, but its cleanliness is not under warranty.
15
400 350 45010
450
25
1-1318115-3 (
HC H C
1 H
C 2
HC1 HC2 HC3 HC4
+24V
24G HC5 HC6
( 1)
( 2)
( 3)
( 4)
( 5)
( 6)
A1
A2 A3 B1 B2 B3
A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3
HC7 HC8
( 7)
( 8)
100
Note) Pin assignment of sink and source is the same.
(Tyco Electronics AMP)
(Purple) (Brown) (Blue) (Black)
(Yellow)
(Green) (Red) (White) (Gray) (Pink)
24V Reserve
1 2 3 4
Reserve 24G HC5 HC6 HC7 HC8
A
Alteration dimensions A
Type Dimensions of A
(mm)
1F-HC35C-01 45010
1F-HC35C-02 60010
HC1 HC2 HC3 HC4
+24V
24G
()
()
()
()
A1
A2 A3 B1 B2 B3
A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3
1-1318115-3 (())
() 400
(500)
()
6
(525)
1210()
(50)
(Z)
80
1S-HC00S-01HC
(30)
(55)
(30) (Fixing place of tool side)
(Usable length for customer)
(Z-axis end)
1210 (Total length)
Tyco Electronics AMP)
(White)
(White) (Black) (White) (Black)
(Black)
+24V Reserve HC1 HC2 HC3 HC4
Reserve 24 Reserve Reserve Reserve Reserve
Note) Pin assignment of sink and source is the same.
*1) The signal name is described in the marking sticker.
*2) Cable clamping portion.
*1) *2) *2)
2-117 Options
Robot arm
(5) Hand output cable
Order type: RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series................1F-GR60S-01 RH-3FHR series.......................................1S-GR35S-02
Outline
The hand output cable (solenoid valve connection cable) is an option that is used when a solenoid valve other than one of the solenoid valve set options, is used.
One end of the cable has a connector that connects to the input terminal inside the robot. The other end of the cable is connected.
To extend the wiring to the outside of the robot arm, optional external wiring and pip- ing box (RH-6FH series: 1F-UT-BOX, RH-12FH/20FH series: 1F-UT-BOX-01) is required.
Configuration Table 2-27 Configuration equipment
Specifications
Table 2-28 Specifications
Fig.2-79 Outline dimensional drawing and pin assignment
[Caution] This option can be installed on clean-type, but its cleanliness is not under warranty.
Part name Type Qty. Mass (kg) Note1)
Note1) Mass indicates one set.
Remarks
Hand output cable 1F-GR60S-01 1 cable 0.3 For RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series
Hand output cable 1S-GR35S-02 1 cable 0.2 For RH-3FHR series
Item Specifications Remarks
Size x Cable core AWG#24(0.2mm2) x 12 cores One side connector and one side cable connection
Total length 1,050mm For RH-6FH/12FH/20FH series (1F-GR60S-01)
450mm For RH-3FHR series (1S-GR35S-02)
15
600
(100)
1-1318115-4 ( ())
G R
1 G
R 2
GR
GR1
GR3 GR4
+24V (COM)
+24VCOM
GR5
GR7
( 1)
( 3)
( 4)
( 5)
( 7)
A1
A2 A3
B1 B2 B3
A1 A2 A3
B1 B2 B3
GR8
( 8)
B4
GR2 2) A4
GR6 ( 6) A4
B4
GR1
GR3 GR4
24GND (COM)
24GNDCOM
GR5
GR7
( 1)
( 3)
( 4)
( 5)
( 7)
GR8
( 8)
GR2 2)
GR6 ( 6)
450 (Tyco Electronics AMP)
(Yellow) Reserve
Reserve Reserve
(Purple) (Brown) (Blue) (Black)
(Green)
(Red) (White) (Gray) (Pink)
+2 ( ) Reserve
Reserve Reserve
Reserve
Reserve Reserve
Reserve
Reserve Reserve
Sink type Source type
A B
(C)
Alteration dimensions of A to C
(Unit: mm)
Type name A B C
1F-GR60S-01 600 450 100
1S-GR35S-02 350 100 80
Robot arm
Options 2-118
(6) Hand curl tube
Order type: RH-6FH series ............................Four sets: 1E-ST0408C-300 RH-12FH/20FH series ............Four sets: 1N-ST0608C-01
Outline
The hand curl tube is a curl tube for the pneumatic hand.
Configuration Table 2-29 Configuration equipment
Specifications Table 2-30 Specifications
Fig.2-80 Outline dimensional drawing
[Caution] This option can be installed on clean-type, but its cleanliness is not under warranty.
Part name Type Qty. Mass(kg)Note1)
Note1) Mass indicates one set.
Remarks
RH-6FH series
Hand curl tube (Four set: 8 pcs.) 1E-ST0408C-300 1 pc. 0.1 4 tube, 8pcs
RH-12FH/20FH series
Hand curl tube (Four set: 8 pcs.) 1N-ST0608C-01 1 pc. 0.4 6 tube, 8pcs
Item Specifications
RH-6FH series RH-12FH/20FH series
Material Urethane Urethane
Size Outside diameter: 4 x Inside diameter2.5 Outside diameter: 6 x Inside diameter4
RH-6FH series: 1E-ST0408C-300 (4 x 8pcs)
RH-12FH/20FH series: 1N-ST0608C-01 (6 x 8pcs)
100
()
300
600
()
(Tooling side)
(Robot side)
300
()
250
750
()
(Tooling side)
(Robot side)
2-119 Options
Robot arm
(7) Hand tube
Order type: RH-3FHR series .......................................1E-ST0304S
Outline
The hand tube is a tube for the pneumatic hand.
Configuration Table 2-31 Configuration equipment
Specifications
Table 2-32 Specifications
* We recommend confirming of the wear and tear and the rub in the cycle of the six months and please prepare as service parts.
Fig.2-81 Outline dimensional drawing
[Caution] This option can be installed on clean-type, but its cleanliness is not under warranty.
Part name Type Qty. Mass(kg)Note1)
Note1) Mass indicates one set.
Remarks
RH-3FHR series
Hand tube (4 pcs.) 1E-ST0304S 1 pc. 0.1 Union (4 to 3): Eight piece attachment
(Four of them is installing at shipping)
Three rubber sheets, six cable clamp
attachment
Item Specifications
Material Urethane One side is with the tape.
Size Outside diameter: 3 x Inside diameter1.5: 4 pcs.
()
RH-3FHR series: 1E-ST0304S (4 pcs.)
Note) Each tube have union and tape (for inhibition of grease adhesion) at each end. Remove the tape and connect with tool.
Tape (for inhibition of grease adhesion)
(Usable length for customer)
(Fixing place of tool side) Z-axis end Clamp place
U3-B 3 air tube Inside diameter : 1.5 x 4
UR4-3M Change 4 to 3 union x 4
Robot arm
Options 2-120
(8) Internal Wiring/Piping set for hand
Order type: RH-6FH series, 200mm stroke................................1F-HS408S-01 RH-6FH series, 340mm stroke ...............................1F-HS408S-02
RH-12FH/20FH series, 350mm stroke................1F-HS604S-01
RH-12FH/20FH series, 450mm stroke................1F-HS604S-02
Outline
This set, consisting of air hoses and cables, is for feeding air hoses and hand input signal cables from the No. 2 arm through to the shaft tip. A plate is already attached to be fixed onto the No. 2 arm, and therefore it is easy to ensure the necessary space for wiring and piping.
This can be used together with the separately sold electromagnetic valve set option.
Configuration Table 2-33 Configuration equipment
Specification Table 2-34 Specification
[Caution] This option can be installed on clean-type, but its cleanliness is not under warranty.
Item Type Qty. Mass (Kg) Note1)
Note1) Mass indicates one set.
Remarks
RH-6FH series
Internal Wiring/Piping set
for hand
(For 200mm stroke)
1F-HS408S-01 1 0.4 The air hose and the cable for hand input signals are
contained.
The grease (for application to shaft top) and the
union band (for fixation of the hose and the cable)
are attached. Internal Wiring/Piping set
for hand
(For 340mm stroke)
1F-HS408S-02 1 0.4
RH-12FH/20FH series
Internal Wiring/Piping set
for hand
(For 350mm stroke)
1F-HS604S-01 1 0.4 The air hose and the cable for hand input signals are
contained.
The grease (for application to shaft top) and the
union band (for fixation of the hose and the cable)
are attached. Internal Wiring/Piping set
for hand
(For 450mm stroke)
1F-HS604S-02 1 0.4
Item
Specification
Remarks1F-HS408S-01
1F-HS408S-02
1F-HS604S-01
1F-HS604S-02
Air hose 4 x 8pcs 6 x 4pcs Both ends are free.
Hand input signal cable Signal AWG #26(0.13mm2)8pcs The robot arm side is connector (HC1, HC2), and
one side is free.Power AWG #22(0.35mm2)2pcs
Useable length from the shaft end 380mm 420mm The length from the shaft end which can be used of
customer.
This option
2-121 Options
Robot arm
Fig.2-82 Outline dimension drawing and pin assignment (Hand input cable)
15
1-1318115-3(2)AMP
(Red) (White) (Black) (Green)
(Red)
Pin assignment
(White & Orange) (Orange)
(White & Green) (Green)
(White) (White & Blue)
(Blue) (White & Brown)
(Brown)
1-1318115-3 (2pcs) A P
Robot arm
Options 2-122
(9) External Wiring/Piping box
Order type: RH-6FH series ............................1F-UT-BOX RH-12FH/20FH series............1F-UT-BOX-01
Outline
This is a very useful option when removing the air hoses and signal lines from the rear of the No. 2 arm, and pulling hand wiring and piping out to the robots exterior.
The joint for connects to the external hose is prepared, and the holes which fixes the signal cable to pull out with cable clamp are prepared. Optional hand output cables and hand input cables can be fixed here.
This option can also be used on the oil mist and clean specifications.
Configuration Table 2-35 Configuration equipment
Specification Table 2-36 Specification
An outside dimension and a component are shown in Fig. 2-83 or Fig. 2-84.
Part name Type Qty. Mass (Kg) Note1)
Note1) Mass indicates one set.
Remarks
RH-6FH series
External Wiring/Piping box 1F-UT-BOX 1 0.6 Attachments:
Air hose (black) 4-8
Air hose (black) 6-1
Air hose (white) 6-1
Installation screw M4x8: 4 (Plain washer)
Cable tie: 4
Coupling: 2
Simple spanner for resin nuts
RH-12FH/20FH series
External Wiring/Piping box 1F-UT-BOX-01 1 0.6 Attachments:
Air hose (black) 6-8
Installation screw M4x12: 4 (Plain washer)
Cable tie: 4
Simple spanner for resin nuts
Item Specification Remarks
RH-6FH series
Outline 106(W) x 73.6(D) x 72(H) The coupling is included.
The hole for wiring drawers 21 x 4 places Fix the cable by cable clamp etc.
Coupling For 4 air hose x 8pcs Installed previously
For 6 air hose x 2pcs
RH-12FH/20FH series
Outline 100(W) x 91.9(D) x 70(H) The coupling is included.
The hole for wiring drawers 21 x 4 places Fix the cable by cable clamp etc.
Coupling For 6 air hose x 8pcs Installed previously
Pull out Wiring/Piping
2-123 Options
Robot arm
Fig.2-83 Outline dimension and configurations (RH-6FH series)
Configuration
Part name Qty. Specification
<1> External Wiring/Piping box housing 1
<2> Quick coupling 8 4 (Elbow)
<3> Quick coupling 2 6 (Elbow)
<4> 21 hole 4 The grommet is attached to each hole. (Two holes are in the right and the left.)
<5> Manifold block 1
<6> Plug 8 Stopper for 4 quick coupling
<7> Plug 2 Stopper for 6 quick coupling
- Simple spanner for resin nuts 1 Attachment
- Installation screw 4 Attachment, M4x8 (Plain washer)
- Air hose 8 Attachment, 4 (Black)
- Air hose 1 Attachment, 6 (Black)
- Air hose 1 Attachment, 6 (White)
- Cable tie 4 Attachment
- Coupling 2 Attachment, 6 (Elbow)
Robot arm
Options 2-124
Fig.2-84 Outline dimension and configurations (RH-12FH/20FH series)
Configuration
Part name Qty. Specification
<1> External Wiring/Piping box housing 1
<2> Quick coupling 8 6 (Elbow)
<3> 21 hole 4 The grommet is attached to each hole. (Two holes are in the right and the left.)
<4> Manifold block 1
<5> Plug 8 Stopper for 6 quick coupling
- Simple spanner for resin nuts 1 Attachment
- Installation screw 4 Attachment, M4x12 (Plain washer)
- Air hose 8 Attachment, 6 (Black)
- Cable tie 4 Attachment
2-125 About Overhaul
Robot arm
2.8 About Overhaul
Robots which have been in operation for an extended period of time can suffer from wear and other forms of deterioration. In regard to such robots, we define overhaul as an operation to replace parts running out of speci- fied service life or other parts which have been damaged, so that the robots may be put back in shape for contin- ued use. As a rule of thumb, it is recommended that overhaul be carried out before the total amount of servo-on time reaches the specified time (24,000 hours for the robot arm and 36,000 hours for the controller) (See Fig. 2- 85.). However, the degree of the equipment's wear and deterioration presumably varies depending on their operat- ing conditions. Especially for operation with high load and frequency, the maintenance cycle may be shorter. For details on the part selection for replacement and the timing of overhaul, contact your dealer.
Fig.2-85 Periodic inspection/overhaul periods
Shipment
F ai
lu re
r at
e
Predetermined time period
If overhaul is performed
Servo-on time
If overhaul is not performed
Periodic inspection Over- haul
Robot arm
Maintenance parts 2-126
2.9 Maintenance parts
The consumable parts used in the robot arm are shown in Table 2-37. Purchase these parts from the designated maker or dealer when required. Some Mitsubishi-designated parts differ from the maker's standard parts. Thus, confirm the part name, robot arm and controller serial No. and purchase the parts from the dealer.
Table 2-37 Consumable part list
No. Part name Type Note1)
Note1) Confirm the robot arm serial No., and contact the dealer or service branch of Mitsubishi Electric Co., for the type.
Usage place Qty. Supplier
Common parts between robot type
1 Grease Reduction gears of each axis As needed
Mitsubishi Electric 2 Ball screw
Ball spline As needed
3 Lithium battery ER6V Front section of the base 3
RH-6FH series
4 Timing belt J3 axis 1
Mitsubishi Electric 5 J4 axis motor side 1
6 J4 axis shaft side 1
RH-12FH series
7 Timing belt J3 axis 1
Mitsubishi Electric 8 J4 axis motor side 1
9 J4 axis shaft side 1
RH-20FH series
10 Timing belt J3 axis 1
Mitsubishi Electric 11 J4 axis motor side 1
12 J4 axis shaft side 1
RH-3FHR series
13 Timing belt J1 axis 1
Mitsubishi Electric
14 J2 axis 1
15 J3 axis 1
16 J4 axis motor side 1
17 J4 axis shaft side 1
3-127 Standard specifications
3Controller
3 Controller
3.1 Standard specifications
3.1.1 Basic specifications Table 3-1 Specifications of controller
Item Unit Specification Remarks
Type CR750- HD-1
CR751- HD-0
CR750-03HRD-1
CR751-03HRD-0
in type name shows the load
(6kg: 06, 12kg: 12, 20kg: 20) of
the robot arm.
CR750-03HRD-1 and CR751-0.HRD-
0 controller are for RH-3FHR only.
Number of control axis Simultaneously 4
Memory
capacity
Programmed positions point 39,000
No. of steps step 78,000
Number of program 512
Robot language MELFA-BASIC IV, V
Teaching method Pose teaching method, MDI method Note1)
External input and output
Input and output point 0/0 Max. 256/256 by option
Dedicated input/output Assigned with general-purpose
input/output
The signal number of "STOP" input
signals is fixing.
Hand open/close input/output point 8/8 Built-in
Emergency stop input point 1 Duplicated
Door switch input point 1 Duplicated
Enabling device input point 1 Duplicated
Emergency stop output point 1 Duplicated
Mode output point 1 Duplicated
Robot error output point 1 Duplicated
Addition axis synchronization point 1 Duplicated
Mode changeover switch input point 1 Duplicated
(CR751 controller only)
Interface RS-422 port 1 Only for T/B
Ethernet port 1 10BASE-T/100BASE-Tx
USB port 1 Ver.2.0 FullSpeed
Only device function
Additional axis interface Channel 1 SSCNET III (Connects with MR-J3-
BS, MR-J4-B series)
Tracking interface Channel 2
Option slot slot 2 For option interface
Power
source
Input voltage range V RH-6FH series, RH-3FHR series:
Single phase AC180 to 253
RH-12FH/20FH seriesNote2) :
Three phase AC180 to 253, or
Single phase AC207 to 253
Power capacity kVA RH-6FH series, RH-3FHR series: 1.0
RH-12/20FH series: 1.5 Does not include rush current. Note3)
Power supply frequency Hz 50/60
Outline dimensions Note4) mm CR750 controller
430(W) x 425(D) x 174(H)
Excluding protrusions
CR751 controller
430(W) x 425(D) x 98(H)
Mass kg CR750 controller
RH-6FH series: Approx. 16
RV-12FH/20FH series: Approx. 18
CR751 controller: Approx. 12
Construction Self-contained floor type, Opened type. Installation vertically or horizontally
IP20 Note5)
Operating temperature range 0 to 40
3Controller
Standard specifications 3-128
3.1.2 Protection specifications and operating supply A protection method complying with the IEC Standard IP20 (Opened type) is adopted for the controller.
The IEC IP symbols refer only to the degree of protection between the solid and the fluids, and don't indicated that any special protection has been constructed for the prevention against oil and water.
Information
The IEC IP20
It indicates the protective structure that prevents an iron ball 12 0 +0.05mm diameter, which is being pressed with
the power of 3.1 kg10%, from going through the opening in the outer sheath of the supplied equipment.
Refer to the section Page 229, "6.2 Working environment" for details on the working environment.
Ambient humidity %RH 45 to 85 Without dew drops
Grounding 100 or less 100or less (class D grounding)Note6)
Paint color Dark gray Equivalent to Munsell: 3.5PB3.2/0.8
Note1) Pose teaching method: The method to register the current position of the robot arm. MDI method: The method to register by inputting the numerical value Immediate.
Note2) Both the three phase power supply and the single phase power supply can use this product according to voltage condi- tions.
Note3) The power capacity is the rating value for normal operation. The power capacity does not include the rush current when the power is turned ON. The power capacity is a guideline and the actual operation is affected by the input power volt- age. The power consumption in the specific operation pattern with the RH-6FH is approx. 0.3kW and RH-20FH is approx. 0.49kW. The short circuit breaker should use the following. * Operate by the current leakage under the commercial frequency domain (50-60Hz). If sensitive to the high frequency
ingredient, it will become the cause in which below the maximum leak current value carries out the trip. Note4) Refer to Page 134, "3.3.1 Outside dimensions" for details. Note5) This controller is standard specification. (Refer to Page 128, "3.1.2 Protection specifications and operating supply".) Note6) The robot must be grounded by the customer.
Item Unit Specification Remarks
3-129 Names of each part
3 Controller
3.2 Names of each part
3.2.1 Controller (1) CR750 controller
Fig.3-1 Names of controller parts (CR750)
Controller (Front side) <15>
<6>
<16> <17> <3>
<18>
<20> Fan, Air suction
<7> <10><8> <9>
<1><2>
<19>
Attached cover
Controller (Rear side)
Exhaust downward (Bottom)
<5><4>
<13> <12> <11> <14>
<20>: The operation panel
<24> <25> <26> <27> <28> <29>
<23><22><21>
<1>: ACIN terminal
There are three types (Type A, B, and C) of the terminals. Refer to next page for details.
3 Controller
Names of each part 3-130
<1> ACIN terminal ................................................The terminal box for AC power source (single phase or single phase/ three phase, AC200V) input. (Inner side of a cover) There are three types of the terminal and the terminal differs depending on the model and specification (CE or non-CE).
Refer to a separate manual INSTRUCTION MANUAL/Controller setup, basic operation, and maintenance for how to connect a power cable.
<2> PE terminal .....................................................The screw for grounding of the cable. (M4 screw x 2 place) <3> Power switch .................................................This turns the control power ON/OFF. (With earth leakage breaker function)
<4> Machine cable connector (motor signal) (CN1)
Connect with the CN1 connector of the robot arm. <5> Machine cable connector (motor power) (CN2)
Connect with the CN2 connector of the robot arm. <6> T/B connection connector (TB) ...........This is a dedicated connector for connecting the T/B. When not using T/
B, connect the attached dummy connector. <7><8><9><10> CNUSR connector ..............The connector for input/ output connection dedicated for robot. (a plug
connector attached) <7>: CNUSR11, <8>: CNUSR12, <9>: CNUSR13, <10>: CNUSR2 Refer to a separate manual INSTRUCTION MANUAL/Controller setup, basic operation, and maintenance for the connection method and the further description of pin assign.
<11> LAN connector (LAN)......................... For LAN connection <12> ExtOPT connector (ExtOPT) .......... Connect the cable for addition axis control. <13> RIO connector (RIO) ........................... Connect the extension parallel input/output unit. <14> Option slot (SLOT1, SLOT2)........... Install the interface optional. (Install the cover, when not using.) <15> Interface cover ...................................... USB interface and battery are mounted. <16> Mode key switch ................................... This key switch changes the robot's operation mode.
AUTOMATIC ..........Operations from the controller or external equipment are valid. Operations for which the operation mode must be at the external device or T/B are not possible. (Exclude the start of automatic operation.)
MANUAL ..................When the T/B is valid, only operations from the T/B are valid. Operations for which the operation mode must be at the external device or controller are not possible.
<17> Emergency stop switch...................... This switch stops the robot in an emergency state. The servo turns OFF. <18> Filter cover.............................................. There is an air filter inside the cover. <19> Grounding terminal............................... The grounding terminal for connecting cables of option card. (M3 screw x 2
places) <20> Operation panel ..................................... The operation panel for servo ON/OFF, START/STOP the program etc. <21> Display panel (STATUS.NUMBER) ........... The alarm No., program No., override value (%), etc., are displayed. <22> CHNGDISP button ............................... This button changes the details displayed on the display panel in the order
of "Override" "Line No." "Program No." "User information." "Maker information..
Model Non-CE specification CE specification
RH-6FH series
RH-3FHR series
Type A: For single phase
Connect the primary power supply to L1 and L2 terminal.
Type C: For single phase
Connect the primary power supply to L1 and N terminal.
RH-12FH series
RH-20FH series
Type B: For single phase/three phase
When using the three phase primary power supply, connect to L1, L2, and L3 terminal. When using the single phase primary power supply, connect to L1 and L3 terminal.
L1 L2
L1 N
L1 L3L2
3-131 Names of each part
3 Controller
<23> UP/DOWN button ............................... This scrolls up or down the details displayed on the "STATUS. NUMBER" display panel.
<24> SVO.ON button...................................... This turns ON the servo power. (The servo turns ON.) <25> SVO.OFF button.................................. This turns OFF the servo power. (The servo turns OFF.) <26> START button........................................ This executes the program and operates the robot. The program is run
continuously. <27> STOP button .......................................... This stops the robot immediately. The servo does not turn OFF. <28> RESET button ........................................ This resets the error. This also resets the program's halted state and
resets the program. <29> END button.............................................. This stops the program being executed at the last line or End statement.
3 Controller
Names of each part 3-132
(2) CR751 controller
Fig.3-2 Names of controller parts (CR751)
<1> ACIN terminal ...........................................The connector for AC power source (single phase or single phase/three phase, AC200V) input. (a socket housing and a terminal are attached). Refer to a separate manual INSTRUCTION MANUAL/Controller setup, basic operation, and maintenance for how to connect a power cable.
<2> PE terminal ................................................The screw for grounding of the cable. (M4 screw x 2 place) <3> POWER lamp.............................................Lamp of control power source <4> Machine cable connector (motor power)
AMP1, AMP2: Motor power, BRK: Motor brake <5> Machine cable connector (motor signal)
CN2: Motor signal <6>T/B connection connector (TB) ........This is a dedicated connector for connecting the R33TB. When not using T/
B, connect the attached dummy plug. <7>Filter cover..................................................There is an air filter and buttery inside this cover. <8>CNUSR connector ...................................The connector for input/ output connection dedicated for robot.
(CNUSR1 CNUSR2) (a plug connector attached) Refer to a separate manual INSTRUCTION MANUAL/Controller setup, basic operation, and maintenance for the connection method and thefurther description of pin assign.
<9>Grounding terminal...................................The grounding terminal for connecting cables of option card. (M3 screw x 2 places)
<10>Power supply charge lamp (CRARGE) The lamp is to ensure safe timing (prevent electric shocks) when removing the cover (users are not normally required to remove the cover). This lamp is illuminated (red) when electrical energy accumulates on the controllers power supply circuit board due to the robots servo being ON.
<2> <1> <3>
<4> <15> <9>
<5> <6> <14> <13> <12><11> <8>
<10><7>
Controller (Front side)
Exhaust
Controller (Rear side)
3-133 Names of each part
3 Controller
After turning the control power OFF and allowing a few minutes to pass, the lamp will go out.
<11>USB connecting connector (USB) ..For USB connection <12>LAN connector (LAN)...........................For LAN connection <13>ExtOPT connector (ExtOPT)............Connect the cable for addition axis control. <14>RIO connector (RIO).............................Connect the extension parallel input/output unit. <15>Option slot ................................................Install the interface optional. (Install the cover, when not using.)
(SLOT1 SLOT2)
Use the network equipments (personal computer, USB hub, LAN hub, etc) confirmed by manufacturer. The thing unsuitable for the FA environment (related with conformity, temperature or noise) exists in the equipments connected to USB. When using network equipment, measures against the noise, such as measures against EMI and
the addition of the ferrite core, may be necessary. Please fully confirm the operation by customer. Guarantee and maintenance of the equipment on the market (usual office automation equipment) cannot be performed.
Caution
3 Controller
Outside dimensions/Installation dimensions 3-134
3.3 Outside dimensions/Installation dimensions
3.3.1 Outside dimensions (1) CR750 controller
Fig.3-3 Outside dimensions of controller (CR750)
3-135 Outside dimensions/Installation dimensions
3 Controller
(2) CR751 controller
Fig.3-4 Outside dimensions of controller (CR751)
Cable fixation plate (Attachment) This plate must be installed by customers.
3 Controller
Outside dimensions/Installation dimensions 3-136
3.3.2 Installation dimensions (1) CR750 controller
Fig.3-5 Installation of controller (CR750)
Fixing installation section sure for prevention from the fall, when using the controller placing vertically. The reference figure of the metal plate for fixing is shown in Fig. 3-6.
You should install the metal plate for fixation to the controller with M4 x 8 or the shorter screw. The screw projection length inside the controller (side board thickness is 1.2 mm) surely makes 6.8 mm or less.
When storing the controller in a cabinet, etc., take special care to the heat radiating properties and ventilation properties so that the ambient temperature remains within the specification values. And, don't install the controller in the position where direct rays or the heat of lighting hits. The skin temperature of the controller may rise, and the error may occur.
15 0m
m
50mm 20mm
250mm
145mm 145mm
250mm
Intake vent
250mm or more
or more 20mm or more
1 50
m m
o r
m o re250mm or more
* Do not stack controllers.
CAUTION
CAUTION
3-137 Outside dimensions/Installation dimensions
3 Controller
Fig.3-6 Metal plate for fixation to placing vertically (Reference for CR750)
hole (Controller fixation hole)
hole
hole
3 Controller
Outside dimensions/Installation dimensions 3-138
(2) CR751 controller
Fig.3-7 Installation of controller (CR751)
Fixing installation section sure for prevention from the fall, when using the controller placing vertically. The reference figure of the metal plate for fixing is shown in Fig. 3-8.
You should install the metal plate for fixation to the controller with M4 x 8 or the shorter screw. The screw projection length inside the controller (side board thickness is 1.2mm) surely makes 6.8mm or less.
When storing the controller in a cabinet, etc., take special care to the heat radiating properties and ventilation properties so that the ambient temperature remains within the specification values. And, don't install the controller in the position where direct rays or the heat of lighting hits. The skin temperature of the controller may rise, and the error may occur.
15 0m
m
50mm 20mm250mm
145mm 145mm
250mm
Intake vent
250 m or more
250m or more or more 20mm or more
1 50
m m
o r
m o re
* Stackable at most 2 controllers.
CAUTION
CAUTION
3-139 Outside dimensions/Installation dimensions
3 Controller
Fig.3-8 Metal plate for fixation to placing vertically (Reference for CR751)
hole
hole hole (Controller fixation hole)
3 Controller
External input/output 3-140
3.4 External input/output
3.4.1 Types (1) Dedicated input/output...............................These inputs and outputs carry out the robot remote operation and
status display. (2) General-purpose input/output.................These are inputs and outputs that the customer can program for
peripheral device control. (3) Hand input/output .........................................These are inputs and outputs related to the hand that the customer can
program. (4)Emergency stop/Door switch input.........Information on wiring the emergency stop and wiring used to ensure
safety can be found on Page 144, "3.6 Emergency stop input and output etc." and on Page 216, "6.1.7 Examples of safety measures".
Linking our GOT1000 Series (GT15) display equipment to the robot controller over the Ethernet permits you to control robot controller's input/output from a GOT (graphic operation terminal).
3-141 Dedicated input/output
3 Controller
3.5 Dedicated input/output
Show the main function of dedicated input/output in the Table 3-2. Refer to attached instruction manual "Detailed explanations of functions and operations" in the product for the other functions. Each parameter indi- cated with the parameter name is used by designated the signal No., assigned in the order of input signal No. and output signal No.
Table 3-2 Dedicated input/output list
Parameter name
Input Note1) Output
Name Function Level Name Function
TEACHMD None Teaching mode out- put signal
Outputs that the teaching mode is
entered.
ATTOPMD None Automatic mode out- put signal
Outputs that the automatic mode is
entered.
ATEXTMD None Remote mode output
signal
Outputs that the remote mode is
entered.
RCREADY None Controller power ON
complete signal
Outputs that external input signals can
be received.
AUTOENA Automatic opera- tion enabled input
signal
Allows automatic operation.
L
Automatic operation
enabled output signal
Outputs the automatic operation
enabled state.
START Start input signal Starts all slots. E
Operating output sig- nal
Outputs that the slot is operating.
STOP Stop input signal Stops all slots.
The input signal No. is fixed to 0.
Note) Use the emergency stop
input for stop inputs related
to safety.
L
Wait output signal Outputs that the slot is temporarily
stopped.
STOP2 Stop input signal The program during operation is
stopped.
Unlike the STOP parameter,
change of the signal number is
possible.
Notes) Specification is the same as
the STOP parameter.
L
Wait output signal Outputs that the slot is temporarily
stopped.
Notes) Specification is the same as the
STOP parameter.
SLOTINIT Program reset input
signal
Resets the wait state. E
Program selection
enabled output signal
Outputs that the slot is in the program
selection enabled state.
ERRRESET Error reset input
signal
Resets the error state. E
Error occurring out- put signal
Outputs that an error has occurred.
CYCLE Cycle stop input
signal
Carries out cycle stop. E
In cycle stop opera- tion output signal
Outputs that the cycle stop is operat- ing.
SRVOFF Servo ON enabled
input signal
Turns the servo OFF for all mech- anisms.
L Servo ON enabled
output signal
Outputs servo-on disable status.
(Echo back)
SRVON Servo ON input
signal
Powers on the robot servos.
For multiple mechanisms, it powers
on the servos of all the mecha- nisms.
E
In servo ON output
signal
Outputs the servo ON state.
For multiple mechanisms, the output is
performed when at least one of the
mechanisms is in the servo ON state.
IOENA Operation rights
input signal
Requests the operation rights for
the external signal control. L
Operation rights out- put signal
Outputs the operation rights valid state
for the external signal control.
MELOCK Machine lock input
signal
Sets/resets the machine lock
state for all mechanisms. E
In machine lock out- put signal
Outputs the machine lock state.
SAFEPOS Evasion point
return input signal
Requests the evasion point return
operation. E
In evasion point
return output signal
Outputs that the evasion point return
is taking place.
OUTRESET General-purpose
output signal reset
Resets the general-purpose output
signal. E None
EMGERR None
Emergency stop out- put signal
Outputs that an emergency stop has
occurred.
S1START
:
S32START
Start input Starts each slot. E In operation output Outputs the operating state for each
slot.
3 Controller
Dedicated input/output 3-142
S1STOP
:
S32STOP
Stop input Stops each slot. L In wait output Outputs that each slot is temporarily
stopped.
PRGSEL Program selection
input signal
Designates the setting value for
the program No. with numeric value
input signals.
E None
OVRDSEL Override selection
input signal
Designates the setting value for
the override with the numeric value
input signals.
E None
IODATA Note2)
Numeric value input
(start No., end No.)
Used to designate the program
name, override value., mechanism
value.
L Numeric value output
(start No., end No.)
Used to output the program name,
override value., mechanism No.
PRGOUT Program No. out- put request
Requests output of the program
name. E Program No. output
signal
Outputs that the program name is
being output to the numeric value out- put signal.
LINEOUT Line No. output
request
Requests output of the line No. E Line No. output signal
Outputs that the line No. is being out- put to the numeric value output signal.
OVRDOUT Override value out- put request
Requests the override output.
E
Override value out- put signal
Outputs that the override value is being
output to the numeric value output sig- nal.
ERROUT Error No. output
request
Requests the error No. output. E
Error No. output sig- nal
Outputs that the error No. is being out- put to the numeric value output signal.
JOGENA Jog valid input sig- nal
Validates jog operation with the
external signals E
Jog valid output sig- nal
Outputs that the jog operation with
external signals is valid.
JOGM Jog mode input 2-
bit
Designates the jog mode. L
Jog mode output 2-
bit
Outputs the current jog mode.
JOG+ Jog feed + side for
8-axes Requests the + side jog operation. L None
JOG- Jog feed - side for
8-axes Requests the - side jog operation. L None
HNDCNTL1
:
HNDCNTL3
None
Mechanism 1 hand
output signal status
:
Mechanism 3 hand
output signal status
Mechanism 1: Outputs the status of
general-purpose outputs
900 to 907.
Mechanism 2: Outputs the status of
general-purpose outputs
910 to 917.
Mechanism 3: Outputs the status of
general-purpose outputs
920 to 927.
HNDSTS1
:
HNDSTS3 None
Mechanism 1 hand
input signal status
:
Mechanism 3 hand
input signal status
Mechanism 1: Outputs the status of
hand inputs 900 to 907.
Mechanism 2: Outputs the status of
hand inputs 910 to 917.
Mechanism 3: Outputs the status of
hand inputs 920 to 927.
HNDERR1
:
HNDERR3
Mechanism 1 hand
error input signal
:
Mechanism 3 hand
error input signal
Requests the hand error occur- rence.
L
Mechanism 1 hand
error output signal
:
Mechanism 3 hand
error output signal
Outputs that a hand error is occurring.
Parameter name
Input Note1) Output
Name Function Level Name Function
3-143 Dedicated input/output
3 Controller
AIRERR1
:
AIRERR3
Pneumatic pressure
error 1 input signal
:
Pneumatic pressure
error 3 input signal
Request the pneumatic pressure
error occurrence. L
Pneumatic pressure
error 1 output signal.
:
Pneumatic pressure
error 3 output signal.
Outputs that a pneumatic pressure
error is occurring.
M1PTEXC
:
M3PTEXC
None L
Maintenance parts
replacement time
warning signal
Outputs that the maintenance parts
have reached the replacement time.
USER- AREANote3) None
User-designated area
8-points
Outputs that the robot is in the user-
designated area.
Note1) The level indicates the signal level. L: Level signal The designated function is validated when the signal is ON, and is invalidated when the
signal is OFF. E: Edge signal The designated function is validated when the signal changes from the OFF to ON state,
and the function maintains the original state even when the signal then turns OFF. Note2) Four elements are set in the order of input signal start No., end No., output signal start No. and end No. Note3) Up to eight points can be set successively in order of start output signal No. and end output signal No.
Parameter name
Input Note1) Output
Name Function Level Name Function
3 Controller
Emergency stop input and output etc. 3-144
3.6 Emergency stop input and output etc.
Do wiring of the external emergency stop, the special stop input, the door switch, and the enabling device from the "special input/output" terminal connector.
Table 3-3 Special input/output terminal
*At the time of the power supply OFF, the output point of contact is always open.
[Note] The contact capacity of each input/output terminal is DC24V/10mA - 100mA. Don't connect the equipment except for this range. The use exceeding contact capacity causes failure. In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for connect to the controller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the controller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.
[Note] If a stop signal or servo OFF signal is input simultaneously with a door switch open/emergency stop input, the error, H056n Servo sys. error (A/D) may occur. When a door switch open/emergency stop is input, the robot turns off the servo after it stops. It is unnecessary to input a stop signal or servo OFF signal. To input a stop signal or servo OFF signal with a door switch open/emergency stop input, wait for 100ms or more after a door switch open/emergency stop input.
Pin number assignment of each terminal and the circuit diagram are shown in Fig. 3-10 (CR750) or Fig. 3-14 (CR751).
3.6.1 Connection of the external emergency stop The external emergency stop input and door switch input and enabling device input are opened at shipment as shown in Fig. 3-10 (CR750) or Fig. 3-14 (CR751). Connect the external emergency stop switch and door switch with the following procedure.
And, the example of the connection and notes of the emergency stop are described in Page 216, "6.1.7 Examples of safety measures" Refer to it together
[Caution] The emergency stop circuit is duplicated inside the controller. The emergency stop switch uses a double contact-type switch, so please be sure to fix both of the contacts to the connector pins as shown below in order to ensure the wiring is duplicated. An error will continue to occur in the event that only one of the pins is connected.
1) Please prepare the emergency stop switch, door switch and enabling device. a) External emergency switch
CR750 controller ..........CNUSR11 connector "between 3 and 4" and CNUSR12 Connector "between 3 and 4". CR751 controller ..........CNUSR1 connector "between 2 and 27" and "between 7 and 32".
b) Door switch CR750 controller ..........CNUSR11 connector "between 7 and 8" and CNUSR12 connector "between 7 and 8". CR751 controller ..........CNUSR1 connector "between 4 and 29" and "between 9 and 34".
c) Enabling device CR750 controller ..........CNUSR11 connector "between 9 and 10" and CNUSR12 connector "between 9 and 10". CR751 controller ..........CNUSR1 connector "between 5 and 30" and "between 10 and 35".
[Caution] Be sure to use a shield cable for the emergency stop wiring cable. And when operating in an environ- ment that is easily affected by noise, be sure to fix the attached ferrite core (model number:
Item Name Function
Input Emergency stop Applies the emergency stop. Dual emergency line
Input Special stop input Applies the stop. Refer to Page 152, "3.6.2 Special stop input (SKIP)"
Input Door switch Servo-off. Dual line, normal close (Page 154, "3.6.3 Door switch function")
Input Enabling device Servo-off. Dual line, normal close (Page 154, "3.6.4 Enabling device function")
Output Robot error output Contactor is opening during error occurrence.
Output Emergency stop output The point of contact opens under occurrence of emergency stop of external input signal, emergency
stop of OP, emergency stop of T/B.
Output Mode output MANUAL mode: contactor is opening, AUTOMATIC mode: contactor is closing.
Output Magnet contactor control
connector output for addi- tion axes
When an additional axis is used, the servo ON/OFF status of the additional axis can be synchronized
with the robot arm. (Page 163, "3.9 Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition
axes")
3-145 Emergency stop input and output etc.
3 Controller
E04SR301334, manufacturer: Seiwa Electric Mfg. Co., Ltd.). Be sure to place the ferrite core more than 30 cm from the connecting terminal section.
Make sure there are no mistakes in the wiring. Connecting differently to the way specified in the manual can result in errors, such as the emergency stop not being released. In order to prevent errors occurring, please be sure to check that all functions (such as the teaching box emergency stop, customer emergency stop, and door switch) are working properly after the wiring setup is completed.
You should always connect doubly connection of the emergency stop, the door switch, and the enabling switch. In connection of only one side, if the relay of customer use should break down, it may not function correctly. The robot output contacts (error output, emergency stop output, mode output, addition axis contactor control output) are duplicated output contacts that are wired in series. As with emergency stop switches and door switches, ensure that all connections to customer devices are duplicated to achieve redundancy.
Please make sure to wire the multiple emergency stop switches so that they each function independently. Check and make sure that the emergency stop doesn't only function under an AND condition (when multiple emergency stop switches are ON at the same time).
(1) CR750 controller
Fig.3-9 Emergency stop cable connection (CR750)
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
30cm
2
CNUSR11
CNUSR12
CNUSR11 connector
Within 30 cm
Ferrite core
Pass twice
CNUSR12 connector
3 Controller
Emergency stop input and output etc. 3-146
Fig.3-10 External emergency stop connection (CR750)
Place the emergency stop switch in an easily operable position, and be sure to wire it to the emergency stop correctly by referencing Page 216, "6.1.7 Examples of safety measures". This is a necessary measure in order to ensure safe operation so that the robot can be stopped immediately by pressing the emergency stop switch in the event that the robot malfunctions.
CNUSR11
CNUSR2
10
9
8
7
3
4
2
CNUSR11+24V
Relay
+24V
24G
24G
24G
RA +24V
Relay RA
Relay RA
TB
+24V
Relay
+24V
24G
24G
24G
RA +24V
RelayRA
Relay RA
14
13
12
11
17
41
16
CNUSR12
14
13
12
11
1
5
6
10
9
8
7
3
4
2
1
5
6
CNUSR12
OP
24G
10F
24G
10F
Please refer to the example of safety measures of "Standard Specifications Manual".
()
Please do not carry out an insulation pressure test. Moreover, it becomes the cause of failure if it connects incorrectly.
CAUTION
Internal circuit structure (Controller side)(Customer) (Customer)
Mode output
Mode output
Robot error output
Robot error output
Emergency stop output
Emergency stop output
Short
External emergency stop input
Short
Door switch input
Enabling device input
Short
External emergency stop input
Short
Door switch input
Enabling device input
TB emer- gency stop
OP emer- gency stop
*1) This terminal is opened at factory shipping (unconnected). If power supply inside the controller is used, short-circuit the terminal. *2) This terminal can be used only for the external emergency stop input to the controller. The terminal cannot be used for the output
signal of OP emergency stop or TB emergency stop because the controller's internal circuit contains the input detection circuit and a capacitor. (Do not use the terminal for other purposes such as monitoring the test pulse outputs, or a false detection may occur.)
*1)
*1)
*1)
*1)
[Note] In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for connect to the con- troller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the controller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.
Input detection
circuit
*2)
*2) Input detection
circuit
CAUTION
3-147 Emergency stop input and output etc.
3 Controller
Fig.3-11 Method of wiring for external emergency stop connection (CR750 (CNUSR11/12))
Makes sure that there is no mistake when connecting to the target connectors. Connecting incorrectly will result in the robot breaking down or malfunctioning. The connector on the controller side that connects to the user wiring connector is CNUSR11 or CNUSR12. Be careful not to connect to CNUSR13 as the robot will not operate properly.
CNUSR11
CNUSR12
Driver
*Recommendation driver size: 2.5mm.
Cable fixing screw
Cable insert point
7mm
A
View A
161
Connector fixing screw
(Two places)
Pin number of connector
Connecting cable
(AWG #26-16 (0.14mm-1.5mm2))
Connection procedure Insert the connection cable into the appropriate pin of the user wiring connector that accompanies the product. Fix it securely with a screw and connect the connector to the CNUSR11/CNUSR12 connector at the back of the controller.
Please use an AWG #26 to 16 (0.14 to 1.5mm2) connector cable.
1) Prepare the user wiring connector that accompanies the product. 2) Loosen the cable fixing screw at the point where the cable is to be inserted. Please use a screwdriver head
with a width of 2.5mm to loosen the screw. 3) Peel the insulation of the connecting cable to 7mm, and insert it into the cable slot of the corresponding con-
nector. 4) Be sure to fix the inserted cable securely by fastening a cable fixing screw.
(tightening torque of 0.22 to 0.25Nm) 5) After the necessary cables save been fixed, connect the connector to the connector (CNUSR11/12) that cor-
responds with the controller. Connect so that the cable fixing screw is comes on top, and make sure to fix securely by fastening connector fixing screws in two places. A screwdriver head with a width of 2.5mm should be used to fix screws (tightening torque of 0.22 to 0.25Nm).
This concludes the connection procedure.
Connector for user wiring
Reference: CNUSR13 (Connect the encoder, when using the tracking function)
* The controller is an example.
CAUTION
3 Controller
Emergency stop input and output etc. 3-148
Fig.3-12 Method of wiring for external emergency stop connection (CR750 (CNUSR2))
When soldering please take care to only connect to the specified pin number. Connecting to a different pin number or short-circuiting with another pin will result in the robot breaking down or malfunctioning.
CNUSR2
3mm
A
View A Plug
Connector cover
Connecting cable
(AWG #30-24 (0.05mm2-0.2mm2))
Connection procedure Solder the pins of the user wiring connector that accompanies the product, and connect the connector to the CNUSR2 connector at the back of the controller. For the connection cables, please use AWG #30 to 24 (0.05 to
0.2mm2).
1) Loosen the two fixing screws on the user wiring connector that accompanies the product, and remove the con- nector cover.
2) Peel the insulation of the connecting cable to 3mm, and solder it the appropriate connector pin number. 3) After the necessary cables have been soldered, re-fix the connector cover using the same fixing screws and
make sure it is fastened securely. 4) Connect the connector to the corresponding connector (CNUSR2) on the controller. With pin number 1 facing
to the upper right, insert firmly until you hear the connectors latch click in to place.
This concludes the connection procedure.
Cover fixing screw (Two places)
Remove the connector cover
Pin number of plug25 1
50 26
SolderingConnector for user wiring
* The controller is an example.
CAUTION
3-149 Emergency stop input and output etc.
3 Controller
(2) CR751 controller
Fig.3-13 Emergency stop cable connection (CR751)
CNUSR1
30cm
2
CNU connector
Within 30 cm
Ferrite core
Pass twice
3 Controller
Emergency stop input and output etc. 3-150
Fig.3-14 External emergency stop connection (CR751)
Place the emergency stop switch in an easily operable position, and be sure to wire it to the emergency stop correctly by referencing Page 216, "6.1.7 Examples of safety measures". This is a necessary measure in order to ensure safe operation so that the robot can be stopped immediately by pressing the emergency stop switch in the event that the robot malfunctions.
CNUSR1
CNUSR2
CNUSR1+24V
Relay
+24V
24G
24G
24G
RA +24V
Relay RA
Relay RA
TB
+24V
Relay
+24V
24G
24G
24G
RA +24V
Relay RA
Relay RA
43
18
17
41
16
44
19
42
17
20
45 27
28
4
29
5
30
3
2
1
26
32
33
9
34
35
8
7
6
31
10
24G
10F
24G
10F
Please refer to the example of safety measures of "Standard Specifications Manual".
Please do not carry out an insulation pressure test. Moreover, it becomes the cause of failure if it connects incorrectly.
CAUTION
Internal circuit structure (Controller side) (Customer)
Mode output
Mode output
Robot error output
Robot error output
Emergency stop output
Emergency stop output
Short
External emergency stop input
Short
Door switch input
Enabling device input
Short
External emergency stop input
Short
Door switch input
Enabling device input
TB emergency stop
(Customer)
*1)
*1)
*1)
*1)
*2)
*2)
Input detection
circuit
Input detection
circuit
*1) This terminal is opened at factory shipping (unconnected). If power supply inside the controller is used, short-circuit the terminal. *2) This terminal can be used only for the external emergency stop input to the controller. The terminal cannot be used for the output
signal of OP emergency stop or TB emergency stop because the controller's internal circuit contains the input detection circuit and a capacitor. (Do not use the terminal for other purposes such as monitoring the test pulse outputs, or a false detection may occur.)
[Note] In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for connect to the con- troller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the controller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.
CAUTION
3-151 Emergency stop input and output etc.
3 Controller
Fig.3-15 Method of wiring for external emergency stop connection (CR751 (CNUSR1/2))
When soldering please take care to only connect to the specified pin number. Connecting to a different pin number or short-circuiting with another pin will result in the robot breaking down or malfunctioning. The connectors on the controller side are CNUSR1 (upper side) and CNUSR2 (lower side). Makes sure that there is no mistake when connecting to the target connectors. Connecting incorrectly will result in the robot breaking down or malfunctioning.
CNUSR1
CNUSR2
3mm
A
View APlug Connector cover
Connecting cable
(AWG #30#24(0.05mm0.2mm2))
Cover fixing screw (Two places)
Remove the connector cover
Pin number of plug25 1
50 26
SolderingConnector for user wiring
Connection procedure Solder the user wiring connector that accompanies the product to the corresponding pin, and connect it to the CNUSR1 or CNUSR2 connector at the back of the controller. For the connection cable, please use AWG #30 to 24
(0.05 to 0.2mm2).
1) Loosen the 2 fixing screws on the user wiring connector that accompanies the product, and remove the con- nector cover.
2) Peel the insulation of the connecting cable to 3mm, and solder it the appropriate connector pin number. 3) After the necessary cable has been soldered, re-fix the connector cover sing the same fixing screws and make
sure it is fastened securely. 4) Connect the connector to the corresponding connector (CNUSR1 or CNUSR2) on the controller. With pin num-
ber 1 facing to the upper right, insert firmly until you hear the connectors latch click in to place.
This concludes the connection procedure.
CAUTION
3 Controller
Emergency stop input and output etc. 3-152
3.6.2 Special stop input (SKIP) The skip is the input signal to stop the robot. The pin 9, 34 of the CNUSR2 connector shown in Fig. 3-16
(CR750) or Fig. 3-17 (CR751).
Table 3-4 Special stop input electric specification
(1) CR750 controller
Fig.3-16 Connection of the special-stop-input (CR750)
Item Specifications Internal circuit
Type DC input
No. of input point 1
Insulation method Photo-coupler insulation
Rated input voltage DC24V
Rated input current Approx. 11mA
Working voltage range DC 21.6 26.4V
Ripple rate within 5%
ON voltage/ON current DC 8V or more / 2mA or more
OFF voltage/OFF current DC 4V or less / 1mA or less
Input resistance Approx. 2.2
Response
time
OFF ON 1ms or less
ON OFF 1ms or less
Common method 1 point per common
External wire connection method Connector
330
2.2k
V(COM)
1A
1B
Input
9
34
CNUSR2
2
30cm
* Connects with CNUSR2 connector with soldering. Refer to Page 148 "Fig. 3-12: Method of wiring for external emergency stop connection (CR750 (CNUSR2))".
Within 30cm
CNUSR2 connector
Ferrite core
Pass twice
Note) In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for con- nect to the controller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the con- troller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.
3-153 Emergency stop input and output etc.
3 Controller
(2) CR751 controller
Fig.3-17 Connection of the special-stop-input (CR751)
30cm
2
CNUSR2
* Connects with CNUSR2 connector with soldering. Refer to Page 151 "Fig. 3-15: Method of wiring for external emergency stop connection (CR751 (CNUSR1/2))".
Within 30cm CNUSR2 connector
Ferrite core
Pass twice
Note) In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for con- nect to the controller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the con- troller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.
3 Controller
Emergency stop input and output etc. 3-154
3.6.3 Door switch function This function retrieves the status of the switch installed on the door of the safety fence, etc., and stops the robot when the door is opened. This differs from an emergency stop in that the servo turns OFF when the door is opened and an error does not occur. Follow the wiring example shown in Page 146 "Fig. 3-10: External emergency stop connection (CR750)" or Page 150 "Fig. 3-14: External emergency stop connection (CR751)", and Page 216, "6.1.7 Examples of safety measures". Those figure explains the wire is contact closes when the door is closed. Details of this function according to the robot status are shown below.
*During automatic operation ..............When the door is opened, the servo turns OFF and the robot stops. An error occurs. The process of the restoration: Close the door, reset the alarm, turn on the servo, and restart
*During teaching........................................ Even when the door is opened, the servo can be turned ON and the robot moved using the teaching pendant.
Fig.3-18 Door switch function
3.6.4 Enabling device function When the abnormalities occur in teaching operations etc., the robot's servo power can be immediately cut only by
switch operation of the enabling device*1) (servo-off), and the safety increases. To use the robot safely, please be sure to connect the enabling device.
(1) When door is opening Please do teaching by two-person operations. One person has T/B, the other has enabling device. Turn on the servo power, in the condition that both of switches are pushed. (Enable switch of T/B and enabling device) Then the jog operation will be available. You can off the servo power only by releasing the switch of the enabling device. And, care that the servo-on and releasing the brake cannot be done in the condition that the switch of the enabling device is released.
(2) When door is closing You can turn on the servo power by operation of only T/B. In this case perform jog operation outside the safeguard sure.
*1) Recommendation products: HE1G-L20MB (IDEC)
Safeguard
Turns OFF the servo
STOP!!
Open
TEACH
AUTO (Ext.)
AUTO (Op.)
Open
TEACH
AUTO (Ext.)
AUTO (Op.)
The servo can be turned ON/Off by turning the enable switch ON/OFF.
Safeguard
Teaching pendant
Robot arm (Example)
Robot arm (Example)
MODE MANUAL AUTOMATIC
Auto executing
Teaching
MODE MANUAL AUTOMATIC
3-155 Emergency stop input and output etc.
3 Controller
(3) Automatic Operation/Jog Operation/Brake Release and Necessary Switch Settings The following is a description of various operations performed on the robot and switch settings that are required.
Table 3-5 Various operations and necessary switch settings
Fig.3-19 Brake release operation
No Operation
Related switch settings Note1)
Note1) "-" in the table indicates that the state of switch concerned does not matter. Refer to the following for operation of each switch.
Mode of CR750 controller: ...............................................................................Page 129, "3.2 Names of each part" Mode of CR751 controller: .........................................................Page 156, "3.7 Mode changeover switch input"
T/B enable/disable:..................................................................................... Page 167, "(1) Teaching pendant (T/B)" T/B enable switch:....................................................................................... Page 167, "(1) Teaching pendant (T/B)" Enabling device input terminal: .................................................Page 216, "6.1.7 Examples of safety measures" Door switch input terminal: ........................................................Page 216, "6.1.7 Examples of safety measures"
DescriptionMode of controller
T/B enable/
disable
T/B enable switch
Enabling device input
terminal
Door switch input terminal
1 Jog operation Manual Enable ON Close(ON)
If the enabling device input is set to
Close (On), the state of door switch input does not matter.
2 Jog operation Note2)
Note2) Jog operation, if door switch input is set for Close (Door Close), must be performed outside the safety bar- rier.
Manual Enable ON Open(OFF) Close
(Door Close)
If the enabling device input is set to
Open (Off), door switch input must be
in a state of Close
3 Brake release Note3)
Note3) It is imperative that brake release operation be carried out by two persons. One person turns on the enabling device ("Close" on the enabling device input terminal) while the other manipulates the T/B. Brake release can be effected only when both of the enabling switch device and the T/B enable switch are placed in intermediate position (lightly gripped position). At this point, the state of door switch input does not mat- ter.
Manual Enable ON Close(ON) Irrespective of the state of door switch input, enabling device input
must be in a state of Close (On).
4 Automatic operation
Automatic Disable Close
(Door Close) Door switch input must always be in a state of Close (Door Close).
Door in Open state
Upon the release of brake, the robot arm may fall under its own weight depending on the axis which has been released. For added safety, provide support or take other precaution to prevent the falling of the arm.
CAUTION
T/B being manipulated
Enabling device being manipulated
3 Controller
Mode changeover switch input 3-156
3.7 Mode changeover switch input
Connect the key switch of customer prepared and change the right of robots operation by switch operation.
The key switch can be installed in the operation panel of customer preparation.
AUTOMATIC ......................The operation from external equipment becomes available. Operation which needs the right of operation from T/B cannot be performed. It is necessary to set the parameter for the rights of operation to connection with external equipment. Refer to the separate volume, "Instruction Manual/Detailed Explanation of Functions and Operations" for detail.
MANUAL ..............................When T/B is available, only the operation from T/B becomes available. Operation which needs the right of operation from external equipment cannot be performed.
Fig.3-20 Mode changeover switch image figure (CR751)
(1) Specification of the key switch interface The function and specification of the key switch interface are shown below.
MODE MANUAL AUTOMATIC
Mode changeover switch (Customer-prepared)
CNUSR1
Table 3-6 Function of the key switch interface
Pin number and Function (Connector: CNUSR1) Change mode Note1)
Note1) The mode changes by both opening or both closing between 49-24 pin and between 50-25 pin. When input
states differ between two lines, error H0044 (OP Mode key line is faulty) will occur.
Pin number Function MANUAL AUTOMATIC
49 1st line KEY input
Open Close24 Internal power supply of 1st line KEY input
+24V output
50 2nd line KEY input
Open Close25 Internal power supply of 2nd line KEY input
+24V output
[Note] For the input/output cable (CNUSR connector cable) that connects customer's system and the controller, prevent ground faults from occurring at the + side of the 24V power supply prepared by customer. A ground fault may lead to a failure of the protection device in the controller.
3-157 Mode changeover switch input
3 Controller
Fig.3-21 Mode selector switch connection diagram
Table 3-7 Specification of the mode changeover switch input
Item Specification Remarks
Rated voltage DC24V Supply from the controller.
Current rating Approx. 10mA Select the switch or button which operates normally in 24V/10mA.
Input resistance Approx. 2.2k
Response time (OFF->ON) Approx. 15ms Example: The response time the program starts, after pushing the run button.
Common method 1 point per common
Connection method Connector
Conformity electric wire size AWG#24 to #30 0.2 to 0.05 mm2
Maker/Type - Manufacturer: 3M / 10150-3000PE, 10350-52Y0-008 (cover)
+24V
24
49
25
50
+24V
Input detection circuit
Input detection circuit
Limiting resistor
Limiting resistor
Mode selector switch
Mode selector switch
Limiting resistor
Limiting resistor
3 Controller
Mode changeover switch input 3-158
(2) Connection of the mode changeover switch input
Fig.3-22 Connection of the mode changeover switch input (CR751)
CNUSR1
3mm
Connection procedure Solder the user wiring connector that accompanies the product to the corresponding pin, and connect it to the CNUSR1 connector at the back of the controller. For the connection cable, please use AWG #30 to 24 (0.05 to
0.2mm2).
1) Loosen the 2 fixing screws on the user wiring connector that accompanies the product, and remove the con- nector cover.
2) Peel the insulation of the connecting cable to 3mm, and solder it the appropriate connector pin number. 3) After the necessary cable has been soldered, re-fix the connector cover sing the same fixing screws and
make sure it is fastened securely. 4) Connect the connector to the corresponding connector (CNUSR1) on the controller. With pin number 1 facing
to the upper right, insert firmly until you hear the connectors latch click in to place.
This concludes the connection procedure.
Cover fixing screw (Two places)
25 1
50 26
Connector cover
A
Plug
Remove the connector cover Connector for user wiring
View A Pin number of plug
Soldering
Connecting cable
(AWG #30 #24(0.05mm2 to 0.2mm2))
3-159 Additional Axis Function
3 Controller
3.8 Additional Axis Function
This controller is equipped with an additional axis interface for controlling an additional axis when a traveling axis or rotary table is added to the robot. A maximum of eight axes of servo motors can be controlled at the same time by connecting a general-purpose servo amplifier (MR-J3-B, MR-J4-B series) that supports Mitsubishi's SSCNET III. Refer to the separate "Additional axis function Instruction Manual" for details on the additional axis function.
3.8.1 Wiring of the Additional Axis Interface Table 3-8 shows the connectors for additional axes inside the controller. Fig. 3-23 (CR750) and Fig. 3-24 (CR751) shows a connection example (configuration example).
Table 3-8 Dedicated connectors inside the controller
(1) CR750 controller
Fig.3-23 Example of addition axis connection (CR750)
Name Connector name Details
Connector for additional axes ExtOPT The connector for connecting the general-purpose servo amplifier.
ExtOPT
CN1ACN1B
CN1A CN1A
CN1B
SSCNET
SSCNET
CN1B
ExtOPT
CNUSR11
CNUSR12
Servo amplifier
SSCNET III cable
Cap
* It cannot communicate, if connection of CN1A and CN1B is mistaken.
To CN1A connector
CN R 1 connector
CNU 12 connector
Servo amplifier
SSCNET III cable
To CN1B connector
To CN1A connector
To ExtOP connector To CN1B connector
Emergency stop output (Refer to "3.6Emergency stop input and output etc.") * Connect with a forced stop input of a servo ampli-
fier.
Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition axes (Refer to "3.9Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition axes")
3 Controller
Additional Axis Function 3-160
(2) CR751 controller
Fig.3-24 Example of addition axis connection (CR751)
ExtOPT
CN1ACN1B
CN1A CN1A
CN1B
SSCNET
SSCNET
CN1B
ExtOPT
CNUSR1
CNUSR2
Servo amplifier Servo amplifier
SSCNET III cable
S CNET III cable
To ExtOPT connector
To CN1A con- nector
To CN1A connector
To CN1B connector
To CN1B connector
Cap
* It cannot communicate, if connection of CN1A and CN1B is mistaken.
CNUSR1 connector
C 2 connector
Emergency stop output (Refer to "3.6Emergency stop input and output etc.") * Connect with a forced stop input of a servo amplifier.
Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition axes (Refer to "3.9Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition axes")
3-161 Additional Axis Function
3 Controller
(3) Example of the installation of the noise filter 1) EMC filter (recommended)
Please install the recommendation filter shown below according to the example of connection.
Fig.3-25 Example of EMC noise filter installation
1)
2)
Note1) For 1-phase 200V to 230VAC power supply, connect the power supply to L1, L2 and leave L3 open. There is no L3 for 1-phase 100 to 120 VAC power supply.
Note2) The example is when a surge protector is connected.
3 Controller
Additional Axis Function 3-162
2) Line noise filter
This filter is effective in suppressing noises radiated from the power supply side and output side of the
servo amplifier and also in suppressing high-frequency leakage current (zero-phase current) especially
within 0.5MHz to 5MHz band.
Fig.3-26 Example of noise filter installation
3-163 Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition axes
3 Controller
3.9 Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition axes
When an additional axis is used, the servo ON/OFF status of the additional axis can be synchronized with the servo ON/OFF status of the robot itself by using the output contact (AXMC) provided on the rear or inside of the controller and configuring a circuit so that the power to the servo amplifier for the additional axis can be turned off when this output is open. An example circuit is shown in "(1)Example circuit". An image of how to connect the controller connector is shown in "(2)Image of how to connect the controller connector". When you are using an additional axis, please perform appropriate circuit connections by referring to these draw- ings.
Refer to the separate "Additional axis function Instruction Manual" for details on the additional axis function.
Note1) you use the addition axis function as a user mechanism who became independent of the robot arm, please do not connect this output signal. Servo-on of the user mechanism may be unable.
(1) Example circuit CR750 controller
Fig.3-27 Example of circuit for addition axes of Magnet contactor control output (CR750 controller)
[Note] For the input/output cable (CNUSR connector cable) that connects customer's system and the controller, prevent ground faults from occurring at the + side of the 24V power supply prepared by customer. A ground fault may lead to a failure of the protection device in the controller. Bending or frictional forces may be applied to the input/output cable repeatedly depending on the system configuration or layout. In this case, use a flexible cable for the input/output cable. Note that a fixed cable may be broken, resulting in a ground fault.
3 Controller
Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition axes 3-164
CR751 controller
Fig.3-28 Example of circuit for addition axes of Magnet contactor control output (CR751 controller)
[Note] For the input/output cable (CNUSR connector cable) that connects customer's system and the controller, prevent ground faults from occurring at the + side of the 24V power supply prepared by customer. A ground fault may lead to a failure of the protection device in the controller. Bending or frictional forces may be applied to the input/output cable repeatedly depending on the system configuration or layout. In this case, use a flexible cable for the input/output cable. Note that a fixed cable may be broken, resulting in a ground fault.
3-165 Magnet contactor control connector output (AXMC) for addition axes
3 Controller
(2) Image of how to connect the controller connector CR750 controller
Fig.3-29 AXMC terminal connector (CR750)
CR751 controller
Fig.3-30 AXMC terminal connector (CR751)
30cm
2
CNUSR2
*Connects with CNUSR2 connector with soldering. Refer to Page 148 "Fig. 3-12: Method of wiring for external emergency stop connection (CR750
(CNUSR2))".
Within 30cm
Ferrite core Pass twice
CNUSR2 connector
30cm
2
CNUSR2
* The CNUSR2 connector is connected by soldering. Refer to Page 151 "Fig. 3-15: Method of wiring for external emergency stop connection (CR751 (CNUSR1/2))".
Within 30cm
Ferrite core Pass twice
CNUSR2 connector
3 Controller
3-166
3.10 Options
What are options? There are a variety of options for the robot designed to make the setting up process easier for user needs.
User installation is required for the options. Options come in two types: "set options" and "single options".
1 Set options......................................A combination of single options and parts that together, form a set for serving some purpose.
2 Single options.................................That are configured from the fewest number of required units of a part. Please choose user's purpose additionally.
3-167 Teaching pendant (T/B)
3 Controller
(1) Teaching pendant (T/B)
Order type: CR750 controller ......................... R32TB: Cable length 7m R32TB-15: Cable length 15m
CR751 controller ......................... R33TB: Cable length 7m R33TB-15: Cable length 15m
Outline This is used to create, edit and control the program, teach the operation position and for jog feed, etc.
For safety proposes, a 3-position enable switch is mounted.*1)
Configuration Table 3-9 Configuration device
Specifications Table 3-10 Specifications
*1) <3-position enable switch>
In ISO/10218 (1992) and JIS-B8433 (1993), this is defined as an "enable device". These standards specify that the robot operation using the teaching pendant is enabled only when the "enable device" is at a specified position.
With the Mitsubishi Electric industrial robot, the above "enable device" is configured of an "Enable/Disable switch" and "Enable switch".
The 3-position enable switch has three statuses. The following modes are entered according to the switch state.
a) "Not pressed".......................... The robot does not operate. *)
b) "Pressed lightly" .................... The robot can be operated and teaching is possible.
c) "Pressed with force"............ The robot does not operate. *)
*) Releasing or forcefully pressing the 3-position enable switch cuts power to the servos in the same way as when the emergency stop is input. This helps to ensure safety. Operations such as editing programs and displaying the robot's status are possible while the 3-position enable switch is released or forcefully pressed (excludes operating the robot).
Part name Type Qty. Mass (kg) Note1)
Note1) Mass indicates one set.
Remarks
CR750 controller
Teaching pendant R32TB Either one pc.
1.7 Cable length is 7m. Hand strap is attached.
R32TB-15 2.8 Cable length is 15m. Hand strap is attached.
CR751 controller
Teaching pendant R33TB Either one pc.
1.7 Cable length is 7m. Hand strap is attached.
R33TB-15 2.8 Cable length is 15m. Hand strap is attached.
Items Specifications Remarks
Outline dimensions 195(W) x 292(H) x 106(D) (refer to outline drawing)
Body color Dark gray
Mass Approx. 0.9kg (only arm, excluding cable)
Connection method Connection with controller and connector.
Interface RS-422
Display method LCD method: 24 characters x 8 lines, LCD illumination: with backlight At 8x8 font
Operation section 36 keys
3 Controller
Teaching pendant (T/B) 3-168
Fig.3-31 Outside dimensions of teaching pendant
Installation method The teaching pendant is connected to the T/B connector on the front of the controller.
Enable/Disable switch
Emergency stop
Enable switch
Operetion key
Body
Cable (with connector)
63 .5
LCD
2 9 1 .9
195.2
133
105.5
3-169 Teaching pendant (T/B)
3 Controller
Key layout and main functions
Fig.3-32 Teaching pendant key layout and main functions
[Emergency stop] switch ................ The robot servo turns OFF and the operation stops immediately. [Enable/Disable] switch .................. This switch changes the T/B key operation between enable and dis-
able. [Enable] switch.................................... When the [Enable/Disable] switch " " is enabled, and this key is
released or pressed with force, the servo will turn OFF, and the oper- ating robot will stop immediately.
LCD display panel .............................. The robot status and various menus are displayed. Status display lamp ........................... Display the state of the robot or T/B. [F1], [F2], [F3], [F4].......................... Execute the function corresponding to each function currently dis-
played on LCD. [FUNCTION] key ................................ Change the function display of LCD. [STOP] key........................................... This stops the program and decelerates the robot to a stop. [OVRD ][OVRD ] key ........... Change moving speed. Speed goes up by [OVRD ] key. Speed goes
down by [OVRD ] key [JOG] operation key......................... Move the robot according to jog mode. And, input the numerical value. [SERVO] key........................................ Press this key with holding AA key lightly, then servo power will turn
on. [MONITOR] key .................................. It becomes monitor mode and display the monitor menu. [JOG] key.............................................. It becomes jog mode and display the jog operation. [HAND] key........................................... It becomes hand mode and display the hand operation. [CHARCTER] key............................... This changes the edit screen, and changes between numbers and
alphabetic characters. [RESET] key......................................... This resets the error. The program reset will execute, if this key and
the EXE key are pressed. [ ][ ][ ][ ] key................ Moves the cursor each direction . [CLEAR] key ........................................ Erase the one character on the cursor position. [EXE] key............................................... Input operation is fixed. And, while pressing this key, the robot moves
when direct mode. Number/Character key.................... Erase the one character on the cursor position. And, inputs the num-
ber or character
3 Controller
Parallel I/O interface 3-170
(2) Parallel I/O interface
Order type 2D-TZ368 (Sink type)/2D-TZ378 (Source type)
Outline
This is used to expand the external inputs and outputs
The connecting cable with external equipment is not attached. Since we are preparing the external input-and-output cable (2D-CBL05 or 2D-CBL15) as the option, please use.
Notes)Although the combined use with the parallel input-and-output unit (2A-RZ361/2A- RZ371) of another option is also possible, please use the setup of the station number by the different number separately. The station number is automatically determined by the position of the option slot which installed this interface. (station number 0 to 1)
Configuration Table 3-11 Configuration device
Specifications Table 3-12 Electrical specifications of input circuits
Part name Type Qty. Mass (kg) Note1)
Note1) Mass indicates one set.
Remarks
Parallel I/O interface 2D-TZ368 Either
one pc.
0.4 Input/output 32 points/32 points 2D-TZ368 is sink type. 2D-TZ378 is source type.
2D-TZ378
Item Specification Internal circuit
Type DC input
Number of input points 32
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated input voltage DC12V DC24V
Rated input current Approx. 3mA Approx.9mA
Working voltage range DC10.2 26.4V
(Ripple factor should be less than 5)
ON voltage/ON current DC8V or more/2mA or more
OFF voltage/ OFF current DC4V or less/1mA or less
Input resistance Approx. 2.7k
Response time OFF-ON 10ms or less(DC24V)
ON-OFF 10ms or less(DC24V)
Common method 32 points per common
External cable connection
method
Connector
Input
+24V/+12V (COM)
2.7K
820
2.7K
820
24G/12G
Input
3-171 Parallel I/O interface
3 Controller
Table 3-13 Electrical specifications for the output circuits
The protection fuse of the output circuit prevents the failure at the time of the load short circuit and incorrect connection. The load connected of the customer should be careful not to exceed maximum rating current. The internal transistor may be damaged if maximum rating current is exceeded.
Installation method The expansion parallel input/output interface is installed in the controller. Refer to separate "Instruction Manual/ Controller setup, basic operation, and maintenance" for details on the installing method.
If it installs in the option SLOT of the controller, the station number will be assigned automatically.
SLOT1: station number 0 (0 to 31)
SLOT2: station number 1 (32 to 63)
If it uses together with parallel input-and-output unit 2A-RZ361/2A-RZ371, please do not overlap with the station number of the parallel input-and-output interface.
Fig.3-33 Parallel I/O interface installation position (CR750)
Item Specification Internal circuit
Type Transistor output
No. of output points 32
Insulation method Photo-coupler insulation
Rated load voltage DC12V/DC24V
Rated load voltage range DC10.2 30V (peak voltage DC30V)
Max. load current 0.1A/point (100%)
Leakage current at OFF Within 0.1mA
Max. voltage drop at ON DC0.9V(TYP.) Note1)
Note1) The maximum voltage drop value at signal ON. Refer to it for the equipment connected to the output circuit.
Respons
e time
OFF-ON 10ms or less(Resistance load) (hardware response time)
ON-OFF 10ms or less(Resistance load) (hardware response time)
Fuse rating Fuse 1.6A(one per common)
Replacement possible max. 3
Common method 16 points per common (common terminal: 2points)
External wire connection
method
Connector
External
power
supply
Voltage DC12/24V(DC10.2 30V)
Current 60mA(TYP.DC24V per common)(base drive current)
+24V/+12V
Output
24G/12G Fuse
+24V/+12V
24G/12G
Fuse
Output
Caution
Caution
SLOT2
SLOT1
3 Controller
Parallel I/O interface 3-172
Fig.3-34 Parallel I/O interface installation position (CR751)
Pin layout of connector
Fig.3-35 Pin layout of connector
Connector pin No. and signal assignment The station number is fixed by the slot to install and the allocation range of the general-purpose input-and- output signal is fixed.
Table 3-14 The slot number and the station number
The connector pin number of the parallel input-and-output interface installed in SLOT1 and signal number allocation are shown in Table 3-15 and Table 3-16. If it installs in other slots, please interpret and utilize.
Slot number Station number
Range of the general-purpose input-and-output signal
Connector <1> Connector <2>
SLOT1 0 Input 0 to 15 Output 0 to 15
Input 16 to 31 Output 16 to 31
SLOT2 1 Input 32 to 47 Output 32 to 47
Input 48 to 63 Output 48 to 63
SLOT1
SLOT2
1B
1A 20A
20B
1D
1C 20C
20D
Connector<2> Output 16 to 31 Input 16 to 31 (when station number 0)
Connector<1> Output 0 to 15 Input 0 to 15 (when station number 0)
3-173 Parallel I/O interface
3 Controller
Table 3-15 Connector<1> pin assignment list and external I/O cable (2D-CBL**) color(SLOT1)
Table 3-16 Connector<2> pin assignment list and external I/O cable (2D-CBL**) color(SLOT1)
Pin No.
Line color
Function name Pin No.
Line color
Function name
General-purpose Dedicated/power supply,
common General-purpose
Dedicated/power supply, common
1C Orange/Red a 24G/12G: For pins 5D-
20D
1D Orange/Black a +24V/+12V(COM): For
pins 5D-20D
2C Gray/Red a COM For pins
5C-20CNote1)
Note1) Sink type: +24V/+12V(COM), Source type: 24G/12G
2D Gray/Black a Reserved
3C White/Red a Reserved 3D White/Black a Reserved
4C Yellow/Red a Reserved 4D Yellow/Black a Reserved
5C Pink/Red a General-purpose input 15 5D Pink/Black a General-purpose output 15
6C Orange/Red b General-purpose input 14 6D Orange/Black b General-purpose output 14
7C Gray/Red b General-purpose input 13 7D Gray/Black b General-purpose output 13
8C White/Red b General-purpose input 12 8D White/Black b General-purpose output 12
9C Yellow/Red b General-purpose input 11 9D Yellow/Black b General-purpose output 11
10C Pink/Red b General-purpose input 10 10D Pink/Black b General-purpose output 10
11C Orange/Red c General-purpose input 9 11D Orange/Black c General-purpose output 9
12C Gray/Red c General-purpose input 8 12D Gray/Black c General-purpose output 8
13C White/Red c General-purpose input 7 13D White/Black c General-purpose output 7
14C Yellow/Red c General-purpose input 6 14D Yellow/Black c General-purpose output 6
15C Pink/Red c General-purpose input 5 Operation rights input
signal Note2)
Note2) The dedicated signal is assigned at shipping. It can change with the parameter.
15D Pink/Black c General-purpose output 5
16C Orange/Red d General-purpose input 4 Servo ON input signal Note2)
16D Orange/Black d General-purpose output 4
17C Gray/Red d General-purpose input 3 Start input Note2) 17D Gray/Black d General-purpose output 3 Operation rights output
signal Note2)
18C White/Red d General-purpose input 2 Error reset input signal Note2)
18D White/Black d General-purpose output 2 Error occurring output
signal Note2)
19C Yellow/Red d General-purpose input 1 Servo OFF input signal Note2)
19D Yellow/Black d General-purpose output 1 In servo ON output
signal Note2)
20C Pink/Red d General-purpose input 0 Stop input Note3)
Note3) The dedicated input signal (STOP) is assigned at shipping. The signal number is fixing.
20D Pink/Black d General-purpose output 0 Operating output Note2)
Pin No.
Line color
Function name Pin No.
Line color
Function name
General-purpose Dedicated/power supply,
common General-purpose
Dedicated/power supply, common
1A Orange/Red a 24G/12G: For pins 5B-
20B
1B Orange/Black a +24V/+12V(COM): For
pins 5B-20B
2A Gray/Red a COM For pins 5A-
20ANote1)
Note1) Sink type: +24V/+12V(COM), Source type: 24G/12G
2B Gray/Black a Reserved
3A White/Red a Reserved 3B White/Black a Reserved
4A Yellow/Red a Reserved 4B Yellow/Black a Reserved
5A Pink/Red a General-purpose input 31 5B Pink/Black a General-purpose output 31
6A Orange/Red b General-purpose input 30 6B Orange/Black b General-purpose output 30
7A Gray/Red b General-purpose input 29 7B Gray/Black b General-purpose output 29
8A White/Red b General-purpose input 28 8B White/Black b General-purpose output 28
9A Yellow/Red b General-purpose input 27 9B Yellow/Black b General-purpose output 27
10A Pink/Red b General-purpose input 26 10B Pink/Black b General-purpose output 26
11A Orange/Red c General-purpose input 25 11B Orange/Black c General-purpose output 25
12A Gray/Red c General-purpose input 24 12B Gray/Black c General-purpose output 24
13A White/Red c General-purpose input 23 13B White/Black c General-purpose output 23
14A Yellow/Red c General-purpose input 22 14B Yellow/Black c General-purpose output 22
15A Pink/Red c General-purpose input 21 15B Pink/Black c General-purpose output 21
16A Orange/Red d General-purpose input 20 16B Orange/Black d General-purpose output 20
17A Gray/Red d General-purpose input 29 17B Gray/Black d General-purpose output 19
18A White/Red d General-purpose input 18 18B White/Black d General-purpose output 18
19A Yellow/Red d General-purpose input 17 19B Yellow/Black d General-purpose output 17
20A Pink/Red d General-purpose input 16 20B Pink/Black d General-purpose output 16
3 Controller
Parallel I/O interface 3-174
Fig.3-36 Connection with a Mitsubishi PLC (Example of sink type)
Fig.3-37 Connection with a Mitsubishi PLC (Example of source type)
Parallel I/O interface (Output)
(Input)
60mA (+24V/+12V)
Output
Output
Fuse (24G/12G)
+24V
External power supply
X
COM
QX41(Mitsubishi programmable controller)
(COM)
Input2.7K
Input
External power supply
+24V
Y
+24V
QY41P (Mitsubishi programmable controller)
COM 24G
* The input/output circuit external power supply (24 VDC) must be prepared by the customer.
Note) In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for connect to the controller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the controller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.
Parallel I/O interface
(Output)
(Input)
60mA (+24V/+12V)
Output
Output
Fuse
(24G/12G)
+24V
External power supply
X
QX81 (Mitsubishi programmable controller)
(COM)
Input2.7K
Input
External power supply
+24V
Y
+24V
QY81P (Mitsubishi programmable controller)
24G
* The input/output circuit external power supply (24 VDC) must be prepared by the customer.
Note) In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for connect to the controller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the controller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.
COM
3-175 External I/O cable
3 Controller
(3) External I/O cable
Order type 2D-CBL Note The numbers in the boxes refer to the length. 05: 5m, 15: 15m
Outline This is the dedicated cable used to connect an external peripheral device to the con- nector on the parallel I/O interface. For parallel I/O unit is another option 2A-CBL.**. One end matches the connector on the parallel input/output unit, and the other end is free. Connect the peripheral device's input/output signal using the free end.
One cable correspond to the input 16 points and output 16 points.
Two cables are needed to connection of (input 32 points and output 32 points) with built-in standard.
Configuration Table 3-17 Configuration device
Specifications Table 3-18 Specifications
Connector pin numbers and cable colors Table 3-19 Connector pin numbers and cable colors
Notes Pin number of connector<1> are 1C, 2C, ....20C, 1D, 2D, ....20D, connector<2> are 1A, 2A, ....20A, 1B, 2B, ....20B.
Part name Type Qty. Mass (kg) Note1)
Note1) Mass indicates one set.
Remarks
External I/O cable 2D-CBL 1 pc. 0.7(5m)
1.84(15m) 5m or 15m
Items Specifications
Number of cables x cable size AWG #28 x 20P 40 cores
Total length 5m, 15m
Pin no. Cable colors Pin no. Cable colors Pin no. Cable colors Pin no. Cable colors
1A/C Orange/Red a 11A/C Orange/Red c 1B/D Orange/Black a 11B/D Orange/Black c
2A/C Gray/Red a 12A/C Gray/Red c 2B/D Gray/Black a 12B/D Gray/Black c
3A/C White/Red a 13A/C White/Red c 3B/D White/Black a 13B/D White/Black c
4A/C Yellow/Red a 14A/C Yellow/Red c 4B/D Yellow/Black a 14B/D Yellow/Black c
5A/C Pink/Red a 15A/C Pink/Red c 5B/D Pink/Black a 15B/D Pink/Black c
6A/C Orange/Red b 16A/C Orange/Red d 6B/D Orange/Black b 16B/D Orange/Black d
7A/C Gray/Red b 17A/C Gray/Red d 7B/D Gray/Black b 17B/D Gray/Black d
8A/C White/Red b 18A/C White/Red d 8B/D White/Black b 18B/D White/Black d
9A/C Yellow/Red b 19A/C Yellow/Red d 9B/D Yellow/Black b 19B/D Yellow/Black d
10A/C Pink/Red b 20A/C Pink/Red d 10B/D Pink/Black b 20B/D Pink/Black d
3 Controller
External I/O cable 3-176
Connections and outside dimensions The sheath of each signal cable (40 lines) is color indicated and marked with dots. Refer to the cable color speci- fications in "Table 3-28: Connector pin numbers and cable colors" when making the connections.
Fig.3-38 Connections and outside dimensions
(Eg.) Pin number: color indication
Orange Red a
Type of dot mark (see figure below)
Color of dot mark
Color of sheath
Line color type
a type
Pattern of the print mark
One dot
Two dots
Three dots
Four dots
b type
c type
d type
1A/C 1B/D
20A/C 20B/D
or
Plug (Fujitsu Ltd) Connector FCN-361J040-AU
Cover FCN-360C040-B
3-177 Parallel I/O unit
3 Controller
(4) Parallel I/O unit
Order type: 2A-RZ361(Sink type) 2A-RZ371(Source type)
Outline This is used to expand the external inputs and outputs. One one equal with this unit is built into the control unit among controllers the standard.
The connection cable is not included. .Prepare the optional external input/output cable (2A-CBL05 or 2A-CBL15).
Use 2A-RZ361 if the external input/output signal logic is of the sink type and 2A- RZ371 for source type signal logic.
Notes) Although the combined use with the parallel I/O interface (2D-TZ368) of another option is also possible, please use the setup of the station number by the different number separately. The station number is auto- matically fixed by the position of the option slot which installed the parallel I/O interface in 0-1.
Configuration Table 3-20 Configuration device
Specifications 1) The parallel I/O interface (2D-TZ368) of another option, and the a maximum of eight pieces in all. (One station
occupies one unit.) 2) The power supply (24V) must be prepared by the customer and connected with the power connection cable
(DCcable-2) A separate 24V power supply is required for the input/output circuit wiring.
Table 3-21 Electrical specifications of input circuits
Part name Type Qty. Mass (kg) Note1)
Note1) Mass indicates one set.
Remarks
Parallel I/O unit 2A-RZ361 Either one
pc.
0.7 Input/output 32 points/32 points 2A-RZ361 is the sink type. 2A-RZ371 is the source type.2A-RZ371 0.7
Robot I/O link connec- tion connector
NETcable-1 2 sets - Connector with pins. The cable must be prepared and wired by the customer.
Power connection con- nector
DCcable-2 1 set - Connector with pins. The cable must be prepared and wired by the customer.
Terminator R-TM 1 pc. - 100(1/4W)
Item Specification Internal circuit
Type DC input
Number of input points 32
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated input voltage 12VDC 24VDC
Rated input current Approx 3mA Approx 7mA
Working voltage range 10.2 to 26.4VDC(Ripple factor should be less than 5%.)
ON voltage/ON current 8VDC or more/ 2mA or more
OFF voltage/ OFF current 4VDC or less/ 1mA or less
Input resistance Approx. 3.3k
Response time OFF-ON 10ms or less (24VDC)
ON-OFF 10ms or less (24VDC)
Common method 8 points per common
External cable connection method Connector
+24V/+12V (COM)
3.3K
820 Input
3.3K
820
24G/12G
Input
3 Controller
Parallel I/O unit 3-178
Table 3-22 Electrical specifications for the output circuits
The output circuit protective fuses prevent failure in case of load short-circuit and improper connections. Please do not connect loads that cause the current to exceed the maximum rated current. If the maximum rated current is exceeded, the internal transistors may be damaged.
Inputs the power supply for control (DCcable-2) then inputs the controllers power supply.
Item Specification Internal circuit
Type Transistor output
No. of output points 32
Insulation method Photo-coupler insulation
Rated load voltage 12VDC/24VDC
Rated load voltage range 10.2 to 30VDC(peak voltage 30VDC)
Max. load current 0.1A/point (100)
Leakage current at OFF 0.1mA or less
Max. voltage drop at ON 0.9VDC(TYP.) Note1)
Note1) The maximum voltage drop value at signal ON. Refer to it for the equipment connected to the output circuit.
Response time
OFF-ON 2ms or less
(hardware response time)
ON-OFF 2ms or less
(Resistance load) (hardware response time)
Fuse rating Fuse 3.2A (one per common) Replacement not possible
Common method 8 points per common (common terminal: 4 points)
External wire connection
method Connector
External power
supply
Voltage 12VDC/24VDC(10.2 to 30VDC)
Current 60mA (TYP. 24VDC per common) (base drive current)
+24V/+12V
24G/12G
Output
Fuse
+24V/+12V
24G/12G
Output
Fuse
CAUTION
CAUTION
3-179 Parallel I/O unit
3 Controller
Fig.3-39 Specifications for the connection cable
NETcable-1 (Network cable)
Pin No. RIO1/2 RIO1/2 Pin No.
TXRXH TXRXH
TXRXL TXRXL
SG(GND) SG(GND)
FG
DCcable-2 (Power cable)
Pin No. DCIN
24V 24V Power
24G
FG(PE)
Connected the frame ground or protect ground
R-TM (Terminator)
Pin No. RIO1/2 100
TXRXH
TXRXL
SG(GND)
List of parts and manufacturer
Type Connector type Contact type Resistant Manufacturer
NETcable-1 1-178288-3 (2) 1-175218-2 (6) Tyco Electronics (Black connector)
51103-0300 (1) 50351-8100 (3) MOLEX (White connector)
DCcable-2 2-178288-3 (1) 1-175218-5 (3) Tyco Electronics (Black connector)
R-TM 1-178288-3 (1) 1-175218-3 (2) 100(1/4W) (1) Equivalent to KOA.
Note 2)
Note 1)
Note 1) The 24V power supply is prepared by customer (The power consumption is approx. 0.3A.) In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for con- nect to the controller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the controller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.
Note 2) The cable for general purpose can be used to the network cable. However, use the twisted shield cable of
AWG#22(0.3mm2) or more.
Connector for CR750/CR751: 51103-0300
3 Controller
Parallel I/O unit 3-180
Installation method The expansion parallel input/output unit is installed outside of the controller. Connect with the network
connection cable (NETcable-1) from the RIO connector in the rear/into of the controller.(Terminator is connected at the time of shipment)
Fig.3-40 Installing the parallel I/O unit (CR750)
6 0 5 4 6
1 5 0
6 1 56
2 -
6
1 68
1 2 8
(1 7 5 )
1 00
(40 )
<2 A -R Z 3 61 >
2A - R Z 36 1/ 2 A - R Z 37 1
6
<2 A -R Z 3 71 >
RIO
Installation dimensions of 2A-RZ361/2ARZ-371 (The controller outside installation.)
RIO connector
Upside
Wiring space
H e at
r ad
ia ti o n
sp ac
e
2-M5 screw
Downside
R ad
ia ti o n /w
ir in
g sp
ac e
Control panel installation dimensions
3-181 Parallel I/O unit
3 Controller
Fig.3-41 Installing the parallel I/O unit (CR751)
6 0 5 4 6
1 5 0
6 1 5 6
2 -
6
1 6 8
1 2 8
(1 7 5 )
1 00
(40 )
<2 A -R Z 36 1>
2A - R Z 36 1/2 A -R Z 3 71
6
<2 A -R Z 37 1>
RIORIO connector
Upside
Wiring space
H e at
r ad
ia ti o n
sp ac
e
2 M5 screw
Downside
R ad
ia ti o n / w
ir in
g sp
ac e
Control panel installation dimensions
Installation dimensions of 2A-RZ361/2ARZ-371 (The controller outside installation.)
3 Controller
Parallel I/O unit 3-182
Fig.3-42 Connection method of expansion parallel I/O unit (CR750)
1 . . . 6
CN100 CN300
7
CN100
CN300
NETcable-1
R-TM
1 . . . . 6 7
RIO
DCIN
RIO2RIO1
NETcable-1
DCcable-2
RIO2
RIO1
DCIN
FGFG
)
)
RIO2RIO1
DCIN
DCcable-2
100mm *1)
CE
FG
*2)
2030mm
*2)
200300mm
Connect the NET cable-1 to the RIO connector on the back of the controller. Each unit is connected to from a daisy chain. Always install a terminator (R-TM) to the last unit. Note) Use a shield cable for NET cable-1 as a measure against noise.
Always connect the shield to FG. Install the attached ferrite core in both ends. The unit could malfunction because of noise if the shield cable is not used.
RI
Parallel I/O unit 1 . . . 6 Parallel I/O unit 7
Note) NETc l -1 cable
connector
RIO1 connector RIO2 connector RIO1 connector RI connector
Note) NETcable-1 cable
DCcable-2 cable
DCcable-2 cable
RI connector
D I connector
terminator
I/O unit the bottom connector layout
Within 100mm
Front side
Metal braid section
Sheath Sheath
Peel the sheath in the position about 2 0-300mm from the connector end of the cable, so you can install and remove the cover. * Don't damage the shield line.
Grounding terminal position
Station No.
setting
1 . . . 6
Station No.
setting
7
DCIN connector
DCIN connector
*1) Install the ferrite core in within 100mm from each connector.
Ferrite core Only for the CE marking/ KC mark specification Pass twice
3-183 Parallel I/O unit
3 Controller
Fig.3-43 Connection method of expansion parallel I/O unit (CR751)
1 . . . 6
CN100 CN300
7
CN100
CN300
NETcable-1
R-TM
1 . . . . 6 7
RIO
DCIN
RIO2RIO1
NETcable-1
DCcable-2
RIO2
RIO1
DCIN
FGFG
)
)
RIO2RIO1
DCIN
DCcable-2
100mm *1)
CE
FG *2)
2030mm
*2)
200300mm
*1) Install the ferrite core in within 100mm from each connector.
Parallel I/O unit 1 . . . 6 Parallel I/O unit 7 Station No.
setting
1 . . . 6
Station No.
setting
7
Note) NE cable
1 connector
RIO1 connector RIO2 connector RIO1 connector RIO2 connector
Note) NETcable-1 cable
DCIN connector
DCcable-2 cable DCcable-2
cable
DCIN connector
RI connector
D I connector
R-TM terminator
I/O unit the bottom connecter layout
Connect the NET cable-1 to the RIO connector on the back of the controller. Each unit is connected to from a daisy chain. Always install a terminator (R-TM) to the last unit. Note) Use a shield cable for NET cable-1 as a measure against noise.
Always connect the shield to FG. Install the attached ferrite core in both ends. The unit could malfunction because of noise if the shield cable is not used.
Within 100mm
Ferrite core Only for the CE marking/ KC mark specification Pass twice
Front side
Metal braid section
Sheath Sheath
Peel the sheath in the position about 200-300mm from the connector end of the cable, so you can install and remove the cover. * Don't damage the shield line.
Grounding terminal position
3 Controller
Parallel I/O unit 3-184
Pin arrangement of the connector
Fig.3-44 Pin arrangement of the parallel I/O unit
Assignment of pin number and signal The assignment range of the general-purpose input-and-output signal is fixed by the setup of the station number.
Table 3-23 Assignment of pin number and signal
The connector pin number of the parallel I/O unit of the station number 0 and signal number assignment are shown in Table 3-24 and Table 3-25. If it is set as other station number, please interpret and utilize.
Unit Number Station number
CN100 CN300
1st set 0 Input 0 to 15 Output 0 to 15
Input 16 to 31 Output 16 to 31
2nd set 1 Input 32 to 47 Output 32 to 47
Input 48 to 63 Output 48 to 63
3rd set 2 Input 64 to 79 Output 64 to 79
Input 80 to 95 Output 80 to 95
4th set 3 Input 96 to 111 Output 96 to 111
Input 112 to 127 Output 112 to 127
5th set 4 Input 128 to 143 Output 128 to 143
Input 144 to 159 Output 144 to 159
6th set 5 Input 160 to 175 Output 160 to 175
Input 176 to 191 Output 176 to 191
7th set 6 Input 192 to 207 Output 192 to 207
Input 208 to 223 Output 208 to 223
8th set 7 Input 224 to 239 Output 224 to 239
Input 240 to 255 Output 240 to 255
*2A-RZ361/2 A-RZ371 are 32/32 input-and-output units. (One-station occupancy)
50
26
25
1
Channel No. setting
TXD LED display
Input 0 to 15 Output 0 to 15
CN100
CN300 Input 16 to 31 Output 16 to 31
3-185 Parallel I/O unit
3 Controller
Parallel I/O interface (First expansion unit) Table 3-24 Connector CN100pin No. and signal assignment list (2A-CBL )
Pin No.
Line color
Function name Pin No.
Line color
Function name
General-purpose Dedicated/power supply,
common General-purpose
Dedicated/power supply, common
1 Orange/Red A FG 26 Orange/Blue A FG
2 Gray/Red A 0V:For pins 4-7, 10-13 27 Gray/Blue A 0V:For pins 29-32, 35-38
3 White/Red A 12V/24V:For pins 4-7 28 White/Blue A 12V/24V:For pins 29-32
4 Yellow/Red A General-purpose output 0 Operating output Note1)
Note1) The dedicated signal is assigned at shipping. It can change with the parameter.
29 Yellow/Blue A General-purpose output 4
5 Pink/Red A General-purpose output 1 In servo ON output signal Note1)
30 Pink/Blue A General-purpose output 5
6 Orange/Red B General-purpose output 2 Error occurring output signal Note1)
31 Orange/Blue B General-purpose output 6
7 Gray/Red B General-purpose output 3 Operation rights output sig- nal Note1)
32 Gray/Blue B General-purpose output 7
8 White/Red B 0V:For pins 4-7, 10-13 33 White/Blue B 0V:For pins 29-32, 35-38
9 Yellow/Red B 12V/24V:For pins 10-13 34 Yellow/Blue B 12V/24V:For pins 35-38
10 Pink/Red B General-purpose output 8 35 Pink/Blue B General-purpose output 12
11 Orange/Red C General-purpose output 9 36 Orange/Blue C General-purpose output 13
12 Gray/Red C General-purpose output 10 37 Gray/Blue C General-purpose output 14
13 White/Red C General-purpose output 11 38 White/Blue C General-purpose output 15
14 Yellow/Red C COM0:For pins 15-22 Note2)
Note2) Sink type:12V/24V(COM),Source type:0V(COM)
39 Yellow/Blue C COM1:For pins 40-47 Note2)
15 Pink/Red C General-purpose input 0 Stop input Note3)
Note3) The dedicated input signal (STOP) is assigned at shipping. The signal number is fixing.
40 Pink/Blue C General-purpose input 8
16 Orange/Red D General-purpose input 1 Servo OFF input signal Note1)
41 Orange/Blue D General-purpose input 9
17 Gray/Red D General-purpose input 2 Error reset input signal Note1)
42 Gray/Blue D General-purpose input 10
18 White/Red D General-purpose input 3 Start input Note1) 43 White/Blue D General-purpose input 11
19 Yellow/Red D General-purpose input 4 Servo ON input signal Note1) 44 Yellow/Blue D General-purpose input 12
20 Pink/Red D General-purpose input 5 Operation rights input sig- nal Note1)
45 Pink/Blue D General-purpose input 13
21 Orange/Red E General-purpose input 6 46 Orange/Blue E General-purpose input 14
22 Gray/Red E General-purpose input 7 47 Gray/Blue E General-purpose input 15
23 White/Red E Reserved 48 White/Blue E Reserved
24 Yellow/Red E Reserved 49 Yellow/Blue E Reserved
25 Pink/Red E Reserved 50 Pink/Blue E Reserved
3 Controller
Parallel I/O unit 3-186
Table 3-25 Connector CN300pin No. and signal assignment list (2A-CBL )
Pin No.
Line color
Function name Pin No.
Line color
Function name
General-purpose Dedicated/power supply,
common General-purpose
Dedicated/power supply, common
1 Orange/Red A FG 26 Orange/Blue A FG
2 Gray/Red A 0V:For pins 4-7, 10-13 27 Gray/Blue A 0V:For pins 29-32, 35-38
3 White/Red A 12V/24V:For pins 4-7 28 White/Blue A 12V/24V:For pins 29-32
4 Yellow/Red A General-purpose output 16 29 Yellow/Blue A General-purpose output 20
5 Pink/Red A General-purpose output 17 30 Pink/Blue A General-purpose output 21
6 Orange/Red B General-purpose output 18 31 Orange/Blue B General-purpose output 22
7 Gray/Red B General-purpose output 19 32 Gray/Blue B General-purpose output 23
8 White/Red B 0V:For pins 4-7, 10-13 33 White/Blue B 0V:For pins 29-32, 35-38
9 Yellow/Red B 12V/24V:For pins 10-13 34 Yellow/Blue B 12V/24V:For pins 35-38
10 Pink/Red B General-purpose output 24 35 Pink/Blue B General-purpose output 28
11 Orange/Red C General-purpose output 25 36 Orange/Blue C General-purpose output 29
12 Gray/Red C General-purpose output 26 37 Gray/Blue C General-purpose output 30
13 White/Red C General-purpose output 27 38 White/Blue C General-purpose output 31
14 Yellow/Red C COM0:For pins 15-22Note1)
Note1) Sink type:12V/24V(COM),Source type:0V(COM)
39 Yellow/Blue C COM1:For pins 40-47 Note1)
15 Pink/Red C General-purpose input 16 40 Pink/Blue C General-purpose input 24
16 Orange/Red D General-purpose input 17 41 Orange/Blue D General-purpose input 25
17 Gray/Red D General-purpose input 18 42 Gray/Blue D General-purpose input 26
18 White/Red D General-purpose input 19 43 White/Blue D General-purpose input 27
19 Yellow/Red D General-purpose input 20 44 Yellow/Blue D General-purpose input 28
20 Pink/Red D General-purpose input 21 45 Pink/Blue D General-purpose input 29
21 Orange/Red E General-purpose input 22 46 Orange/Blue E General-purpose input 30
22 Gray/Red E General-purpose input 23 47 Gray/Blue E General-purpose input 31
23 White/Red E Reserved 48 White/Blue E Reserved
24 Yellow/Red E Reserved 49 Yellow/Blue E Reserved
25 Pink/Red E Reserved 50 Pink/Blue E Reserved
3-187 Parallel I/O unit
3 Controller
Fig.3-45 Connection with a Mitsubishi PLC (Example of sink type)
Fig.3-46 Connection with a Mitsubishi PLC (Example of source type)
Parallel I/O unit (Output)
(Input)
60mA (+24V/+12V)
Output
Output
Fuse (24G/12G)
+24V
External power supply
X
COM
QX41(Mitsubishi programmable controller)
(COM)
Input3.3K
Input
External power supply
+24V
Y
+24V
QY41P (Mitsubishi programmable controller)
COM 24G
* The input/output circuit external power supply (24 VDC) must be prepared by the customer.
Note) In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for connect to the controller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the controller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.
Parallel I/O unit
(Output)
(Input)
60mA (+24V/+12V)
Output
Output
Fuse
(24G/12G)
+24V
External power supply
X
QX81 (Mitsubishi programmable controller)
(COM)
Input3.3K
Input
External power supply
+24V
Y
+24V
QY81P (Mitsubishi programmable controller)
24G
* The input/output circuit external power supply (24 VDC) must be prepared by the customer.
Note) In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for connect to the controller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the controller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.
COM
3 Controller
External I/O cable 3-188
(5) External I/O cable
Order type: 2A-CBL Note The numbers in the boxes refer to the length. 05: 5m 15: 15m
Outline This is the dedicated cable used to connect an external peripheral device to the con- nector on the parallel input/output unit.
One end matches the connector on the parallel input/output unit, and the other end is free. Connect the peripheral device's input/output signal using the free end.
One cable correspond to the input 16 points and output 16 points.
Two cables are needed to connection of (input 32 points and output 32 points) with built-in standard.
Configuration Table 3-26 Configuration device
Specifications Table 3-27 Specifications
Connector pin numbers and cable colors Table 3-28 Connector pin numbers and cable colors
Part name Type Qty. Mass(kg)Note1)
Note1) Mass indicates one set.
Remarks
External I/O cable 2A-CBL 1pc. 0.7(5m)
1.84(15m) 5m or 15m
Items Specifications
Number of cables x cable size 50 cores x AWG #28
Total length 5m or 15m
Pin no. Cable colors Pin
no. Cable colors Pin no. Cable colors Pin
no. Cable colors Pin no. Cable colors
1 Orange/Red A 11 Orange/Red C 21 Orange/Red E 31 Orange/Blue B 41 Orange/Blue D
2 Gray/Red A 12 Gray/Red C 22 Gray/Red E 32 Gray/Blue B 42 Gray/Blue D
3 White/Red A 13 White/Red C 23 White/Red E 33 White/Blue B 43 White/Blue D
4 Yellow/Red A 14 Yellow/Red C 24 Yellow/Red E 34 Yellow/Blue B 44 Yellow/Blue D
5 Pink/Red A 15 Pink/Red C 25 Pink/Red E 35 Pink/Blue B 45 Pink/Blue D
6 Orange/Red B 16 Orange/Red D 26 Orange/Blue A 36 Orange/Blue C 46 Orange/Blue E
7 Gray/Red B 17 Gray/Red D 27 Gray/Blue A 37 Gray/Blue C 47 Gray/Blue E
8 White/Red B 18 White/Red D 28 White/Blue A 38 White/Blue C 48 White/Blue E
9 Yellow/Red B 19 Yellow/Red D 29 Yellow/Blue A 39 Yellow/Blue C 49 Yellow/Blue E
10 Pink/Red B 20 Pink/Red D 30 Pink/Blue A 40 Pink/Blue C 50 Pink/Blue E
3-189 External I/O cable
3 Controller
Connections and outside dimensions The sheath of each signal cable (50 lines) is color indicated and marked with dots. Refer to the cable color speci- fications in "Table 3-28: Connector pin numbers and cable colors" when making the connections.
Fig.3-47 Connections and outside dimensions
(Eg.) Pin number: color indication
Orange Red
Type of dot mark (see figure below)
Color of dot mark
Color of sheath
Type of dot mark
A type
B type
C type
D type
E type
F type
G type
H type
I type
J type
Dot pattern
Receptacle type (PCB side)57AE-40500-21D(D8)
Plug type cable side57YE-30500-2(D8)
DDK
Maker
DDK
26
5000
6 6
50 25
1
18.5
1
18.5
18.5
Continuous
18.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
18.5
3
3
3
18.5
18.5
18.5
7.5
7.5
Continuous
35.7
13.54
16.2 9.27
7 6 . 7
4
6 4 .5
3
5 1 .8
1 6
2 .1
59
Type of dot mark Dot pattern
Note1) The type of the plug shows the specification of this cable. The following connector is recommended when user make the cable. Plug type (cable side) : 57E series (Soldering type).....................................................DDK 57FE series (Flat cable pressure connection type)......DDK
Note1)
3 Controller
CC-Link interface 3-190
(6) CC-Link interface
Order type: 2D-TZ576
Outline The CC-Link interface is the optioninterface to not only add bit data to the robot controller. but also to add CC-Link field network function that allows cyclic transmission of word data.
Configuration Table 3-29 Configuration device
Table 3-30 Procured by the customer
Fig.3-48 Example of CC-Link Product Configuration
Part name Type Qty. Mass(kg)Note1)
Note1) Mass indicates one set.
Remarks
CC-Link interface TZ576 1 0.6
Manual BFP-A8634 1 - CD-ROM
Ferrite core E04SR301334 2 -
Be sure to install this for noise countermeasure.Cable clamp AL4 2 -
AL5 2 -
On-line connector for
communication
A6CON-LJ5P 1 -
Terminal resistor A6CON-TR11N 1 - Resistance value: 100
One-touch connector plug
for communication
A6CON-L5P 2 -
Part name Type Qty. Remarks
Master station
QJ61BT11(Q series)
1 FX series products are not supported.
QJ61BT11N(Q series)
AJ61QBT11(QnA series)
A1SJ61QBT11(QnAS series)
AJ61BT11(A series)
A1SJ61BT11(AnS series)
A80BD-J61BT11(personal computer board)
Communication cable - 1 Shielded 3-core twisted cable
This cable may be manufactured by the customer.
CC-Link
I/O
Robot arm Inverter
I/O unit
Display Sequencer
Personal computer
Partner manufac- turers device
-Link interface card (This option)
Controller
3-191 CC-Link interface
3 Controller
Specifications Table 3-31 Specifications
Item Specifications Remarks
Communication function Bit data and word data can be transmitted. Word data are used by the registers.
Station type Intelligent device station Note1)
Note1) Not available for the transient transmission function and FX-series models that do not support intelligent devices.
Support station Local station No master station function
The version corresponding to CC-Link Ver.2 The extended cyclic setup is possible.
Mountable option slot Slot 1, 2
Number of mountable CC-Link interface cards 1 Multiple CC-Link interface cards cannot be
inserted.
Number of stations 1 to 64 stations When four stations are occupied, continuous
station numbers are used. The station
numbers are set by a DIP switch.
Transmission speed 10M/5M/2.5M/625K/156K bps This is set by the rotary SW.
Station number 1 to 64 When two or more stations are occupied,
continuous station numbers are used.Number of occupied stations 1/2/3/4
Extended cyclic setup 1/2/4/8
Maximum link point Remote I/O
(RX, RY).
Each 896 points The two last cannot be used.
Remote register
(RWr, RWw)
Each 128 register 16 bits/register
Extended cyclic setup - 1 fold
setup
2 fold
setup
3 fold
setup
4 fold
setup
Link point
per set
When one
station is
occupied
Remote I/O
(RX, RY).
32 point 32 point 64 point 128 point
Remote register
( RWw)
4 word 8 word 16 word 32 word
Remote register
(RWr)
4 word 8 word 16 word 32 word
When two
stations is
occupied
Remote I/O
(RX, RY).
64 point 96 point 192 point 384 point
Remote register
( RWw)
8 word 16 word 32 word 64 word
Remote register
(RWr)
8 word 16 word 32 word 64 word
When three
stations is
occupied
Remote I/O
(RX, RY).
96 point 160 point 320 point 640 point
Remote register
( RWw)
12 word 24 word 48 word 96 word
Remote register
(RWr)
12 word 24 word 48 word 96 word
When four
stations is
occupied
Remote I/O
(RX, RY).
128 point 224 point 448 point 896 point
Remote register
( RWw)
16 word 32 word 64 word 128 word
Remote register
(RWr)
16 word 32 word 64 word 128 word
Number of the maximum occupancy station 4 stations
The I/O first number of the robot controller. No. 6000 -.
The number corresponding to the station
number by the setup of the parameter
"CCFIX."
3 Controller
CC-Link interface 3-192
Functions (1) Communication function
The number of usable points is 896 points maximum for bit control and 128 points maximum for word control.
(2) Easy setup The CC-Link interface card can be set by a rotary switch or DIP switch. No separate space is required to mount the CC-Link interface card as it is embedded in the robot controller (can only be mounted into slot 2).
Easy wiring since only four terminals need to be connected. Dedicated commands have been added to MELFA-BASIC V (robot programming language); thus, no complex interface programming is required.
(3) High-speed response The link scan time when connecting 64 stations is approximately 7.2 ms, achieving superior high-speed response performance.
A transmission speed can be selected from 10M, 5M, 2.5M, 625K and 156K bps according to the transmission distance.
3-193 Controller protection box
3 Controller
(7) Controller protection box
Order type: CR750 controller ........................CR750-MB CR751 controller ........................CR751-MB
Outline
By putting the controller in this box, the controller can be protected from oil mist environment.
Use this option, when the controller is installed where environment is oil mist such as machine shop etc.
Configuration Table 3-32 Configuration equipment and types
Part name Type Qty. Mass (Kg)Note1)
Note1) Mass indicates one set.
Remarks
CR750 controller
Controller protection box CR750-MB 1
22
Internal power cable 3 For connection between the power supply relay
terminal and controller inside this box
Internal earth cable 1 For connection between the grounding terminal and
controller inside this box
Label for serial number 1
Transparent seal 1
Cable tie T50L 4
Screw for fixing of the controller
mounting plate
M4x8 4
Instruction Manual BFP-A8896 1 -
CR751 controller
Controller protection box CR751-MB 1
21
Internal power cable 2 For connection between the power supply relay
terminal and controller inside this box
Internal earth cable 1 For connection between the grounding terminal and
controller inside this box
Label for serial number 1
Transparent seal 1
Cable tie T50L 4
Screw for fixing of the controller
mounting plate
M4x8 4
Instruction Manual BFP-A8997 1 -
3 Controller
Controller protection box 3-194
Specifications Table 3-33 Specifications
(1) The robot must be grounded by the customer. (2) The cable for primary power supply connection and the grounding cable are customer preparations.
Item Unit Specifications Remarks
CR750 controller
Outside dimension mm 500(W)725(D)250(H) Excluding protrusions
Mass Kg 22
Construction Self-contained floor type IP54
Grounding 100 or less (class D grounding)
Paint color Dark gray Equivalent to Munsell: 3.5PB3.2/0.8
CR751 controller
Outside dimension mm 500(W)725(D)250(H) Excluding protrusions
Mass Kg 21
Construction Self-contained floor type IP54
Grounding 100 or less (class D grounding)
Paint color Dark gray Equivalent to Munsell: 3.5PB3.2/0.8
3-195 Controller protection box
3 Controller
Outside dimension
Fig.3-49 Outside dimension of CR750-MB
Cable cover
Controller setting position
Drain hole
Rubber foot fixa- tion screw for placing vertically (Four places)
3 Controller
Controller protection box 3-196
Fig.3-50 Outside dimension of CR751-MB
Cable cover
Controller setting position
Rubber foot fixation screw for placing ver- tically (Four places)
3-197 Controller protection box
3 Controller
Names of each part
Fig.3-51 Names of each part (CR750-MB)
Window
Label for serial number
Transparent seal
Cable cover
Cable tie
External emergency stop wiring (customer preparation)
Machine cable CN2
Power supply cable, Grounding cable (customer preparation) Machine cable CN1
Grounding terminal (M4 screw)
Power supply relay terminal (M4 screw)
Fixing lever ControllerMode change SW
extension cable
T/B junction cable
Controller mounting plate Internal power cable
Mode key switch
T/B connector
Front side of the controller
Front view
Upper view
Internal earth cable
3 Controller
Controller protection box 3-198
Fig.3-52 Names of each part (CR751-MB)
Label for serial number
Transparent seal
Cable cover
Cable tie
External emergency stop wiring (customer preparation)
Machine cable CN2
Power supply cable, Grounding cable (customer preparation) Machine cable CN1
Grounding terminal (M4 screw)
Power supply relay terminal (M4 screw)
Fixing lever
Controller
Controller mounting
plate
Internal power cable
Front side of the controller
Front view
Upper view
Internal earth cable
3-199 Controller protection box
3 Controller
Wiring system diagram
Fig.3-53 Wiring system diagram (CR750-MB)
(L1)
FG FG FG
FG
(L2)
(L1)
ACIN
CN1 CN2
CNUSR 11/12
(L2)
Single phase: RH-6FH series/RH-3FHR series
Single phase/Three phase: RH-12FH/20FH series
(L1)
(L2)
FG FG FG
FG
(L2) (L1)
ACIN
CN1 CN2
CNUSR 11/12
(L3)
(L3)
Note1) When using the controller for the three phases with the single-phase power supply, connect the primary power supply to L1 and L2 electric terminal of the protection box so that the power supply may be supplied to the heat-exchanger AC fan of the protection box. Connects with L1 and L3 electric terminal to the ACIN terminal block of the controller. Refer to the separate manual "Controller setup, basic operation, and maintenance" for detail of connecting the power cable and the grounding cable.
Internal power cableController protection box Terminal
Power supply cable
Grounding cable
Internal earth cable
Grounding terminal
AC fan
Controller
Internal power cableController protection box
Power supply cable
Grounding cable
Grounding terminal
AC fan
Terminal Note1)
Controller
Internal earth cable
3 Controller
Controller protection box 3-200
Fig.3-54 Wiring system diagram (CR751-MB)
Single phase: RH-6FH series/RH-3FHR series
Single phase/Three phase: RH-12FH/20FH series
Note1) When using the controller for the three phases with the single-phase power supply, connect the primary power supply to L1 and L2 electric terminal of the protection box so that the power supply may be supplied to the heat-exchanger AC fan of the protection box. Connects with L1 and L3 electric terminal to the ACIN terminal block of the controller. Refer to the separate manual "Controller setup, basic operation, and maintenance" for detail of connecting the power cable and the grounding cable.
Internal power cableController protection box Terminal
Power supply cable
Grounding cable
Internal earth cable
Grounding terminal
AC fan
Controller
Internal power cableController protection box
Power supply cable
Grounding cable
Grounding terminal
AC fan
Terminal Note1)
Controller
Internal earth cable
3-201 Controller protection box
3 Controller
Installation dimensions
Fig.3-55 Installation dimensions (CR750-MB)
Placed horizontally
150mm or more
Placed vertically
30mm or more
150mm or more
150mm or more
30mm or more
150mm or more
150mm or more
150mm or more
3 Controller
Controller protection box 3-202
Fig.3-56 Installation dimensions (CR751-MB)
Placed horizontally
150mm or more
Placed vertically
30mm or more
150mm or more
150mm or more
30mm or more
150mm or more
150mm or more
150mm or more
3-203 MELSOFT RT ToolBox2/RT ToolBox2 mini
3 Controller
(8) MELSOFT RT ToolBox2/RT ToolBox2 mini
Order type MELSOFT RT ToolBox2 *For windows CD-ROM : 3D-11C-WINE
MELSOFT RT ToolBox2 mini *For windows CD-ROM : 3D-12C-WINE
Outline This is handy software that fully uses the personal computer functions. It can be used in various stages from the robot specifications study (tact study, etc.) to the design support (creation and editing of programs), start up support (execution, control and debugging of program), and maintenance.
The "personal computer support software" which supports these function fully, and the "personal computer support software mini" which does not have the simulation function are available.
Configuration Table 3-34 Product configuration
Features (1) Simple operation with guidance method and menu method
The Windows standard is used for windows operation, so the controller initialization and startup operations can be carried out easily by following the instructions given on the screen. Even a beginner can easily carry out the series of operations from program creation to execution.
(2) Increased work efficiency with ample support functions The work efficiency is greatly improved with the multi-window method that carries out multiple steps and dis- plays in parallel. The renumbering function, and copy, search, syntax check and step execution are especially sufficient, and are extremely useful when editing or debugging the program. With the simulation function support, the program can be debugged and the tact checked before starting the machine at the site. This allows the on-site startup work efficiently to be greatly improved.
(3) The maintenance forecast function increases the efficiency of maintenance work. Analyze the load condition while the robot is actually operating. Based on this analysis, calculate the time for maintenance, such as lubri- cation and belt replacement. By utilizing this information, the line stop time as well as the maintenance costs can be reduced.
(4) The position recovery support function increases the recovery efficiency in the event of origin position dis- placement. This function compensates the origin settings and position data by just reproducing several previ- ous teaching points when hand and/or arm displacement occurs, when replacing the motor and the belts, or when reloading the robot. This function can reduce the time required for recovery.
Part name Type Medium Mass (kg) Note1)
Note1) Mass indicates one set.
Remarks
RT ToolBox2 3D-11C-WINE CD-ROM 0.2
RT ToolBox2 mini 3D-12C-WINE CD-ROM 0.2
3 Controller
MELSOFT RT ToolBox2/RT ToolBox2 mini 3-204
Functions Table 3-35 Functions
Function Functional existenceNote1)
Note1) The functions included with the RT ToolBox2 and the RT ToolBox2 mini are shown below. : Function provided : Function not provided
Details
Compatible model
Personal computer running Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7,
Windows 8, Windows 8.1, or Windows 10. Note2)
Note2) Recommend corresponding to CE Marking, an FCC standard, and a VCCI standard.
Program editing
functions
Editing functions
MELFA BASIC V language compatible
Multiple editing screen simultaneously display
Command input, comment writing
Position data editing
File operation (writing to controller, floppy disk, personal computer)
Search and replace function (using characters, line Nos., labels)
Copy, cut, paste, insert (per character, line), undo (per command
statement, position conversion)
Line No. automatic generation, renumbering
Batch syntax check
Command template
Position conversion batch editing
Position variable template
Print, print preview
Control func- tions
Program file control (list, copy, movement, delete, content compari- son, name change, protect)
Debugging func- tions
Direct editing of program in controller
Confirmation of robot program operation (step execution, direct exe- cution)
Simulation func- tion
Off-line simulation of robot program operation using CG (computer
graphics)
Tact time calculation
Monitor func- tions
Robot operation monitor (robot operation state, stop signal, error
monitor, program monitor (execution program, variables), general-pur- pose input/output signals (forced output possible), dedicated input/
output signals, operation confirmation (operation range, current posi- tion, hand, etc.)
Operation monitor (working time statistics, production information,
robot version)
Servo monitor (load)
Maintenance
function
Parameter setting
Batch, divided backup
RT ToolBox2 mini
3D-12C-WINE
RT ToolBox2
3D-11C-WINE
3-205 Instruction Manual (bookbinding)
3 Controller
(9) Instruction Manual (bookbinding)
Order type: 5F-FB01-PE01 ..............RH-6FH/12FH/20FH-D series 5F-FP01-PE01...............RH-3FHR-D series
Outline
This is a printed version of the CD-ROM (instruction manual) supplied with this product.
Configuration Table 3-36 Product configuration (RH-6FH/12FH/20FH-D series)
Table 3-37 Product configuration (RH-3FHR-D series)
Name Type Mass (Kg) Note1)
Note1) Mass indicates one set.
Specifications
Instruction Manual 5F-FB01-PE01 2.6 The instructions manual set of "RH-6FH/12FH/
20FH-D series".
Safety Manual BFP-A8006 - Items relating to safety in handling the robot
Standard Specifications BFP-A8863 - Specification of the robot arm and controller
Robot Arm Setup & Maintenance BFP-A8865 - Installation method of the robot arm, jog operation, and
maintenance and inspection procedures
Controller Setup, Basic Operation and Maintenance BFP-A8867 - Installation method of the controller, basic operation,
and maintenance and inspection procedures
Detailed Explanation of Functions and Operations BFP-A8869 - Functions of the controller and T/B, operation
method, and explanation of MELFA-BASIC V
Troubleshooting BFP-A8871 - Causes of errors occurred and their countermeasures
Additional axis function BFP-A8663 - Function of the additional axis, operation method.
Tracking Function Manual BFP-A8664 - Function of the Tracking, operation method.
GOT Direct Connection Extended Function BFP-A8849 -
Explains of data configuration of shared memory,
monitoring, and operating procedures, between the
GOT and controller.
Name Type Mass (Kg) Note1)
Note1) Mass indicates one set.
Specifications
Instruction Manual 5F-FP01-PE01 2.6 The instructions manual set of "RH-3FHR-D series".
Safety Manual BFP-A8006 - Items relating to safety in handling the robot
Standard Specifications BFP-A8863 - Specification of the robot arm and controller
Robot Arm Setup & Maintenance BFP-A8993 - Installation method of the robot arm, jog operation, and
maintenance and inspection procedures
Controller Setup, Basic Operation and Maintenance BFP-A8867 - Installation method of the controller, basic operation,
and maintenance and inspection procedures
Detailed Explanation of Functions and Operations BFP-A8869 - Functions of the controller and T/B, operation
method, and explanation of MELFA-BASIC V
Troubleshooting BFP-A8871 - Causes of errors occurred and their countermeasures
Additional axis function BFP-A8663 - Function of the additional axis, operation method.
Tracking Function Manual BFP-A8664 - Function of the Tracking, operation method.
GOT Direct Connection Extended Function BFP-A8849 -
Explains of data configuration of shared memory,
monitoring, and operating procedures, between the
GOT and controller.
3 Controller
Maintenance parts 3-206
3.11 Maintenance parts
The consumable parts used in the controller are shown in Table 3-38. Purchase these parts from your dealer when required. Some Mitsubishi-designated parts differ from the maker's standard parts. Thus, confirm the part name, robot arm and controller serial No. and purchase the parts from your dealer.
Table 3-38 Controller consumable parts list
No. Name Type Note1)
Note1) Confirm the robot arm serial No., and contact the dealer or service branch of Mitsubishi Electric Co., for the type.
Qty. Usage place Supplier
1 Lithium battery Q6BAT 1 CR750 controller:
Inside of the interface
cover
CR751 controller:
Inside of the filter cover Mitsubishi Electric
2 Filter CR750 controller:
BKOFA0773H42
CR751 controller:
BKOFA0773H41
1 Inside the filter cover
4-207 List of commands
4Software
4 Software
4.1 List of commands
The available new functions in MELFA-BASIC V are given in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 List of MELFA-BASIC V commands
Type Class Function Input format (example)
P o si
ti o n a
n d
o pe
ra ti o n c
o n tr
o l
Joint interpolation Moves to the designated position with joint interpolation. Mov P1
Linear interpolation Moves to the designated position with linear interpolation. Mvs P1
Circular interpolation Moves along a designated arc (start point passing point start point
(end point)) with 3-dimensional circular interpolation (360 degrees). Mvc P1,P2,P1
Moves along a designated arc (start point passing point end point)
with 3-dimensional circular interpolation. Mvr P1,P2,P3
Moves along the arc on the opposite side of a designated arc (start point
reference point end point) with 3-dimensional circular interpola- tion.
Mvr2 P1,P9,P3
Moves along a set arc (start point end point) with 3-dimensional cir- cular interpolation.
Mvr3 P1,P9,P3
Speed designation Designates the speed for various interpolation operations with a per- centage (0.1% unit).
Ovrd 100
Designate the speed for joint interpolation operation with a percentage
(0.1% unit). JOvrd 100
Designates the speed for linear and circular interpolation with a numeri- cal value (mm/s unit).
Spd 123.5
Designates the acceleration/deceleration time as a percentage in
respect to the predetermined maximum acceleration/deceleration. (1%
unit)
Accel 50,80
Automatically adjusts the acceleration/deceleration according to the
parameter setting value. Oadl ON
Sets the hand and work conditions for automatic adjustment of the
acceleration/deceleration. Loadset 1,1
Operation Adds a process unconditionally to the operation. Wth
Adds a process conditionally to the operation. WthIf
Designates smooth operation. Cnt 1,100,200
Performance of movement is upgraded corresponding to the application. MvTune 4
Designates the positioning completion conditions with a No. of pulses. Fine 200
Designates the positioning completion conditions with a distance in a
straight line Fine 1, P
Designates the positioning completion conditions with a joint interpola- tion.
Fine 0.5, J, 2
Turns the servo power ON/OFF for all axes. Servo OFF
Limits the operation of each axis so that the designated torque is not
exceeded. Torq 4,10
Position control Designates the base conversion data. Base P1
Designates the tool conversion data. Tool P1
Float control The robot arm rigidity is lowered and softened. (XYZ coordinate system) Cmp Pos ,&B00000011
The robot arm rigidity is lowered and softened. (JOINT coordinate sys- tem)
Cmp Jnt ,&B00000011
The robot arm rigidity is lowered and softened. (TOOL coordinate sys- tem)
Cmp Tool ,&B00000011
The robot arm rigidity is returned to the normal state. Cmp Off
The robot arm rigidity is designated. CmpG 1.0,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.0
Pallet Defines the pallet. Def Plt 1,P1,P2,P3,P4,5,3,1
Operates the pallet grid point position. Plt 1,M1
Singular point pas- sage
Move to a specified position using linear interpolation passing through a
singular point. Mvs P1 Type 0,2
4Software
List of commands 4-208
P ro
gr am
c o n tr
o l
Branching Branches unconditionally to the designated place. GoTo 120
Branches according to the designated conditions. If M1=1 Then GoTo *L100
Else GoTo 20
End If
Repeats until the designated end conditions are satisfied. For M1=1 TO 10
Next M1
Repeats while the designated conditions are satisfied. While M1<10
WEnd
Branches corresponding to the designated expression value. On M1 GoTo *La1, *Lb2, *Lc3
Executes program block corresponding to the designated expression
value..
Select
Case 1
Break
Case 2
Break
End Select
Moves the program process to the next line. Skip
Collision detection Set to enable/disable the collision detection. ColChk ON/OFF
Set the detection level of the collision detection. ColLvl 100,80,,,,,,
Subroutine Executes the designated subroutine. (Within program) GoSub *L200
Returns from the subroutine. Return
Executes the designated program. CallP "P10",M1,P1
Defines the program argument executed with the CALLP command. FPrm M10,P10
Executes the subroutine corresponding to the designated expression
value. On M1 GoSub *La1, *Lb2, *Lc3
Interrupt Defines the interrupt conditions and process. Def Act 1, M1=1 GoTo *L100
Enables/disables the interrupt. Act 1=1
Defines the start line of the program to be executed when an interrupt is
generated from the communication line. On Com(1) GoSub *L100
Enables the interrupt from the communication line. Com(1) On
Disables the interrupt from the communication line. Com(1) Off
Stops the interrupt from the communication line. Com(1) Stop
Wait Designates the wait time, and the output signal pulse output time. (0.01s
unit) Dly 0.5
Waits until the variable becomes the designated value. Wait M_In(1)=1
Stop Stops the program execution. Hlt
Generates an error. During program execution, continue, stop or servo
OFF can be designated. Error 9000
End Ends the program execution. End
H an
d Hand open Opens the designated hand. HOpen 1
Hand close Closes the designated hand. HClose 1
In p u t/
o ut
p u t Assignment Defines the input/output variables. Def IO PORT1=BIT,0
Input Retrieves the general-purpose input signal. M1=M_In(1)
Output Calls out the general-purpose output signal. M_Out(1) =0
P ar
al le
l e xe
c u ti o n
Mechanism designa- tion
Acquires the mechanism with the designated mechanism No. GetM 1
Releases the mechanism with the designated mechanism No. RelM 1
Selection Selects the designated program for the designated slot. XLoad 2,"P102"
Start/stop Carries out parallel execution of the designated program. XRun 3,"100",0
Stops parallel execution of the designated program. XStp 3
Returns the designated program's execution line to the head and enters
the program selection enabled state. XRst 3
Type Class Function Input format (example)
4-209 List of commands
4Software
O th
e rs
Definition Defines the integer type or real number type variable. Def Inte KAISUU
Defines the character string variable. Def Char MESSAGE
efines the layout variable. (Up to 3-dimensional possible) Dim PDATA(2,3)
Defines the joint variable. Def Jnt TAIHI
Defines the position variable. Def Pos TORU
Defines the function. Def FN TASU(A,B)=A+B
Clear Clears the general-purpose output signal, variables in program, variables
between programs, etc. Clr
File Opens a file. Open "COM1:" AS #1
Closes a file. Close #1
Inputs data from a file. Input# 1,M1
Outputs data to a file. Print# 1,M1
Comment Describes a comment. Rem "ABC"
Label Indicates the branching destination. *SUB1
Type Class Function Input format (example)
4Software
List of parameters 4-210
4.2 List of parameters
Show the main parameter in the Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 List of parameters
Parameter Details
Standard tool coordinates. MEXTL Set the default value for the tool data.
Unit: mm or deg.
Standard base coordinates MEXBS Set the relation of the world coordinate system and robot coordinate system.
Unit: mm or deg.
XYZ operation range MEPAR Designate the overrun limit value for the world coordinate system.
JOINT operation range MEJAR Set the overrun limit value for each joint axis.
Free plane limit This is the overrun limit set with the free plane.
Create a plane with the three coordinates x1, y1, z1 to x3, y3, z3, and set the outer side of
the plane as the outside operation range (error). The following three types of parameters are
used.
SFC1P
:
SFC8P
Eight types of free plane limits can be set in SFC1P to SFC8P.
There are nine elements, set in the order of x1, y1, z1, x2, y2, z2, x3, y3, z3.
SFC1ME
:
SFC8ME
Designate which mechanism to use eight types of set free plane limits.
The mechanism No. to use is set with 1 to 3.
SFC1AT
:
SFC8AT
Set the validity of the eight types of set free plane limits.
(Valid 1/Valid 2/invalid = 1/-1/0)
User-defined area An area (cube) defined with two XYZ coordinate points can be designated and that area set
as the outside operation range. Furthermore, a signal can be output when the axis enters
that area. Up to 32 types of area can be designated.
AREA1CS
:
AREA32CS
Specify the coordinate system of the user definition area *.
0: Base coordinate system (conventional compatibility)
1: Robot coordinate system
AREA1P1
:
AREA32P1
Designated the 1st point of the area.
There are eight elements, set in the order of x, y, z, a, b, c, L1, L2.
(L1 and L2 are the additional axes.)
AREA1P2
:
AREA32P2
Designated the 2nd point of the area.
There are eight elements, set in the order of x, y, z, a, b, c, L1, L2.
(L1 and L2 are the additional axes.)
AREA1ME
:
AREA32ME
Designate which mechanism to use the 32 types of set area.
The mechanism No. to use is set with 1 to 3.
AREA1AT
:
AREA32AT
Designate the area check type.
(Invalid/zone/interference = 0/1/2)
Zone: The dedicated output signal USRAREA turns ON.
Interference: An error occurs..
Automatic return setting RETPATH Set to restart the program after returning to the interrupt position when resuming operation
after an interruption.
Buzzer ON/OFF BZR Designate whether to the turn buzzer ON or OFF.
Jog setting JOGJSP Designate the joint jog and step operation speed.
(Set dimension H/L amount, max. override.)
JOGPSP Designate the linear jog and step operation speed.
(Set dimension H/L amount, max. override.)
Jog speed limit value JOGSPMX Limit the operation speed during the teaching mode. Max. 250[mm/s]
Hand type HANDTYPE Set the hand type of the single/double solenoid, and the signal No.
(Single/double = S/D)
Set the signal No. after the hand type. Example) D900
Stop input B contact desig- nation
INB Change the dedicated input (stop) to either of normal open or normal close.
4-211 List of parameters
4Software
User-designated origin USERORG Designate the user-designated origin position.
Program selection memory SLOTON Select the program selected previously when initializing the slot. The non-selected state will
be entered when not set.
Communication setting CBAU232 Set the baud rate.
CLEN232 Set the character length.
CPRTY232 Set the parity.
CSTOP232 Set the stop bit.
CTERM232 Set the end code.
Slot table SLT1
:
SLT32
Make settings (program name, operation type, order of priority, etc.) for each slot during slot
initialization.
No. of multi-tasks TASKMAX Designate the No. of programs to be executed simultaneously. (Max. 32)
Select the function of
singular point adjacent alarm
MESNGLS
W
Designate the valid/invalid of the singular point adjacent alarm.
Invalid/Valid 0/1
When this parameter is set up "VALID", this warning sound is buzzing even if parameter:
BZR (buzzer ON/OFF) is set up "OFF".
Display language. LNG Change the language to display on the LCD display of teaching pendant.
Parameter Details
5Instruction Manual
The details of each instruction manuals 5-212
5 Instruction Manual
5.1 The details of each instruction manuals
The contents and purposes of the documents enclosed with this product are shown below. Use these documents according to the application.
Instruction manuals enclosed in dashed lines in the list below are for optional products.
For special specifications, a separate instruction manual describing the special section may be enclosed.
Explains the common precautions and safety measures to be taken for robot handling, sys- tem design and manufacture to ensure safety of the operators involved with the robot.
Explains the product's standard specifications, factory-set special specifications, option configuration and maintenance parts, etc. Precautions for safety and technology, when incorporating the robot, are also explained.
Explains the procedures required to operate the robot arm (unpacking, transportation, installation, confirmation of operation), and the maintenance and inspection procedures.
Explains the procedures required to operate the controller (unpacking, transportation, installation, confirmation of operation), basic operation from creating the program to auto- matic operation, and the maintenance and inspection procedures.
Explains details on the functions and operations such as each function and operation, com- mands used in the program, connection with the external input/output device, and parame- ters, etc.
Explains the causes and remedies to be taken when an error occurs. Explanations are given for each error No.
Explains the specifications, functions and operations of the additional axis control.
Explains the control function and specifications of conveyor tracking
Explains the detailed description of data configuration of shared memory, monitoring, and operating procedures, about the PLC(CR750-Q/CR751-Q controller) and the GOT(CR750- D/CR751-D controller).
Safety Manual
Standard Specifications
Robot Arm Setup & Maintenance
Controller Setup, Basic Operation and Maintenance
Detailed Explanation of Functions and Operations
Troubleshooting
Additional axis function
Tracking Func- tion Manual
Extended Func- tion Instruc- tion Manual
6-213 Safety
6Safety
6 Safety
6.1 Safety
Measures to be taken regarding safety of the industrial robot are specified in the "Labor Safety and Sanitation Rules". Always follow these rules when using the robot to ensure safety.
6.1.1 Self-diagnosis stop functions This robot has the self-diagnosis stop functions shown in Table 6-1 and the stop functions shown in Table 6-2 for safe use.
Table 6-1 Self-diagnosis stop functions
Table 6-2 List of stop functions
No. Function Details Remarks
1 Overload protection func- tion
Activates when the total servo current time exceeds the specified value.
The drive circuit is shut off. The robot stops, and an alarm displays.
2 Overcurrent diagnosis function
Activates when an overcurrent flows to the motor circuit.
The drive circuit is shut off. The robot stops, and an alarm displays.
3 Encoder disconnection diagnosis function
Activates when the encoder cable is disconnected. The drive circuit is shut off. The robot stops, and an alarm displays.
4 Deflection over diagnosis function
Activates when an error occurs between the com- mand value and actual position, and the error exceeds the specified amount.
The drive circuit is shut off. The robot stops, and an alarm displays.
5 AC power voltage drop diagnosis function
Activates when the AC power voltage drops below the specified value.
The drive circuit is shut off. The robot stops, and an alarm displays.
6 CPU error detection func- tion
Activates when an error occurs in the CPU. The drive circuit is shut off. The robot stops, and an alarm displays.
7 Overrun prevention function
Software limit detection
This is the limit provided by the software to enable operation only in the operation range.
The drive circuit is shut off. The robot stops, and an alarm displays.
Mechanical stopper
This is the mechanical stopper provided outside the software.
The robot mechanically stops, and function 1 or 2 activates.
Stop function
Operation panel Note1)
Note1) Only CR750 controller has operation panel.
Teaching pendant
External input Details
Emergency stop
This is the stop with the highest degree of emergency. The servo power is shut off, and the mechanical brakes (all axes) activate to stop the robot. To recover, reset the alarm, and turn the servo ON with the servo ON command.
Stop
This is a stop operation with a high degree of emergency. The robot immediately decelerates and stops. Note that the servo power is not shut off. Use this when using the collision evasion sensor, etc.
6Safety
Safety 6-214
6.1.2 External input/output signals that can be used for safety protection measures
Table 6-3 External input/output signals that can be used for safety protection measures
6.1.3 Precautions for using robot The safety measures for using the robot are specified in the "Labor Safety and Sanitation Rules". An outline of the rules is given below.
(1) Robot installation Secure sufficient work space required to safely perform work such as teaching and maintenance related to the
robot. Install the controller outside the robot's motion space. (If a safety fence is provided, install outside the fence.) Install the controller where the entire robot operation can be viewed. Install display lamps, etc., to indicate the robot's operation state. Securely fix the robot arm onto the fixing table with the designated bolts.
(2) Prevention of contact with operator Install a safety fence or enclosure so that the operator cannot easily enter the robot's motion space. Install an interlock function that will stop the robot if the safety fence or enclosure door is opened.
(3) Work procedures Create and observe work procedures for the robot teaching, operation, inspection and emergencies. Create hand signals to be followed when several operators are working together. Create displays such as "Teaching in Progress" and "Inspection in Progress" to be put up when an operator is
in the robot's motion space so that other operators will not operate the operation panel (controller, control panel).
(4) Training Train the operators about the operations, maintenance and safety required for the robot work.
Signal Connection
point Parameter Functions Usage method
In pu
t
External emer- gency stop Note1)
Note1) The external emergency stop input is prepared as a normal close for safety proposes. Thus, if the emergency stop input circuit is opened when the robot is started up, the robot will not operate. Refer to Page 216, "6.1.7 Exam- ples of safety measures"for details. And, refer to Page 155, "(3) Automatic Operation/Jog Operation/Brake Release and Necessary Switch Set- tings"for the function of the door switch input and the enabling device input.
Connector (CR750 controller: CNSUSR11/12) (CR751 controller: CNSUSR1)
- This servo power is shut off, and the
robot stops immediately.
Externally installed emergency stop switch.
Door switch on safety protection fence.
Stopping at high-level error occurrence.
Door switch - The door switch of the safe protection
fence
Enabling device
input
- Enabling device.
The safety switch during teaching work
Stop Parallel I/O unit
or interface
STOP The program execution is stopped, and
the robot stops. The servo power is not
shut off.
The robot is stopped when a peripheral
device fault occurs. The servo power is
not shut off.
Servo OFF SRVOFF The servo power can be shut off. The robot is stopped when a peripheral
device fault occurs. The servo power is
not shut off.
Automatic oper- ation enable
AUTOENA Disables automatic operation when inac- tive.
Door switch on safety protection fence
O u tp
u t
Emergency stop output
Connector (CR750 controller: CNSUSR11/12) (CR751 controller: CNSUSR1)
- Outputs the input signal of external emergency stop or emergency stop switch of T/B turned on.
Display and warn the pilot lamp, the input signal of external emergency stop or the emergency stop switch of T/B turned on.
In servo ON Parallel I/O unit or interface
SRVON The servo power ON/OFF state is out- put.
The servo power ON/OFF state is shown and alerted with the display lamps.
Waiting STOP Outputs that the robot is temporarily stopped.
The temporary stop state is shown and alerted with the display lamps.
In alarm Connector (CR750/CR751 controllerdrive unit: CNUSR2)
ERRRESET Outputs when an alarm occurs in the robot.
The alarm state is shown and alerted with the display lamps.
-
6-215 Safety
6Safety
Only trained and registered operators must operate the robot. Participation in the "Special training for industrial robots" sponsored by the Labor Safety and Sanitation Com- mittee, etc., is recommended for safety training.
(5) Daily inspection and periodic inspection Always inspect the robot before starting daily operations and confirm that there are no abnormalities. Set the periodic inspection standards in view of the robot's ambient environment and operation frequency, and
perform periodic inspections. Make records when periodic inspections and repairs have been done, and store the records for three or more
years.
6.1.4 Safety measures for automatic operation (1) Install safety fences so that operators will not enter the operation area during operation and indicate that
automatic operation is in progress with lamps, etc. (2) Create signals to be given when starting operation, assign a person to give the signal, and make sure that the
operator follows the signals.
6.1.5 Safety measures for teaching Observe the following measures when teaching, etc., in the robot's operation range. (1) Specify and follow items such as procedures related to teaching work, etc. (2) Take measures so that operation can be stopped immediately in case of trouble, and measures so that oper-
ation can be restarted. (3) Take measures with the robot start switch, etc., to indicate that teaching work is being done. (4) Always inspect that stop functions such as the emergency stop device before starting the work. (5) Immediately stop the work when trouble occurs, and correct the trouble. (6) Take measures so that the work supervisor can immediately stop the robot operation when trouble occurs. (7) The teaching operator must have completed special training regarding safety. (Training regarding industrial
robots and work methods, etc.) (8) Create signals to be used when several operators are working together.
6.1.6 Safety measures for maintenance and inspections, etc. Turn the power OFF and take measures to prevent operators other than the relevant operator from pressing the start switch when performing inspections, repairs, adjustments, cleaning or oiling. If operation is required, take measures to prevent hazards caused by unintentional or mistaken operations. (1) Specify and follow items such as procedures related to maintenance work, etc. (2) Take measures so that operation can be stopped immediately in case of trouble, and measures so that oper-
ation can be restarted. (3) Take measures with the robot start switch, etc., to indicate that work is being done. (4) Take measures so that the work supervisor can immediately stop the robot operation when trouble occurs. (5) The operator must have completed special training regarding safety. (Training regarding industrial robots and
work methods, etc.) (6) Create signals to be used when several operators are working together.
6Safety
Safety 6-216
6.1.7 Examples of safety measures The controller's dedicated I/O terminal connector has a duplicate emergency stop circuit. Create a circuit as shown below for safety measures. In addition, the figure shows the normal state which is not in the emergency stop state. [Caution] Since we have omitted the information in part because of explanation, there is the section different
from the product. Also refer to Page 226, "(3) External emergency stop connection [supplementary explanation]".
[Note] In the emergency-stop related wiring by the customer, if the coil (is not the contact points) of the relay prepared by the customer is connected to the controller, please be sure to implement the measure against the noise by the customer in the coil section. And, please also take the lifetime of noise suppres- sion parts into consideration.
Electric specification of the emergency-stop-related output terminal: 100mA/24V or less In the customer's system, do not ground the + side of 24V power supply prepared by customer for con-
nect to the controller. (related with emergency stop and parallel input/output) If it connects with the controller under the condition that the + side is grounded, it will lead to failure of controller.
(1) CR750 controller
Fig.6-1 Example of safety measures CR750 wiring example 1
*6) OP emergency stop switch
*3) TB emergency stop switch
Power supply in the robot controller 24V
10F
*1) CNUSR11/CNUSR12
*2) CNUSR2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
13
14
11
12
41/42
16/17
1
Input detection
circuit
Safety relay
Internal emergency stop circuit
Short circuit (Short-circuited)
Short circuit (Short-circuited)
Mode output
Error output
Door switch input
*5) Enabling device
Safety fence door
Emergency stop switch (2-contact type)
Peripheral equipment
*7)
*4)
Emergency stop output
If the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment is pushed, the robot will also be in the emergency stop state.
Controller
*3) The T/B emergency stop switch connected with the controller. *4) Emergency stop input relay. *5) Refer to the Standard specification manual or Special specification manualfor the enabling device. *6) The emergency stop switch of the robot controller. (Only specification with the operation panel.) *7) The emergency stop input detection relay is used the controllers internal safety relay control. If the
emergency stop input detection relay is switched OFF, emergency stop is detected and the safety relay is also switched OFF.
*1) Each of the connectors, CNUSR11 and CNUSR12, are assigned with the same pin number, creating two systems for each terminal. It is absolutely necessary to connect the two systems.
*2) You can see in the diagram that connector CNUSR2 has two terminals and two systems (16/ 17 indicates two terminals at pin number 16 and pin number 17). It is absolutely necessary to connect the two systems.
6-217 Safety
6Safety
Fig.6-2 Example of safety measures (CR750 wiring example 2
*6) OP emergency stop switch
*3) TB emergency stop switch
Power supply in the robot controller 24V
10F
*1) CNUSR11/CNUSR12
*2) CNUSR2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
13
14
11
12
41/42
16/17
1
Input detection
circuit
Safety relay
Internal emergency stop circuit
Not connected
Emergency stop output
Mode output
Error output
Door switch input
*5) Enabling device
Safety fence door
Emergency stop switch (2-contact type)
Peripheral equipment
*7)
*4)
Power supply in the peripheral equipment 24V
*1) Each of the connectors, CNUSR11 and CNUSR12, are assigned with the same pin number, creating 2 systems in each terminal. It is absolutely necessary to connect the 2 systems.
*2) You can see in the diagram that connector CNUSR2 has 2 terminals and 2 systems (16/17 indicates 2 terminals at pin number 16 and pin number 17). It is absolutely necessary to connect the 2 systems.
If the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment is pushed, the robot will also be in the emergency stop state.
*3) The T/B emergency stop switch connected with the controller. *4) Emergency stop input relay. *5) Refer to the Standard specification manual or the Special specification manual for the enabling device. *6) The emergency stop switch of the robot controller.
(Only specification with the operation panel.) *7) The emergency stop input detection relay uses the controllers internal safety relay control. If the
emergency stop input detection relay is switched OFF, emergency stop is detected and the safety relay is also switched OFF.
Controller
6Safety
Safety 6-218
Fig.6-3 Example of safety measures (CR750 wiring example 3
*6) OP emergency stop switch
*3) TB emergency stop switch
Power supply in the robot controller 24V
10F
Input detection
circuit
Safety relay
Internal emergency stop circuit
Not connected
Emergency stop output
Mode output
Error output
Door switch input
*5) Enabling device
Safety fence door
Emergency stop switch (2-contact type)
Peripheral equipment
*7)
*4)
Circuit
Monitor
Monitor
*1) CNUSR11/CNUSR12
*2) CNUSR2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
13
14
11
12
41/42
16/17
1 Power supply 24V
If the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment is pushed, the robot will also be in the emergency stop state. And, if the emergency stop switch of OP or T/B is pushed in the state of the power of con- troller OFF, peripheral equipment state can be the emergency stop also.
Controller
*1) Each of the connectors, CNUSR11 and CNUSR12, are assigned with the same pin number, creating 2 systems in each terminal. It is absolutely necessary to connect the 2 systems.
*2) You can see in the diagram that connector CNUSR2 has 2 terminals and 2 systems (16/17 indicates 2 terminals at pin number 16 and pin number 17). It is absolutely necessary to connect the 2 systems.
*3)The T/B emergency stop switch connected with the controller. *4) Emergency stop input relay. *5) Refer to the Standard specification manual or the Special specification manual for the enabling device. *6) The emergency stop switch of the robot controller.
(Only specification with the operation panel.) *7) The emergency stop input detection relay uses the controllers internal safety relay control. If the
emergency stop input detection relay is switched OFF, emergency stop is detected and the safety relay is also switched OFF.
6-219 Safety
6Safety
Fig.6-4 Example of safety measures (CR750 wiring example 4
*6) OP emergency stop switch
*3) TB emergency stop switch
Power supply in the robot controller 24V
10F
Input detection
circuit
Safety relay
Internal emergency stop circuit
Not connected
Emergency stop output
Mode output
Error output
Door switch input
Door switch output
*5) Enabling device Safety fence
door
Emergency stop switch (4-contact type)
Peripheral equipment
*7)
*4) Circuit
Monitor
Monitor
Monitor
Power supply 24V
*1) CNUSR11/CNUSR12
*2) CNUSR2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
13
14
11
12
41/42
16/17
1
*6) OP emergency stop switch
*3) TB emergency stop switch
Power supply in the robot controller 24V
10F
Input detection
circuit
Safety relay
Internal emergency stop circuit
Not connected
Emergency stop output
Mode output
Error output
Door switch input
*5) Enabling device
*7)
*4)
*1) CNUSR11/CNUSR12
*2) CNUSR2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
13
14
11
12
41/42
16/17
1 Emergency stop output of peripheral equipment
Emergency stop output of peripheral equipment
Controller #1
*5) Refer to the Standard specification manual or the Special specification manual for the enabling device. *6) The emergency stop switch of the robot controller. (Only specification with the operation panel.) *7) The emergency stop input detection relay uses the controllers internal safety relay control. If the emergency stop input detection relay is
switched OFF, emergency stop is detected and the safety relay is also switched OFF.
If the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment is pushed, the robot will also be in the emergency stop state. And, if the emergency stop switch of OP or T/B is pushed in the state of the power of con- troller OFF, peripheral equipment state can be the emergency stop also.
Controller #2
*1) Each of the connectors, CNUSR11 and CNUSR12, are assigned with the same pin number, creating 2 systems in each terminal. It is absolutely necessary to connect the 2 systems. If necessary to stop two robots simultaneously by one emergencystop switch please use the 4 contact type emergency stop switch.
*2) You can see in the diagram that connector CNUSR2 has 2 terminals and 2 systems (16/17 indicates 2 terminals at pin number 16 and pin number 17). It is absolutely necessary to connect the 2 systems.
*3) The T/B emergency stop switch connected with the controller. *4) Emergency stop input relay.
6Safety
Safety 6-220
Fig.6-5 Example of safety measures (CR750 wiring example 5
OP E-stop
1
2
3
4
5
6
CNUSR11
TB E-stop
24G
1
2
3
4
5
6 24G
X0
COM0
X1
COM1
No connection
No connection
1
2
24V DC 24G
QS90SR2SP ( )
DC 24V
+24V 24G
24V DC
13
14
24V DC
24V DC
13
14
24V DC
CNUSR12
No connection
No connection
10F
10F
Controller
Safety relay
Internal relay
Emergency stop output
Internal relay
External emergency stop switch
External emergency stop switch
Emergency stop output
Customer equipment
Safety relay
ex) QS90SR2SP (Mitsubishi
Electric Corporation)
Safety input 1
Customer Power Supply (DC 24V)
[Caution]
1) This product has category 3 functionality and therefore the robots whole unit cannot be set to category 4. 2) The controllers internal circuit has polarity. Please adhere to the polarity as detailed in the wiring examples,
particularly for emergency stop switch output when using user equipment. Connect the positive side of the user equipment (24V DC) to the terminal 2 of CNUSR11/12, then connect the emergency stop switch (or contact points) in the user equipment to across the terminals 3 and 4 of CNUSR11/12, and ultimately con- nect the negative side (24G).
3) When installing a safety relay to use it as an input point of the controller's emergency stop switch command, use a safety relay that is activated by an input from one of the two systems (i.e. QS90SR2SP (Manufacture: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation)).
4) The emergency stop input detection relay (internal relay) uses the controllers internal safety relay control. If the emergency stop input detection relay is switched OFF, emergency stop is detected and the safety relay is also switched OFF.
5) When connecting emergency stop switch output to an external safety relay, please take note of the polarity and make sure that the electrical current flows in the same direction as indicated by the dotted arrows in the two places in the diagram. If the polarity is setup incorrectly, this function will not operate correctly. Please connect the terminal 13 of CNUSR11/12 to 24V.
Safety input 2
Input detection
circuit
Input detection
circuit
6-221 Safety
6Safety
(2) CR751 controller
Fig.6-6 Example of safety measures (CR751 wiring example 1)
*2) TB emergency stop switch
Power supply in the robot controller 24V
10F
Input detection
circuit
Safety relay
Internal emergency stop circuit
Short circuit (Short-circuited)
Short circuit (Short-circuited)
Mode output
Error output
Door switch input
*4) Enabling device
Safety fence door
Emergency stop switch (2-contact type)
Peripheral equipment
*5)
*3)
Emergency stop output
*1) CNUSR1
*1) CNUSR2
26/31
2/ 7
27/32
3 /8
28/33
4/ 9
29/34
5/10
30/35
20/19
45/44
18/17
43/42
41/42
16/17
1/ 6
If the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment is pushed, the robot will also be in the emergency stop state.
Controller
*1) Each of the connectors, CNUSR1 and CNUSR2, are assigned with the same pin number, creating 2 systems in each terminal. It is absolutely necessary to connect the 2 systems.
*2) The T/B emergency stop switch connected with the controller. *3) Emergency stop input relay. *4) Refer to the Standard specification manual or the Special specification manual for the enabling device. *5) The emergency stop input detection relay uses the controllers internal safety relay control. If the
emergency stop input detection relay is switched OFF, emergency stop is detected and the safety relay is also switched OFF.
6Safety
Safety 6-222
Fig.6-7 Example of safety measures (CR751 wiring example 2)
*2) TB emergency stop switch
Power supply in the robot controller 24V
10F
Input detection
circuit
Safety relay
Internal emergency stop circuit
*6) Not connected
Mode output
Error output
Door switch input
*4) Enabling device
Safety fence door
Emergency stop switch (2-contact type)
Peripheral equipment
*5)
*3)
Emergency stop output
*1) CNUSR1
*1) CNUSR2
26/31
2/ 7
27/32
3 /8
28/33
4/ 9
29/34
5/10
30/35
20/19
45/44
18/17
43/42
41/42
16/17
1/ 6
Power supply in the peripheral equipment 24V
If the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment is pushed, the robot will also be in the emergency stop state.
Controller
*1) Each of the connectors, CNUSR1 and CNUSR2, are assigned with the same pin number, creating 2 systems in each terminal. It is absolutely necessary to connect the 2 systems.
*2) The T/B emergency stop switch connected with the controller. *3) Emergency stop input relay. *4) Refer to the Standard specification manual or the Special specification manual for the enabling device. *5) The emergency stop input detection relay uses the controllers internal safety relay control. If the
emergency stop input detection relay is switched OFF, emergency stop is detected and the safety relay is also switched OFF.
*6) Connect the 24V power supply to 26/31 terminals.
6-223 Safety
6Safety
Fig.6-8 Example of safety measures (CR751 wiring example 3)
*2) TB emergency stop switch
Power supply in the robot controller 24V
10F
Input detection
circuit
Safety relay
Internal emergency stop circuit
*6) Not connected
Mode output
Error output
Door switch input
*4) Enabling device
Safety fence door
Emergency stop switch (2-contact type)
Peripheral equipment
*5)
*3)
Emergency stop output
Power supply 24V
*1) CNUSR1
*1) CNUSR2
26/31
2/ 7
27/32
3 /8
28/33
4/ 9
29/34
5/10
30/35
20/19
45/44
18/17
43/42
41/42
16/17
1/ 6
Circuit
Monitor
Monitor
Controller
*4) Refer to the Standard specification manual or the Special specification manual for the enabling device. *5) The emergency stop input detection relay uses the controllers internal safety relay control. If the emergency stop
input detection relay is switched OFF, emergency stop is detected and the safety relay is also switched OFF. *6) When using emergency stop switch output function, please take note of the polarity and make sure that the
electrical current flows in the same direction as indicated by the dotted arrows in the two places in the diagram. If the polarity of the circuit is wrong, the emergency stop switch output may not work properly. Please connect the 24V power supply to 26/31 terminals.
If the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment is pushed, the robot will also be in the emergency stop state. And, if the emergency stop switch of OP or T/B is pushed in the state of the power of con- troller OFF, peripheral equipment state can be the emergency stop also.
*1) Each terminal assigned with the respectively same pin number as connector: CNUSR1 and CNUSR2 and each is dual line. Always connect the two lines.
*2) The T/B emergency stop switch connected with the controller.
*3) Emergency stop input relay.
6Safety
Safety 6-224
Fig.6-9 Example of safety measures (CR751 wiring example 4)
*2) TB emergency stop switch
Power supply in the robot controller 24V
10F
Input detection
circuit
Safety relay
Internal emergency stop circuit
Not connected
Emergency stop output
Mode output
Error output
Door switch input
Door switch output
*4) Enabling device Safety fence
door
Emergency stop switch (4-contact type)
Peripheral equipment
*5)
*3) Circuit
Monitor
Monitor
Power supply 24V
Emergency stop output of peripheral equipment
*1) CNUSR1
*1) CNUSR2
26/31
2/ 7
27/32
3 /8
28/33
4/ 9
29/34
5/10
30/35
20/19
45/44
18/17
43/42
41/42
16/17
1/ 6
*2) TB emergency stop switch
Power supply in the robot controller 24V
10F
Input detection
circuit
Safety relay
Internal emergency stop circuit
Not connected
Emergency stop output
Mode output
Error output
Door switch input
*4) Enabling device
*5)
*3)
Monitor
Emergency stop output of peripheral equipment
*1) CNUSR1
*1) CNUSR2
26/31
2/ 7
27/32
3 /8
28/33
4/ 9
29/34
5/10
30/35
20/19
45/44
18/17
43/42
41/42
16/17
1/ 6
Controller #1
*3) Emergency stop input relay. *4) Refer to the Standard specification manual or the Special specification manual for the enabling device. *5) The emergency stop input detection relay uses the controllers internal safety relay control. If the emergency stop input detection
relay is switched OFF, emergency stop is detected and the safety relay is also switched OFF.
If the emergency stop switch of peripheral equipment is pushed, the robot will also be in the emergency stop state. And, if the emergency stop switch of OP or T/B is pushed in the state of the power of con- troller OFF, peripheral equipment state can be the emergency stop also.
Controller #2
*1) Each of the connectors, CNUSR1 and CNUSR2, are assigned with the same pin number, creating 2 systems in each terminal. It is absolutely necessary to connect the 2 systems. If necessary to stop two robots simultaneously by one emergencystop switch please use the 4 contact type emergency stop switch.
*2) The T/B emergency stop switch connected with the controller.
6-225 Safety
6Safety
Fig.6-10 Example of safety measures (CR751 wiring example 5)
1
26
2
27
3
28
CNUSR1
TB E-stop
24G
6
31
7
32
8
33 24G
X0
COM0
X1
COM1
No connection
No connection
1
2
24V DC 24G
DC 24V
+24V 24G
24V DC
20
45
24V DC
24V DC
19
44
24V DC
No connection
No connection
QS90SR2SP ( )
10F
10F
Controller
Safety relay
Internal relay
Emergency stop output
External emergency stop switch
Customer equipment
Safety relay
Customer Power Supply (DC 24V)
Internal relay
Emergency stop output
External emergency stop switch
[Caution]
1) This product has category 3 functionality and therefore the robots whole unit cannot be set to category 4. 2) The controllers internal circuit has polarity. Please adhere to the polarity as detailed in the wiring examples,
particularly for emergency stop switch output when using user equipment. Connect the positive side of the user equipment (24V DC) to the two terminals 26/31, then connect the emergency stop switch (or contact points) in the user equipment to the 2-27 and 7-32 terminals, and ultimately connect to the negative side (24G).
3) Setup a safety relay on the user equipment, and when using to input the emergency stop switch on the con- troller, please only use a safety relay that functions when connecting the input to the one end of the 2 sys- tems (i.e. QS90SR2SP (Manufacture: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation)).
4) The emergency stop input detection relay (internal relay) uses the controllers internal safety relay control. If the emergency stop input detection relay is switched OFF, emergency stop is detected and the safety relay is also switched OFF.
5) When connecting emergency stop switch output to an exterior safety relay, please take note of the polarity and make sure that the electrical current flows in the same direction as indicated by the dotted arrows in the two places in the diagram. If the polarity is setup incorrectly this function will not operate correctly. Please connect 20/19 terminal to 24V.
ex) 0SR2SP (Mitsubishi
Electric Corporation)
Safety input 1
Safety input 2
Input detection
circuit
Input detection
circuit
6Safety
Safety 6-226
(3) External emergency stop connection [supplementary explanation]
(1) Use a 2-contact type switch for all switches. (2) Install a limit switch on the safety fence's door. With a constantly open contact (normal open), wire to the
door switch input terminal so that the switch turns ON (is conducted) when the door is closed, and turns OFF (is opened) when the door is open.
(3) Use a manual-return type of normal close which have two lines for the emergency stop switch. (4) Classify the faults into minor faults (faults that are easily restored and that do not have a great effect) and
major faults (faults that cause the entire system to stop immediately, and that require care in restoration), and wire accordingly.
[Caution] The emergency stop input (terminal block) on the user wiring in the controller can be used for safety measures as shown in figure above. Note that there are limits to the No. of switch contacts, capacity and cable length, so refer to the following and install.
Switch contact ..........................Prepare a 2-contact type.*1)
Switch contact capacity........Use a normal open contact that operates with a switch contact
capacity of approx. 1mA to 100mA/24V. *1)
If you connect the relay etc., rated current of the coil should use the relay which is 100mA/24V or less. (Refer to Fig. 6-12, Fig. 6-11)
Cable length................................The length of the wire between the switch and terminal block must be max. 15m or less. Please use the shield line, in case of the cable may receive the noise etc. by other equipment, such as servo amplifier. And, since the ferrite core is attached as noise measures parts, please utilize. The size of the wire that fits to use is shown below. CR750 controller................................... CNUSR11/12/13 connector:
AWG #26 to #16 (0.14mm2 to 1.5mm2) CR750 controller................................... CNUSR2 connector:
AWG #30 to #24 (0.05mm2 to 0.2mm2) CR751 controller................................... CNUSR1/2 connector:
AWG #30 to #24 (0.05mm2 to 0.2mm2) Electric specification of the emergency stop related output circuit is 100mA/24V or less. Don't connect the equipment except for this range.
*1) The minimum load electric current of the switch is more than 5mA/24V.
6-227 Safety
6Safety
Fig.6-11 Limitations when connecting the relay etc. (CR750)
Fig.6-12 Limitations when connecting the relay etc. (CR751)
24V
Power supply in the robot controller
10F
Input detection
circuit
Safety relay
Internal emergency stop circuit
Not connected
Emergency stop output
Mode output
Error output
Door switch input
Safety fence door
Emergency stop switch (2-contact type)
Peripheral equipment
Power supply 24V
OP emergency stop switch
TB emergency stop switch
CNUSR11/12
CNUSR2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
13
14
11
12
41/42
16/17
1
Enabling device
Robot controller
Circuit
F1
F2
Monitor
Monitor
Relay Rated-current is 100mA or less
Internal fuse
Note)
The electric-current value limitation when connecting the coils, such as the Relays (CR750 controller)
Note) If you connect the relay etc., rated current of the coil
should use the relay which is 100mA/24V or less.
If the electric current of the further flows, internal fuse 1
may cut. And, although the example of the connection
which uses the external power source is shown in the
figure, if the coil is connected using the internal power
supply of the robot controller, internal fuse 2 may cut.
24V
Power supply in the robot controller
10F
Input detection
circuit
Safety relay
Internal emergency stop circuit
Not connected
Emergency stop output
Mode output
Error output
Door switch input
Safety fence door
Emergency stop switch (2-contact type)
Peripheral equipment
Power supply 24V
TB emergency stop switch
Enabling device
Robot controller
Circuit
F1
F2
Monitor
Monitor
Relay Rated-current is 100mA or less
Internal fuse
Note)
CNUSR1
CNUSR2
26/31
2/ 7
27/32
3 /8
28/33
4/ 9
29/34
5/10
30/35
20/19
45/44
18/17
43/42
41/42
16/17
1/ 6
The electric-current value limitation when connecting the coils, such as the Relays (CR751 controller)
Note) If you connect the relay etc., rated current of the coil
should use the relay which is 100mA/24V or less.
If the electric current of the further flows, internal fuse 1
may cut. And, although the example of the connection
which uses the external power source is shown in the
figure, if the coil is connected using the internal power
supply of the robot controller, internal fuse 2 may cut.
6Safety
Safety 6-228
[Supplementary explanation regarding emergency stop circuit] The controllers internal circuit is as shown in the below diagram. Be sure to build a circuit that properly
shuts off the emergency stop detection relay when the emergency stop switch is pressed.
Fig.6-13 Internal circuit of controller
Be sure to perform wiring correctly. If there are mistakes in the wiring, the robot may not stop when the emergency stop switch is pressed and there will be a risk of damage or personal injury occurring. After wiring, be sure to press each of the installed emergency stop switches and check whether the emergency stop circuit works properly.
Be sure to duplicate connection of the emergency stop, door switch and enabling switch. If not duplicated, these functions may fail due to a broken relay used by customer, etc.
OP
24V DCTB
+
-
OP
TB
24G
Safety relay
Input
Emergency stop detection relay
TB emergency stop
OP emergency stop
OP emergency stop detection
TB emergency stop detection
External emergency stop detection
CAUTION
CAUTION
6-229 Working environment
6Safety
6.2 Working environment
Avoid installation in the following places as the equipment's life and operation will be affected by the ambient environment conditions. When using in the following conditions, the customer must pay special attention to the preventive measures.
(1) Power supply Where the voltage fluctuation will exceed the input voltage range. Where a momentary power failure exceeding 20ms may occur. Where the power capacity cannot be sufficiently secured.
Please use the controller with an input power supply voltage fluctuation rate of 10% or less. In the case of 200 VAC input, for example, if the controller is used with 180 VAC during the day and 220 VAC during the night, turn the servo off once and then on again.
If this is not performed, an excessive regeneration or overvoltage error may occur.
(2) Noise Where a surge voltage exceeding 2000V, 5kHz (equivalent to EN61000-4-4) may be applied on the primary volt- age. Near large inverters, high output frequency oscillator, large contactors and welding machines. Static noise may enter the lines when this product is used near radios or televisions. Keep the robot away from these items.
(3) Temperature and humidity Where the atmospheric temperature exceeds 40 degree , lower than 0 degree. Where the relative humidity exceeds 85%, lower than 45%, and where dew may condense. Where the robot will be subject to direct sunlight or near heat generating sources such as heaters.
(4) Vibration Where excessive vibration or impact may be applied. (Use in an environment of 34m/s2 or less during transpor- tation and 5m/s2 or less during operation.)
(5) Installation environment Where strong electric fields or magnetic fields are generated. Where the installation surface is rough. (Avoid installing the robot on a bumpy or inclined floor.) Where there is heavy powder dust and oil mist present.
6.3 Precautions for handling (1) This robot has brakes on J3 axes. The precision of the robot may drop, looseness may occur and the reduction
gears may be damaged if the robot is moved with force with the brakes applied. (2) Avoid moving the robot arm by hand. When unavoidable, gradually move the arm. If moved suddenly, the accu-
racy may drop due to an excessive backlash, or the backed up data may be destroyed. (3) Note that depending on the posture, even when within the movement range, the shaft section could interfere
with the base section. Take care to prevent interference during jog. *1)
(4) The robot arm consists of precision parts such as bearing. Lubricants such as grease are also applied on the moving parts to keep the mechanical accuracy. In a cold start under low temperature or in the first start after being stored for one month or longer, lubricants may not be spread enough. Such condition may lower the positioning accuracy, cause servo and overload alarms, and early wearing of the moving parts. To avoid such situation, perform warm-up operation of the machine at a low speed (at about 20% of normal operation speed). Move the robot arm from the lower to the upper limit of the movable range with the 30 degree joint angle or more for about 10 minutes (RH-3FHR series: for about 30 minutes). After that, speed up the operation gradu- ally. Please use the warm-up operation. (About the details of the warm-up operation, refer to "INSTRUCTION MANUAL/Detailed explanations of functions and operations".)
*1) Jog operation refers to operating the robot manually using the teaching pendant.
CAUTION
6Safety
Precautions for handling 6-230
(5) When the air hoses and cables are used inside the shaft (J3 axis), the grease for cable protection may ooze out or abrasion powders may be generated from the tip of the shaft while the robot is moving. However, move- ments and performance of the robot are not affected. Wipe off the grease or powders as required.
(6) The robot arm and controller must be grounded with 100 or less (class D grounding) to secure the noise resistance and to prevent electric shocks.
(7) The items described in these specifications are conditions for carrying out the periodic maintenance and inspections described in the instruction manual.
(8) When using the robot arm on a mobile axis or elevating table, the machine cables enclosed as standard config- uration may break due to the fixed installation specifications. In this case, use "the machine cable extension (for flexed)" factory shipment special specifications or options.
(9) If this robot interferes with the workpiece or peripheral devices during operation, the position may deviate, etc. Take care to prevent interference with the workpiece or peripheral devices during operation.
(10) Do not attach a tape or a label to the robot arm and the controller. If a tape or a label with strong adhesive power, such as a packaging tape, is attached to the coated surfaces of the robot arm and controller, the coated surface may be damaged when such tape or label is peeled off.
(11) If the robot is operated with a heavy load and at a high speed, the surface of the robot arm gets very hot. It would not result in burns, however, it may cause secondary accidents if touched carelessly.
(12) Do not shut down the input power supply to stop the robot. If the power supply is frequently shut down during a heavy load or high-speed operation, the speed reducer may be damaged, backlash may occur, and the pro- gram data may be destroyed.
(13) During the robot's automatic operation, a break is applied to the robot arm when the input power supply is shut down by a power failure, for instance. When a break is applied, the arm may deviate from the operation path predetermined by automatic operation and, as a result, it may interfere with the mechanical stopper depending on the operation at shutdown. In such a case, take an appropriate measure in advance to prevent any dangerous situation from occurring due to the interference between the arm and peripheral devices. Example) Installing a UPS (uninterruptible power supply unit) to the primary power source in order to reduce
interference.
(14) Do not conduct an insulated voltage test. If conducted by mistake, it may result in a breakdown. (15) Fretting may occur on the axis which moving angle or moving distance move minutely, or not moves. Fretting
is that the required oil film becomes hard to be formed if the moving angle is small, and wear occurs. The axis which not moved is moving slightly by vibration etc. To make no fretting recommends to move these axes about once every day the 30 degree or more, or the 20mm or more.
(16) The United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods must be observed for trans- border transportation of lithium batteries by air, sea, and land. The lithium batteries (ER6V, Q6BAT) used in Mitsubishi industrial robots contain lithium and fall under the definition. When the lithium batteries are shipped for storage, etc., they will be classified as Class 9: Miscellaneous dan- gerous substances and articles. Please contact your transportation company and must provide appropriate transport safety measures as the customers consignor.
(17) If the air supply temperature (primary piping) used for the tool etc. is lower than ambient air temperature, the dew condensation may occur on the coupling or the hose surface.
(18) Collision detection function is valid condition for both of automatic and jog operation at shipping. So, the robot stops immediately if the robot's tool or arm interferes with a peripheral device, minimizing dam- age. Therefore, please use in the valid condition.
(19) When fumigants that contain halogen materials such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine are used for dis- infecting and protecting wooden packaging from insects, they cause malfunction when entering our products. Please take necessary precautions to ensure that remaining materials from fumigant do not enter our prod- ucts, or treat packaging with methods other than fumigation (heat method). Additionally, disinfect and protect wood from insects before packing products.
6-231 EMC installation guideline
6Safety
6.4 EMC installation guideline
6.4.1 Outlines Industrial robots are one of the components of automation systems as well as main components. This section introduces methods and parts to ensure electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) in automation systems.
We test for EMC in the environment described in this manual, but the noise level varies depending on device types, layout, control panel structure, and wiring, etc. Please make final checks for EMC.
6.4.2 EMC This technical standard regulates the following two items.
(1) Emission (EMI Electromagnetic Interference) ............. The capacity not to generate the disturbance noise which has a bad influence outside.
(2) Immunity (EMS Electromagnetic Susceptibility)......... The capacity which does not malfunction for the dis- turbance noise from the outside.
Each contents are shown below.
Item Name Contents Testing technical-
standard number
Emission
(EMI)
Radiative noise disturbance The electromagnetic noise etc. which are emitted to
environs.
EN61000-6-2 2005
EN61000-6-4 2007
EN62061:2005(Annex E) Electrical-conduction noise disturbance The electromagnetism noise etc. which flow out of
the power-supply line.
Immunity
(EMS)
Electrostatic discharge immunity test The noise from the electrified human body.
Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic
field immunity test susceptibility test
The electromagnetism noise from the transceiver,
the broadcasting station, etc.
Electrical fast transient burst immunity
test
The relay noise or the electromagnetism noise etc.
which are caused in power-supply ON/OFF.
Immunity to conducted distrurbances
induced radio-frequency fields
The electromagnetism noise etc. which flow in
through the power source wire and the grounding
wire.
Power frequency magnetic field immunity
test
The electromagnetism noise with a power supply
frequency of 50/60 Hz etc.
Voltage dips, short interruptions and
voltage variations immunity test
The noise in the variation of the source voltage of
the power dispatching, etc.
Surge immunity test The electromagnetism noise by the thunderbolt, etc.
6Safety
EMC installation guideline 6-232
6.4.3 EMC measures There are mainly following items in the EMC measures.
(1) Store into the sealed metal board. (2) Grounding all the conductor that have floated electrically (makes the impedance low). (3) Wiring so that the power source wire and signal wire are separated. (4) Use the shield cable for the cable which wired outside of the metal board. (5) Install the noise filter.
To suppress the noise emitted out of the board, be careful of the following item.
(1) Ensure grounding of the equipment. (2) Use the shield cable. (3) Separate the metal board electrically. Narrows the distance/hole.
The strength of electromagnetic noise emitted to environment is changed a lot by the shielding efficiency of cable and the distance of metal board, so it should be careful.
6.4.4 Component parts for EMC measures (1) Ferrite core
The ferrite core is mounted by the plastics case as one. It can attach by the one-touch, without cutting the cable. This has the effect in the common-mode noise. The measures against the noise are made not influential in the quality of the signal.
There are the following as an example.
(2) Line noise filter Type FR-BLF Mitsubishi Electric Corp.
Maker: SEIWA ELECTRIC MFG. Co.,Ltd.
Type
Outside dimension (mm) Diameter of the
adaptation cable
[max] (mm)A B C D
E04SR401938 61 38 19 40 19.0
E04SR301334 39 34 13 30 13.0
Maker: TAKACHI ELECTRONICS ENCLOSURE CO., LTD.
Type
Outside dimension (mm) Diameter of the
adaptation cable
[max] (mm)A B C D
TFT-274015S 43.8 27.4 20.7 - 26.5
Appendix-233 Classification of functions using external input/output signals
7Appendix
7 Appendix
Appendix 1 Classification of functions using external input/output signals
Before using the functions, note the following.
Table 7-1 Classification of functions using external input/output signals
Classification Function Description
Safety signal Emergency stop input Detects emergency stop inputs.
This function meets the requirements of category 3 and PL d.
Door switch input Receives the status of the switch installed on the door of the safety fence to
detect the opening of the door.
Enabling device input This function checks the state of the switch on the enabling device.
Non-safety signal Mode changeover switch input Switches the controller mode between MANUAL and AUTOMATIC.
Emergency stop output Monitors whether the robot is in the emergency stop state.
Mode output Monitors whether the robot operates in MANUAL or AUTOMATIC mode.
Robot error output Monitors the error status of the robot.
Magnet contactor control
connector output for addition
axes
Synchronizes the state of the additional axes (servo ON/OFF) with that of the
robot arm.
For details, refer to Page 163, "3.9 Magnet contactor control connector output
(AXMC) for addition axes".
7Appendix
Origin position adjustment of J2 axis Appendix-234
Appendix 2 Origin position adjustment of J2 axis
When a calculated point is used for a robot's work point, the accuracy of J2 axis is important. This paragraph "Appendix 2 Origin position adjustment of J2 axis" gives the details of an origin position adjustment by the con- figuration flag (RIGHT/LEFT).
Fig.7-1 Origin position adjustment
For the origin position adjustment, a reference point is an axis center of a shaft. When a center of the hand is off- set from a center of the shaft, the hand must be removed before the origin position adjustment.
Origin position adjustment procedure
1) Designate any point as an origin position.
2) Match the center of the shaft with the origin position in a right hand coordinate system.
3) Perform teaching work to the joint variables JR.
4) Match the center of the shaft with the origin position in a left hand coordinate system.
5) Perform teaching work to the joint variables JL.
6) Execute the following commands in the order presented.
7) Move J2 axis to 0 degrees, and check the robot position.
MDJNT_J2=(JR.J2+JL.J2)/2
JDJNT_Data=(0,0,0,0,0,0)
JDJNT_Data.J2=JDJNT_Data.J2-(MDJNT_J2)
PrmWrite 1,"DJNT",JDJNT_Data
After the origin position adjustment, an adjusted value is stored in the parameter DJNT.
For another origin position adjustment with retaining an earlier adjusted value after the first adjustment is finished, change "JDJNT_- Data=(0,0,0,0,0,0)" into "PrmRead 1,"DJNT",JDJNT_Data" before command execution.
As a repeat of command execution causes an accumulation of the adjusted values, clear the parameter DJNT back to 0 before another
origin position adjustment.
Appendix-235 Specifications discussion material (RH-6FH series: Floor installation type)
7Appendix
Appendix 3 Specifications discussion material (RH-6FH series: Floor installation type)
Customer information
Purchased model
Shipping special specifications
Options (Installable after shipment)
Maintenance parts (Consumable parts)
Company name Name
Address Telephone
Item Type Arm length Stroke Controller
General specification RH-6FH -D 350 450 550 200 340
CR750-06HD-1
RH-6FH -1D CR751-06HD-0
Clean specification RH-6FH C-D 350 450 550 200 340
CR750-06HD-1
RH-6FH C-1D CR751-06HD-0
Oil mist specification RH-6FH M-D 350 450 550 200 340
CR750-06HD-1
RH-6FH M-1D CR751-06HD-0
Item Standard specification Special shipping specifications
Robot arm Machine cable 5m fixed type 2m fixed type: 1S-02UCBL-01 (For CR750 controller) 1F-02UCBL-02 (For CR751 controller)
CE Marking specification Not conforming with EMC directive.
Not provided -S13
Item Type Provision, and specifications when provided.
R o bo
t ar
m
J1 axis operating range change 1F-DH-01 Not provided Provided
Machine cable extension
(extension type)
1S- CBL-01 Fixed type (For CR750 controller): Not provide 5m 10m 15m
1S- LCBL-01 Flexed type (For CR750 controller): Not provide 5m 10m 15m
Machine cable extension
(direct type)
1S- LUCBL-01 Flexed type (For CR750 controller): Not provide 5m 10m 15m
1F- UCBL-02 Fixed type (For CR751 controller): Not provide 10m 15m 20m
1F- LUCBL-02 Flexed type ((For CR751 controller): Not provide 10m 15m 20m
Solenoid valve set 1F-VD0 -01 1F-VD0 E-01
Not provide 1F-VD0 -01 (Sink type): 1set 2set 3set 4set 1F-VD0 E-01 (Source type): 1set 2set 3set 4set
Hand input cable 1F-HC35C-01 Not provided Provided
Hand output cable 1F-GR60S-01 Not provided Provided
Hand curl tube 1E-ST0408C-300 Not provided Provided
External Wiring/Piping box 1F-UT-BOX Not provided Provided
Internal Wiring/Piping for hand 1F-HS408S-01 Not provided Provided (For 200mm stroke)
1F-HS408S-02 Not provided Provided (For 340mm stroke)
C o n tr
o lle
r Simple teaching pendant R32TB-
R33TB- Not provided R32TB (CR750 controller): 7m 15m
R33TB (CR751 controller): 7m 15m
Highly efficient teaching pendant R56TB-
R57TB- Not provided R56TB (CR750 controller): 7m 15m
R57TB (CR751 controller): 7m 15m
Parallel I/O interface 2D-TZ368/ 2D-TZ378
Not provided 2D-TZ368(Sink type)/ -1pc. -2pc. 2D-TZ378(Source type)/ -1pc. -2pc.
External I/O cable (For parallel I/O interface)
2D-CBL (2D-TZ368/TZ378)
Not provided 5m-( )pc. 15m-( )pc.
Parallel I/O unit 2A-RZ361/ 2A-RZ371
Not provided 2A-RZ361(Sink type)/( ) unit 2A-RZ371(Source type)/( ) unit
External I/O cable (For Parallel I/O unit)
2A-CBL (2A-RZ361/RZ371)
Not provided 5m-( )pc. 15m-( )pc.
CC-Link interface 2D-TZ576 Not provided Provided
Controller protection box CR750-MB For CR750 controller: Not provided Provided
CR751-MB For CR751 controller: Not provided Provided
RT ToolBox2 3D-11C-WINE Not provided Windows XP/Vista/7/8/8.1/10 English CD-ROM
RT ToolBox2 mini 3D-12C-WINE Not provided Windows XP/Vista/7/8/8.1/10 English CD-ROM
MELFA-3D Vision 3.0 3F-53U-WINM Not provided Provided
Instructions manual 5F-FB01-PE01 Not provided Provided ( ) sets
Maintenance parts Backup batteries ER6V ( ) pcs. Backup batteries Q6BAT ( ) pcs. Grease ( ) cans
7Appendix
Specifications discussion material (RH-6FH series: Floor installation type) Appendix-236
Robot selection check list Work description Material handling Assembly Machining L/UL Sealing Testing and inspection Other ( )
Workpiece mass ( ) Hand mass ( )
Atmosphere General environment Clean Oil mist:
Confirm oil proof request (Oil name: )/not request Note1) Dusts (Please take measures such as a jacket.), Chemicals (Please consult), Other ( )
Note1) Refer to Page 38, "2.2.8 Protection specifications" about oil resistance.
Remarks
Appendix-237 Specifications discussion material (RH-12FH series: Floor installation type)
7Appendix
Appendix 4 Specifications discussion material (RH-12FH series: Floor installation type)
Customer information
Purchased model
Shipping special specifications
Options (Installable after shipment)
Maintenance parts (Consumable parts)
Company name Name
Address Telephone
Item Type Arm length Stroke Controller
General specification RH-12FH -D 550 700 850 350 450
CR750-12HD-1
RH-12FH -1D CR751-12HD-0
Clean specification RH-12FH C-D 550 700 850 350 450
CR750-12HD-1
RH-12FH C-1D CR751-12HD-0
Oil mist specification RH-12FH M-D 550 700 850 350 450
CR750-12HD-1
RH-12FH M-1D CR751-12HD-0
Item Standard specification Special shipping specifications
Robot arm Machine cable 5m fixed type 2m fixed type: 1S-02UCBL-01 (For CR750 controller) 1F-02UCBL-02 (For CR751 controller)
CE Marking specification Not conforming with EMC directive.
Not provided -S15
item Type Provision, and specifications when provided.
R o bo
t ar
m
J1 axis operating range change 1F-DH-02 Not provided Provided
Machine cable extension 1S- CBL-01 Fixed type (For CR750 controller): Not provide 5m 10m 15m
1S- LCBL-01 Flexed type (For CR750 controller): Not provide 5m 10m 15m
1F- UCBL-02 Fixed type (For CR751 controller): Not provide 10m 15m 20m
1F- LUCBL-02 Flexed type ((For CR751 controller): Not provide 10m 15m 20m
Solenoid valve set 1S-VD0 -01 1S-VD0 E-01
Not provide 1S-VD0 -01 (Sink type): 1set 2set 3set 4set 1S-VD0 E-01 (Source type): 1set 2set 3set 4set
Hand input cable 1F-HC35C-02 Not provided Provided
Hand output cable 1F-GR60S-01 Not provided Provided
Hand curl tube 1N-ST0608C-01 Not provided Provided
External Wiring/Piping box 1F-UT-BOX-01 Not provided Provided
Internal Wiring/Piping for hand 1F-HS604S-01 Not provided Provided (For 350mm stroke)
1F-HS604S-02 Not provided Provided (For 450mm stroke)
C o n tr
o lle
r Simple teaching pendant R32TB-
R33TB-
Not provided R32TB (CR750 ): 7m 15m R33TB (CR751 ): 7m 15m
Highly efficient teaching pen- dant
R56TB-
R57TB-
Not provided R56TB (CR750 ): 7m 15m R57TB (CR751 ): 7m 15m
Parallel I/O interface 2D-TZ368/
2D-TZ378
Not provided 2D-TZ368(Sink type)/ -1pc. -2pc. 2D-TZ378(Source type)/ -1pc. -2pc.
External I/O cable
(For parallel I/O interface)
2D-CBL (2D-TZ368/TZ378)
Not provided 5m-( )pc. 15m-( )pc.
Parallel I/O unit 2A-RZ361/
2A-RZ371
Not provided 2A-RZ361(Sink type)/( ) unit
2A-RZ371(Source type)/( ) unit
External I/O cable
(For Parallel I/O unit)
2A-CBL (2A-RZ361/RZ371)
Not provided 5m-( )pc. 15m-( )pc.
CC-Link interface 2D-TZ576 Not provided Provided
Controller protection box CR750-MB CR750 : Not provided Provided
CR751-MB CR751 : Not provided Provided
RT ToolBox2 3D-11C-WINE Not provided Windows XP/Vista/7/8/8.1/10 English CD-ROM
RT ToolBox2 mini 3D-12C-WINE Not provided Windows XP/Vista/7/8/8.1/10 English CD-ROM
MELFA-3D Vision 3.0 3F-53U-WINM Not provided Provided
Instructions manual 5F-FB01-PE01 Not provided Provided ( ) sets
Maintenance parts Backup batteries ER6V ( ) pcs. Backup batteries Q6BAT ( ) pcs. Grease ( ) cans
7Appendix
Specifications discussion material (RH-12FH series: Floor installation type) Appendix-238
Robot selection check list Work description Material handling Assembly Machining L/UL Sealing Testing and inspection Other ( )
Workpiece mass ( ) Hand mass ( )
Atmosphere General environment, Clean Oil mist:
Confirm oil proof request (Oil name: )/ not requestNote1) Dusts (Please take measures such as a jacket.), Chemicals (Please consult), Other ( )
Note1) Refer to Page 38, "2.2.8 Protection specifications" about oil resistance.
Remarks
Appendix-239 Specifications discussion material (RH-20FH series: Floor installation type)
7Appendix
Appendix 5 Specifications discussion material (RH-20FH series: Floor installation type)
Customer information
Purchased model
Shipping special specifications
Options (Installable after shipment)
Maintenance parts (Consumable parts)
Company name Name
Address Telephone
Item Type Arm length Stroke Controller
General specification RH-20FH -D 850 1000 350 450
CR750-20HD-1
RH-20FH -1D CR751-20HD-0
Clean specification RH-20FH C-D 850 1000 350 450
CR750-20HD-1
RH-20FH C-1D CR751-20HD-0
Oil mist specification RH-20FH M-D 850 1000 350 450
CR750-20HD-1
RH-20FH M-1D CR751-20HD-0
Item Standard specification Special shipping specifications
Robot arm Machine cable 5m fixed type 2m fixed type: 1S-02UCBL-01 (For CR750 controller) 1F-02UCBL-02 (For CR751 controller)
CE Marking specification Not conforming with EMC directive.
Not provided -S15
item Type Provision, and specifications when provided.
R o bo
t ar
m
J1 axis operating range change 1F-DH-02 Not provided Provided
Machine cable extension 1S- CBL-01 Fixed type (For CR750 controller): Not provide 5m 10m 15m
1S- LCBL-01 Flexed type (For CR750 controller): Not provide 5m 10m 15m
1F- UCBL-02 Fixed type (For CR751 controller): Not provide 10m 15m 20m
1F- LUCBL-02 Flexed type ((For CR751 controller): Not provide 10m 15m 20m
Solenoid valve set 1S-VD0 -01 1S-VD0 E-01
Not provide 1S-VD0 -01 (Sink type): 1set 2set 3set 4set 1S-VD0 E-01 (Source type): 1set 2set 3set 4set
Hand input cable 1F-HC35C-02 Not provided Provided
Hand output cable 1F-GR60S-01 Not provided Provided
Hand curl tube 1N-ST0608C-01 Not provided Provided
External Wiring/Piping box 1F-UT-BOX-01 Not provided Provided
Internal Wiring/Piping for hand 1F-HS604S-01 Not provided Provided (For 350mm stroke)
1F-HS604S-02 Not provided Provided (For 450mm stroke)
C o n tr
o lle
r Simple teaching pendant R32TB-
R33TB-
Not provided R32TB (CR750 ): 7m 15m R33TB (CR751 ): 7m 15m
Highly efficient teaching pen- dant
R56TB-
R57TB-
Not provided R56TB (CR750 ): 7m 15m R57TB (CR751 ): 7m 15m
Parallel I/O interface 2D-TZ368/
2D-TZ378
Not provided 2D-TZ368(Sink type)/ -1pc. -2pc. 2D-TZ378(Source type)/ -1pc. -2pc.
External I/O cable
(For parallel I/O interface)
2D-CBL (2D-TZ368/TZ378)
Not provided 5m-( )pc. 15m-( )pc.
Parallel I/O unit 2A-RZ361/
2A-RZ371
Not provided 2A-RZ361(Sink type)/( ) unit
2A-RZ371(Source type)/( ) unit
External I/O cable
(For Parallel I/O unit)
2A-CBL (2A-RZ361/RZ371)
Not provided 5m-( )pc. 15m-( )pc.
CC-Link interface 2D-TZ576 Not provided Provided
Controller protection box CR750-MB CR750 : Not provided Provided
CR751-MB CR751 : Not provided Provided
RT ToolBox2 3D-11C-WINE Not provided Windows XP/Vista/7/8/8.1/10 English CD-ROM
RT ToolBox2 mini 3D-12C-WINE Not provided Windows XP/Vista/7/8/8.1/10 English CD-ROM
MELFA-3D Vision 3.0 3F-53U-WINM Not provided Provided
Instructions manual 5F-FB01-PE01 Not provided Provided ( ) sets
Maintenance parts Backup batteries ER6V ( ) pcs. Backup batteries Q6BAT ( ) pcs. Grease ( ) cans
7Appendix
Specifications discussion material (RH-20FH series: Floor installation type) Appendix-240
Robot selection check list Work description Material handling Assembly Machining L/UL Sealing Testing and inspection Other ( )
Workpiece mass ( ) Hand mass ( )
Atmosphere General environment, Clean Oil mist:
Confirm oil proof request (Oil name: )/ not requestNote1) Dusts (Please take measures such as a jacket.), Chemicals (Please consult), Other ( )
Note1) Refer to Page 38, "2.2.8 Protection specifications" about oil resistance.
Remarks
Appendix-241 Specifications discussion material (RH-3FHR series: Hanging installation type)
7Appendix
Appendix 6 Specifications discussion material (RH-3FHR series: Hanging installation type)
Customer information
Purchased model
Shipping special specifications
Options (Installable after shipment)
Maintenance parts (Consumable parts)
Robot selection check list
Company name Name
Address Telephone
Item Type Arm length Stroke Controller
General specification RH-3FHR3515-D
350
150 CR750-03HRD-1
RH-3FHR3515-1D CR751-03HRD-0
Clean specification RH-3FHR3512C-D
120
CR750-03HRD-1
RH-3FHR3512C-1D CR751-03HRD-0
Oil mist specification RH-3FHR3512W-D CR750-03HRD-1
RH-3FHR3512W-1D CR751-03HRD-0
Item Standard specification Special shipping specifications
Robot arm Machine cable 5m fixed type 2m fixed type: 1S-02UCBL-01 (For CR750 controller) 1F-02UCBL-02 (For CR751 controller)
item Type Provision, and specifications when provided.
R o bo
t ar
m
Stopper for changing the oper- ating range
1S-DH-05J1 Not provided Provided
1S-DH-05J2 Not provided Provided
Machine cable extension 1S- CBL-01 Fixed type (For CR750 controller): Not provide 5m 10m 15m
1S- LCBL-01 Flexed type (For CR750 controller): Not provide 5m 10m 15m
1F- UCBL-02 Fixed type (For CR751 controller): Not provide 10m 15m 20m
1F- LUCBL-02 Flexed type ((For CR751 controller): Not provide 10m 15m 20m
Solenoid valve set 1S-VD04-05 1S-VD04E-05
Standard specification: Not provide 1S-VD04-05 (Sink type) 1S-VD04E-05(Source type)
1S-VD04W-05 1S-VD04WE-05
Clean/Waterproof specification: Not provide 1S-VD04W-05 (Sink type) 1S-VD04WE-05(Source type)
Hand input cable 1S-HC00S-01 Not provided Provided
Hand output cable 1S-GR35S-02 Not provided Provided
Hand tube 1S-ST0304S Not provided Provided
C o n tr
o lle
r Simple teaching pendant R32TB-
R33TB-
Not provided R32TB (CR750 ): 7m 15m R33TB (CR751 ): 7m 15m
Highly efficient teaching pen- dant
R56TB-
R57TB-
Not provided R56TB (CR750 ): 7m 15m R57TB (CR751 ): 7m 15m
Parallel I/O interface 2D-TZ368/
2D-TZ378
Not provided
2D-TZ368(Sink type): -1pc. -2pc.
2D-TZ378(Source type)/ -1pc. -2pc.
External I/O cable
(For parallel I/O interface)
2D-CBL (2D-TZ368/TZ378)
Not provided 5m-( )pc. 15m-( )pc.
Parallel I/O unit 2A-RZ361/
2A-RZ371
Not provided 2A-RZ361(Sink type)/( ) unit
2A-RZ371(Source type)/( ) unit
External I/O cable
(For Parallel I/O unit)
2A-CBL (2A-RZ361/RZ371)
Not provided 5m-( )pc. 15m-( )pc.
CC-Link interface 2D-TZ576 Not provided Provided
Controller protection box CR750-MB CR750 : Not provided Provided
CR751-MB CR751 : Not provided Provided
RT ToolBox2 3D-11C-WINE Not provided Windows XP/Vista/7/8/8.1/10 English CD-ROM
RT ToolBox2 mini 3D-12C-WINE Not provided Windows XP/Vista/7/8/8.1/10 English CD-ROM
MELFA-3D Vision 3.0 3F-53U-WINM Not provided Provided
Instructions manual 5F-FP01-PE01 Not provided Provided ( ) sets
Maintenance parts Backup batteries ER6V ( ) pcs. Backup batteries Q6BAT ( ) pcs. Grease ( ) cans
Work description Material handling Assembly Machining L/UL Sealing Testing and inspection Other ( )
Workpiece mass ( ) Hand mass ( )
Atmosphere General environment, Clean Oil mist:
Confirm oil proof request (Oil name: )/ not requestNote1) Dusts (Please take measures such as a jacket.), Chemicals (Please consult), Other ( )
Note1) Refer to Page 38, "2.2.8 Protection specifications" about oil resistance.
Remarks
HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS: 5-1-14, YADA-MINAMI, HIGASHI-KU NAGOYA 461-8670, JAPAN Authorised representative:
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. FA - European Business Group Mitsubishi-Electric-Platz 1, D-40882 Ratingen, Germany Tel: +49(0)2102-4860
Jan. 2022 MEE Printed in Japan on recycled paper.
Related manuals for Mitsubishi Electric Melfa RH6FHD,12FHD Series Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the Melfa Mitsubishi Electric works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi Electric Melfa RH6FHD,12FHD Series Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Specifications Manual for Mitsubishi Electric Melfa as well as other Mitsubishi Electric manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Specifications Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi Electric Melfa. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi Electric Melfa RH6FHD,12FHD Series Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Mitsubishi Electric Melfa RH6FHD,12FHD Series Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Mitsubishi Electric Melfa RH6FHD,12FHD Series Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Mitsubishi Electric Melfa RH6FHD,12FHD Series Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi Electric Melfa RH6FHD,12FHD Series Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.